Home

SAP Query (BC-SRV-QUE)

1. cccceccccceececeeeeeaeeceeaeeeeceeeeeseeeessecessucesseeesaeeeesaaees 307 Generating Transport Datasets soriire iini ari vedi eects E i Aa 310 Transpor TYDES cc teeta coca E AUE ER EE 311 Transporting a User Group cccccecccceecccseceeeeeeeseeeceseeeeeceeceeseeessucesseeeesseeeseesessaes 313 Transporting ROS CUS seric ensstnstendaeda tana deudasedanddeadiactantind 314 Transporing a QUICK Yessie i iE E E e eau A E 315 Reading Transport DataSets ccccccccceceesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeseeeeesaneeseeeesaaeeeseneeeseas 316 Managing Transport Datasets ccccccccceseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeeeesaeeeesaueesaaeeeseneeesees 318 Transporting Objects Between Query AreaS cccccccseeeeeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeseaeeesaeeeeeeaaeeeesaaes 319 Language COMPAIISON cccccseeceeceeeeeeeceeeeeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeseaeeeesseeeeeeseeeeesaeeeeeeas 320 General Language Comparison Procedure cccceecceeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeseeeeeeeaeeeeesaeeeeesaeeeeeeas 321 Language Comparison of an INfOSet 0 0 ccc ccccceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeseeeaeeeeesaaeeeesaaeees 325 Language Comparison of a QUETY cccccccseecceccesececeeccecaeesceeseeeceecsueeeesseeeeesaeeeeesaueeees 327 Language Comparison for User Grou p ccccseeccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeueeseesaeeeeeeseaeeeessaeeees 330 POS Ge a E raat anni E E EE 331 Overview of SAP Query Functions ccccceecccceseeeecesee
2. cccccsccccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeesenaeeeeeas 189 Defining Ranked LISTS sis dcsecaicsvsetehbedeoied duwccunddneudes inemansesdeeesaand sounded deveedss loietecent nhenduboes 190 What are Ranked LISTS 7s aces dsc snctedicnecstadaseneisnssanedichicndsasbonedeetomuisn nemetsesesneticdiane 191 Creating Ranked Lists ices sscudadsihcaciad decides secndut ducecdapaconvasdansesndundeveniaesdusaiuadeasenducbia 192 CAMO NG SSS e tens tanedeatocnudensb ys doeseoyetan ds merteen supe qoutaseecensteneadelacy 194 Maintaining Queries in the Human Resources Application HR ccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeees 195 PET a IS ser rc Sense E E A TIE E Sains te T N E TA 196 Evaluations According to a Company s Organizational Structure ccccceeeeeees 198 PS EN AGMINIS TAHON ssaa EA EAE 200 Managing AMOS CS rrrainis n a iaaa a aai araa E TREENAA 201 Selecting InfoSets for Processing ccccseeccecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeesaeeeeesseeeesaeneeesaess 202 Displaying the InfoSet Directory ccecccccseccecceseeeeceseeeceeseeceeuseccsaeeecsegeeeessuseeessageees 203 Directory of Queries for an InfOSet cceccccsesececeeseeecceseeeceeseeseeaseesseaseeessageeesseass 204 Query Directory FUNCIONS seqcensnecsconcsceansereraecnasannencept nedesasxtudasabiaedsecsaneciensteheterentiadeeatencd 205 SAV ISIS DICCON eE E E 206 Maintaining EOS CS siess ete seepmnde tet Aea a Aia Ra 207 PISTON WAC NO SOUS eeen E E E 208
3. Control levels Desc Text Total Cnt Box BlnkLn MewPg From city LJ LJ LJ LI E E Destination LJ LJ LJ LJ LI LJ Departure time isl LJ LJ LJ E L Flight date E E L L On the Field Output Options screen you also specify that you want to display the price per booking including the currency Field output options Field From city Destination Airline carrier Id Flight connection Id Departure time Arrival time Flight date Ticket price Occupied seats Free seats Booking number Customer name Flight class Smoker Booking price in foreign currency Length Sidi ew 20 FO 20 20 OE Pos Rnd Unit Format Line color Line color Line color Line color Line color Line color Line color Line color Line color Line color Line color Line color Line color Line color Line color w W ON ON R R R E a a a a a a a a a a a OOOOOVOOLOOOOOO OC amaa To execute the query select Execute You then see a list with an overall total and number of bookings at the end April 2001 171 SAP Query BC SRV QUE Sorting and Subtotals From city Fl date Booking HOUEOEs4 HEEGOES5 O0QOOCSE HOU HEEGUES6 HEUGEESS HEEEEE AG HEEBUE4 1 HEEEUEAS HEUGUEAS Total F1 Dest Ticket price Customer name Ballmann G Radetzky F flelcke E SAF France SA SAF Canada Brucher K Brucher F Francke E Dampf Hans Becker Boris Date 10 05 1998 Number F1 Date OOOOOLGL1 HEEEUES
4. Exactly one SAP Query user group must be assigned to a role InfoSets have to be assigned to this user group Users from the user group and now also the role can use these InfoSets for reporting Itis not necessary to enter the users into the user group as they are assigned in the role assignment This means that a user who is assigned to a role is automatically copied into the user group assigned to the role This assignment is only valid however if the user uses the role to call the InfoSet Query If InfoSet Query is accessed in any other way then the general access authorization implemented using SAP Query user groups applies To be able to save queries a user needs the relevant change authorization for queries authorization object S QUERY for the field ACTVT value 02 If the user does not have this authorization he or she is able to use the available InfoSets and queries within the role but is not able to save queries You can find further information under Including InfoSet Query in Roles Seite 51 User groups The procedure for controlling access rights using user groups is exactly the same as with the SAP Query This means that per user group you determine which InfoSets can be accessed and which users belong to a user group Users allowed to create and change queries must be given the change authorization authorization object S_ QUERY for field ACTVT value 02 You can find further informatio
5. In order to make the list easier to read you are recommended not to output lines 2 3 and 4 until column 15 198 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Evaluations According to a Company s Organizational Structure When you execute the query you see the selection screen for HR Planning You have to execute the query with an evaluation path that evaluates associated people SAP delivers the evaluation path person that you could use here You specify all the other parameters as you would for normal HR Planning reports The query then produces the list You cannot specify a sort sequence with analyses based on a company s internal organization J You cannot evaluate factoring in a query When you select persons and info type records the conditions of the underlying logical database apply The time period selection refers only to the validity period of the info type records If the beginning or end of the validity period falls within the selected period the length of the validity is given when you output the data In other cases the period selected is displayed April 2001 199 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG System Administration System Administration The following sections are directed towards the system administrator Here you will learn how to create work environments for the end user 200 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Managing InfoSets Managing InfoSets This chapter describe
6. See also the section Logical Database F1S Seite 349 Occupied seats _ Total of current b gt LI SBOOK SRM UIUSILIL e 376 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Column Headers Column Headers You may display the structure of a basic list in the Query Painter This display contains the header line page header the line structure and the footer line page footer Header lines are subdivided into page headers and column headers The checkbox Display header is selected in the standard under List Line Output Options Seite 375 this means that column headers will be displayed If you want to hide a line deselect the checkbox for the entire line The system uses the short descriptions of fields stored in the ABAP Dictionary as column headers If you want to change this text in a QuickView do so by simply clicking on the column header you want to modify g In queries fields may only ever have one header Whenever you alter the output length of a field the width of its header is changed as well April 2001 377 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Separators Separators Using separators makes list display clearer and more readily understandable No Airp From city Apt ID Flgtedate Plane Capacity Occupied 0017 AA JFK NEW YORK SFO 11 1971999 747 400 66L E 1122F 1999 747 400 66L 46 1172971999 747 400 66L 46 Whenever you create a list in the Query Painter it is framed automatically a
7. 268 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE InfoSets in the HR Application If you want you can change the default sequence of field groups and fields as required using drag amp drop 7 To save the InfoSet choose H 8 To generate the InfoSet choose T g On the Change InfoSet InfoSet name screen you can choose Edit Change infotype selection to add more infotypes to the InfoSet or to remove infotypes from the InfoSet Remember to regenerate the InfoSet afterwards This screen also enables you to update InfoSets if for example the system contains new additional fields for specific key values To do so choose nfoSet Additional functions Update additional HR fields 9 Go back to the initial screen for InfoSet maintenance 10 Choose User group assignment 11 Select a user group and save your entry April 2001 269 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG HR Logical Databases HR Logical Databases In Human Resources HR the following logical databases can be used as a data source for HR InfoSets e PNP e PAP e PCH By selecting a logical database you determine the HR data that can be reported on using an InfoSet Logical Database PCH This logical database generally enables you to report on all HR infotypes However you are advised not to use this logical database unless you want to report on Personnel Planning data Logical Database PNP Use logical database PNP to report on HR master data It
8. Change authorization can however only be revoked if the user in question actually has a corresponding authorization in the user master record Checkboxes behind user names that have no change authorization according to S_ QUERY are grayed out and cannot be selected 4 Assign one or more InfoSets to the user group J Assigning InfoSets to user groups is a requirement for defining queries You can define queries only for those InfoSets assigned to user groups in which you are active Each InfoSet can be assigned to several user groups To display a list of all InfoSets select Assign InfoSets You assign InfoSets to a user group by selecting the ones you require 5 Save your entries 290 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Assigning Users to User Groups Assigning Users to User Groups To assign a user to one or more user groups proceed as follows 1 Enter the user name in the field User on the initial screen 2 Choose Assign user 3 Inthe list of user groups select the groups to which you want to assign the user 4 Save the assignment g In user group lists you can revoke change authorization for queries from those user groups to which a particular user is assigned For further information see Assigning Users and InfoSets Seite 290 April 2001 291 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Assigning InfoSets Assigning InfoSets You can only define queries for those InfoSets assigned to your current
9. For a list of existing InfoSets select Environment Directories gt InfoSets or display a list of possible entries for the relevant input field This is the same list you see when you call the corresponding function in the component Maintain InfoSets If you use the choose an InfoSet from the list the system returns you to the initial screen and displays the InfoSet in the field InfoSet If you want to know which InfoSets are assigned to a particular user group display the user group See Managing User Groups Seite 287 for more information 286 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Managing User Groups Managing User Groups This section describes the functions available in SAP Query for managing user groups April 2001 287 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Displaying User Groups Displaying User Groups Whenever you need information about an existing user group enter the name of the user group on the initial user group maintenance screen and choose Display A long text describing the task area for which the user group is intended The author and the person who made the last set of changes to the user group are also displayed To see which users belong to a user group choose Description The resulting list also shows you which InfoSets are assigned to the user group 288 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Creating User Groups Creating User Groups To create a user group proceed as follows 1 Ent
10. Restriction of the Reporting Set Unless you restrict the reporting set the selection is made for all of the objects in the system that can be selected with the InfoSet you have used However reporting is often required for a specific set of objects only such as the employees in a particular department or the business events taking place in a particular period To achieve this aim you must restrict the reporting set accordingly You can restrict the reporting set as follows e Using the current hit list which you obtained by making a specific selection e Using a set of persons which you selected using the organizational structure g In addition to the options described here your system can include other customer defined restriction options If you require further information on the restriction options for the reporting set access Customizing for the Human Resources Information System and see Selections IDs Extern Define Selection IDs Extern and Define Groupings Extern If you require more detailed information see Restrict the Reporting Set Seite 63 58 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Selection Processing the Selected Set of Objects Once the selection has been made you can continue processing the selected set of objects You can e Display the list of selected objects e Delete objects from the list e Branch to HR master data or detail maintenance If you require further information see Process t
11. Same attributes as field PAYMENT a O Text field Mo of characters gt Calculation field Number of digits Decimal places Date field Time field Symbol icons Calculation formula PAYMENT Condition FO YEAR AND 4 lt FD MONTH AND FO MONTH lt 6 O Inputon selection screen _ Mandatory The definition of the statistic itself is simple Title Liuarterly revenues Field Mo Sst De Su NS No Avy Len Rnd Unit Text Airline carrier Id 1 1 BUSS Bookings for the 1st quarter a LJ ELELE 18 DEM Bookings for the 2nd quarter 4 E EELE 1E DEM Bookings for the 3rd quarter 5 LJ ELELE 18 DEM Bookings for the 4th quarter G C ELELE 18 DEM April 2001 187 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Defining Headers in Statistics Defining Headers in Statistics On the Statistic Header screen you can define your own headers for the statistic To do this you choose Next screen to go to the next screen in the sequence Page header headers and column headers Gaurterly revenues for amp Y Air ist quarter Y nd quarter amp ard quarter amp 4th quarter amp DEM DEM DEM DEM Line structure Air Bookings_for_the_1 Book ings_for_the_2 Bookings_for_the_3 Bookings for_the_4 Page footer TE In general terms maintaining headers for statistics is exactly the same as for basic lists see Changing Headers Seite 158 The maintenance screen shows the basic structure of the statistic It contains the hea
12. Source System Target System Export Import Copying Transport Global area objects can be transported into other systems Standard area query objects can not only be transported to other clients within their own system but into all clients of other systems as well In addition query objects can be transported from the global query area to the standard query area and back within the same system g Transports are normally performed by the system administrator not by end users For this reason you need the appropriate authorizations see SAP Query Authorizations Seite 81 For further information refer to the following sections April 2001 303 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Transporting Global Area Objects Transporting Global Area Objects The global area contains cross client objects Therefore transporting them always means moving them to another system In the global area an object s development class determines whether or not it can be transported Local objects those in temporary development classes cannot be transported All other objects are entered into a correction request whenever they are created or changed Transport then takes place in the normal manner using the Change and Transport Organizer transport request release Whenever an object is transported using the Change and Transport Organizer you are unable to check the Query objects being transported for compatibility with the target system Thus
13. Executing Queries Online Executing Queries Online To execute a query online select Query followed by Execute or Execute with variant If you select Execute with variant you see a dialog box where you can enter the variant name g A variant is a saved set of selection criteria for a query or the report generated by the query If you specify a variant when starting a query the system uses the values in the variant for the query selection criteria You enter variants on the selection screen and save them under any name For each query you can create any number of variants To create a variant select Goto gt Maintain variants With queries from the global query area you can create system variants For further information see Query Areas Seite 297 For further information about variants please refer to the appropriate sections in the ABAP User Manual or to the online documentation Getting started with R 3 You can create one standard variant per query This standard variant is always used when you choose Execute If you select Exec with variant the system sets the standard variant as the default value see Assigning Title Format and Notes Seite 139 In addition to the functions Execute and Execute with variant the function Test is also available on query maintenance screens This function allows you to determine the maximum number of read accesses to the database and thus is especially useful for test purposes When
14. Infotypes Infotypes for If the object Infotypes for ee can Personnel Administration 0000 0999 type k De e specified ciudad Time Management 2000 2999 p iioi e Infotypes for e Some in the a a the object infotypes for InfoSet Infotypes for Personnel Planning objects that type Personnel can be related to persons Infotypes for Administrati objects that on such as can be 0001 and related to 0002 the specified object type If the object type is not specified e All infotypes e Customer infotypes 266 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE InfoSets in the HR Application Reportin Selection of all persons who participated in a Selection of Selection of g specific business event output of prices for all business all example reserved business events events held applicants Ss in London in hired last March year to work output of all on special persons projects who output of participated addresses in these for the business applicants events selected Selection of all persons assigned to a specific personnel area output of qualifications held by these persons Selection of all positions assigned to a specific organization al unit output of all persons assigned to the positions Creating InfoSets The maintenance procedure for HR InfoSets differs from the procedure described so far in this section inasmuch as HR data fields are grouped together in infotypes To set up an InfoSet fo
15. Mo Airp From city Flat date Capacity Plane Occupied Booking total FRANKFURT 11 29 1999 1d 23 456 52 DEM FRANKFURT 12 02 1999 140 175 664 16 DEM FRANKFURT 12 09 1999 66 01 870 04 DEM FRANKFURT 12 29 1999 E 0 00 DEM FRANKFURT chal EEE 24a 291 266 44 DEM Total Flight connection 0400 Bre 267 16 DEM Number Flight connection 0400 5 0402 FRA FRANKFURT JFK NEW YORK 11 19 1999 Jai DC 10 10 16 20 379 60 DEM 0402 FRA FRANKFURT JFK NEW YORK 11 42 1999 Jai The fields Departure city Destination city etc have to be displayed for each connection even though appropriate positioning of the fields could make this unnecessary Organize your fields in such a manner that only fields highlighted in red are found in the first line Further information can be found under Positioning and Sizing Seite 381 and in The Hierarchy Display Seite 376 10 Change the texts for subtotals and preliminary counter totals by clicking on them 11 Insert separators using the icon in the toolbox and add additional slashes before and after list lines as you deem necessary Further information can be found under List Line Output Options Seite 375 12 Execute your QuickView Enter an airline and a time period on the selection screen A list similar to the following might appear April 2001 385 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Totaling and Counting No Arp From city Apt Dest Flat date Capacity Plane Occupied Booking total 040
16. T01 C T KNC1 UM01U Total No T01 04 0 036 P 004 03 009 P 9 T01 P R KNC1 UM01U T01 05 0 047 P 008 02 021 F IM 10 T01 A G KNC1 UM01U Average R0O1 01 0 000 C 006 00 008 R 11 V01 RANGCT Rank R0O1 02 0 000 X C 010 00 010 12 VO1 KNA1 KUNNR Number R01 03 0 000 X C 035 00 035 13 VO1 KNA1 NAME1 Name_ R01 04 0 057 P 016 02 021 F 14 VO1 KNC1 UM01U Sales 1 Customer number 2 Name 3 Fiscal year 4 Sales in posting period 1 5 Currency key 6 Country key 7 Sales in posting period 1 8 Total amount 9 Share in 10 Mean value 11 Rank 12 Customer number 13 Name 14 Sales in posting period 1 When you call the function module the entries of significance in the table LISTDESC are all those where LISTDESC LID LIST_ID Example Implementing EXIT RSAQEXCE 001 In conclusion a simple example demonstrates the implementation of the function module EXIT RSAQEXCE_001 Here the passed tables LISTDESC und DATATAB appear as a list and in the case of the table LISTDESC the fields FCONT FCURPOS and FGRAF are omitted The example also clearly shows how to interpret the individual parameters and how to access the data table INCLUDE ZXQUEU01 FIELD SYMBOLS lt F gt NEW PAGE LINE SIZE 132 WRITE Query PROGRAM 16 14 of user group PROGRAM 4 12 ULINE SKIP 1 WRITE Fields of sub list LIST_ID ULINE LOOP AT LISTDESC WHERE LID LIST_ID W
17. The dialog box can be moved if you so wish Propose join conditions The system inserts standard proposals for joining two tables The defaults suggested are derived based on the foreign key dependencies stored in the Dictionary or on the key fields of the tables used in the join Create links The join conditions for your tables are displayed in line form In order to create such a line click on a starting field Then leaving your left mouse button depressed drag your cursor to the field that you want to link to If linking of the two fields is allowed the system creates a line after you have released the left mouse button Define link type Place the cursor on the line and depress the right mouse button A context menu appears where you can choose to display or delete join conditions If you choose to display the join conditions a dialog box appears where you can set the join type to either inner join or left outer join You can find further information Classical Table Join Definition Seite 274 Delete table A dialog box appears where you can enter the name of the table you want to delete Alternatively you can select the corresponding pushbutton in the table window Closebox Alias table Choose Alias table if you want to include the same table in a join twice Define an alias name for the appropriate table as described in Assigning Additional Tables Seite 234 You can include the table in your join under both its original
18. BC SRV QUE Creating Selection Criteria The code at AT SELECTION SCREEN has to be made separately for each selection When you generate a query report checks are made to ensure the check code for all selections is collected at the same AT SELECTION SCREEN and that only those selections that appear on the selection screen are referred to April 2001 255 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Displaying a List of Existing Parameters Displaying a List of Existing Parameters To display a list of existing parameters for an InfoSet select Environment Directories gt Selections You then see the defined parameters and selection criteria the sequence in which they appear on the query selection screen the descriptions the selection texts and the type definition specifications 256 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Further Code Further Code Previous sections described how to use additional tables additional structures and additional fields to extend the scope of a query for evaluating data from a data source when you create an InfoSet Additional tables additional structures and additional fields have two common features e The point event at which SAP Query reads an additional table or performs a calculation on an additional field depends on the logical database table since the associated ABAP code becomes part of the GET event processing that table e Any query for the InfoSet can address both additional fields
19. Choose Extras Show set operations The additional Set operations tab page is provided by the system Both of the additional and i pushbuttons are added to the Selection tab page 2 On the Selection tab page choose eh The hit list is copied to the Object set A field Make a second selection On the Selection tab page choose 1 The hit list is copied to the Object set B field 5 Choose the Set operations tab page The Object set A field contains the hit list from your first selection The Object set B field contains the hit list from your second selection 6 To perform the required set operation select it and then confirm by choosing W Perform operation The Resulting set field contains the result of the set operation You can now process the resulting set as follows Copy to the hit list for output Copy to Object set A or Object set B for further set operations Copy to the reporting set and then use it for further selections 7 To copy the resulting set select one of the transfer options for the resulting set and choose ma Copy resulting set Result The resulting set is transferred to the specified set where you can continue to process it April 2001 65 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Output Output Use InfoSet Query enables you to output data on selected objects as required You can start output directly on the InfoSet Query screen or as a full screen On the InfoSet Query screen the re
20. EF SAP AG Definition of a Table Join without Graphics All fields contained in the two tables being used are listed with their technical name and long text in the Link conditions screen The two field lists can be scrolled through independently of each other If two fields are to be linked with the equality relationship then the same code must be entered for both fields into an entry field assigned to both fields This code consists of two arbitrary characters though digits are recommended This code is similar to the code used for field groups in that its purpose is simply to ensure a unique correspondence between fields There are certain restrictions in the database system which mean that totally arbitrary combinations of fields cannot be linked together Two fields can be linked only if both fields have the same data type in the Dictionary including the length attribute This means that two fields can be linked if they have the same domain There are separate search functions for each table to assist in the search for suitable fields Text domains and data types can be searched for The text search operates across the technical names of the fields as well as over the long texts The Field documentation function can be used to find information about the technical definition of a field so as to allow a specific search for suitable fields If the same code has been entered for two compatible fields these two fields are placed in the same li
21. EF SAP AG Query Areas renamed still lie within the accepted name spaces for the new names In this case it is advisable to choose an appropriate development class when you are renaming the object With user groups the individual queries within the user group must also be assigned new development classes Renaming InfoSets and User Groups in the Global Area When using the function Rename with InfoSets and user groups be aware of the fact that in addition to the InfoSet or user group all dependent queries must also be renamed If several InfoSets or user groups have been renamed a series of queries must be included in a correction request in addition to the InfoSets and user groups The renaming process is only actually finished when all objects necessary have been entered into a correction request Copying Query Objects between Different Query Areas In order to copy query objects from one query area to another a special procedure must be followed to ensure that the datasets of each query area remain intact and consistent During transfer you must check to see that the object being transferred can be inserted in the new dataset without upsetting the consistency of the latter If you think of the global area as a single client then the whole copying process from the standard area to the global area and vice versa corresponds to object transport from one client to the next Thus you copy query objects from one query area to the next in much
22. Enter the data required If you want to log query execution within a certain query area for certain InfoSets only enter a record for every InfoSet If you want to log query execution within a certain query area for all InfoSets enter the identification for the work area and for the InfoSet You cannot use the entry for the query area If you want to log the use of all InfoSets on execution of queries with the InfoSet Query in the standard as well as in the global area for example enter each query area in a separate line For the InfoSets enter respectively 4 Choose H Result The logging is active according to what you have entered If you start queries within InfoSet Query their execution is logged from now on You can analyze the logs with specific queries or by using the Data Browser You should regularly delete logs that you no longer need See also Analyzing Logs Seite 44 Deleting Logs Seite 45 April 2001 43 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Analyzing Log Data Analyzing Log Data Use You can analyze the InfoSet Query log data with specific queries or by using the data browser of the ABAP Workbench In the global area SAP delivers the user group SAPQUERY SQ and the InfoSet SAPQUERY_LOGGING as well as some queries with which you can analyze log data You can of course create queries of your own for analyzing the log data if you wish Prerequisites The system contains logs on the execution of queries
23. Generating InfoSets listing the errors found or informing you that the checking and generation process has been successfully completed 214 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Assigning InfoSets to User Groups Assigning InfoSets to User Groups You can only define queries for those InfoSets assigned to your current user group On the initial screen of the component Maintain InfoSets you can use the Assign to user groups function to specify which user groups you want to assign to a particular InfoSet To assign an InfoSet proceed as follows 1 Enter the InfoSet name in the field InfoSet on the initial screen 2 Select Assign to user groups This generates a list of all the user groups You can assign the InfoSet to the user groups you want by selecting J You can also use the Assign to user group function if you have already assigned the InfoSet to some user groups but you now want to change the assignment The user groups to which the InfoSet has already been assigned are flagged April 2001 215 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Checking InfoSets Checking InfoSets The Check function performs the global syntax check described above but does not create a generated version in the query database When maintaining an InfoSet component which contains ABAP code you can also perform a global syntax check in addition to the automatic local syntax check i You can use the function Goto gt More functions Ch
24. REPORT START OF SELECTION GET SPFLI GET SFLIGHT GET SFLIGHT LATE GET SPFLI LATE END OF SELECTION START code Parameter codes DATA code GET Code Additional fields Additional tables GET Code Additional fields Additional tables GET LATE Code GET LATE Code END Code before list output List output END Coding after list output mF SAP AG Help fields for calculations for example parameter checks Table SPFLI assigned for example parameter Check access statistics Table SFLIGHT assigned Table SFLIGHT assigned Table SPFLI assigned write own first page write own last page eg Ouput access statistics To request a list of defined codes of the InfoSet select Environment Directories Codes The following sections describe the different sections of code in more detail 258 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE DATA Code DATA Code The DATA section allows you to declare data used in other sections of code In query reports this section appears before all other event key words so that the declared data is known to and available in all other sections of code You use the DATA section mainly to declare variables e g number variables counters additional field strings field symbols which are required for performing calculations in other sections of code or specifying values for key fields of a linked additional table You are strongly rec
25. SAP Logo R 2 RIVA R 3 ABAP SAP ArchiveLink SAP Business Workflow WebFlow SAP EarlyWatch BAPI SAPPHIRE Management Cockpit mySAP com Logo and mySAP com are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and in several other countries all over the world All other products mentioned are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies 2 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Icons Icon Meaning Caution Example E Z cul Syntax Note Recommendation April 2001 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Inhalt SAP Query BC SRV QUE csssccsseceeceseccesscesseceecseeceassceacaesetarseeateseseaneseataees 10 GTR i accuse E E sepa ae eas stave pe pan E us en in cence Sn pe go E eosin see aes anss 11 aee NE CaN OS E E is esos aa AEA A E A A NA A E E E A A 13 SROIN Sl OUE ea E EE EE 16 MO SE DISP Y erae eE E ET EE 18 citing the Moser DISD lA y rents satan ca dotastemacentaeedenauweeeiadanwes EEO E EEEE EEEa 21 S15 S164 1 8 9 DIS play asrni eae ee tne eee oe eee eee eee eee 23 DUUE LSE BDIS P Y rerne aio A EE EE a E EEEE 25 FORMANDO ME OUMU srr E E E 27 Rausing AUO e ea EE A E EEE 30 Creating New CG Saoirse saci cence erence datntieeiaiancaaaene sdedsoe a aaO 31 Loading Quai S arcs cee meta ace n EE E EE AE EENE EE RETE 33 Deleting SUNS Secs tee eai ea a a cedar ea a da te awe a i i a a Norii aS 34 SavNg QUCNES sssrinin eee ee a a ee 35 SEE LAT p AAEE T E E A E A EAE A A E E 37 Change MATO
26. Using an ABAP Report you can make evaluations on datasets for which the automatic data retrieval of the query is not sufficient You can find more information under Data Retrieval by a Program Seite 279 Select this field if you wish to allow evaluations on a sequential dataset without having to take care of the data retrieval in query reports yourself Then enter the sequential dataset file name you want to read Its record structure should correspond to the structure specified Further information can be found under Sequential Dataset Seite 278 The option Sequential Dataset is shown under Data Retrieval by Program if you choose the pushbutton Additional Options in the dialog box displayed above If a text field exists for a particular field then this is displayed in the InfoSet maintenance with a corresponding icon When creating queries using the InfoSet you can choose between April 2001 221 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Assigning Data Sources displaying the value and displaying the relevant text in the report Choose the option No automatic text recognition if this is not required You can use the field Fixed point arithmetic to specify whether queries defined via this InfoSet should work with fixed point arithmetic switched on or off The contents of this field are thus an attribute of the generated reports In the standard system fixed point arithmetic is always switched on g You can change the fixed
27. has been designed for users with little or no knowledge of the SAP programming language ABAP SAP Query offers users a broad range of ways to define reporting programs and create different types of reports such as basic lists statistics and ranked lists Features SAP Query s range of functions correspond to the classical reporting functions available in the system Needs in this area like list statistic or ranked list creation can be met using queries All necessary data can be selected from various R 3 tables To define a report you first have to enter individual texts such as titles and select the fields and options which determine the report layout Then you can edit list display in WYSIWYG mode whenever you want using drag and drop and the other toolbox functions available 72 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE List of Components List of Components SAP Query consists of four components The following overview lists these components and the menu options you select to access them e Query Maintenance Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities gt SAP Query gt Queries e Maintaining InfoSets Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities gt SAP Query InfoSets e User Group Maintenance Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities SAP Query User Groups e Language Comparison Translation Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Translation gt SAP Query Each screen of each component includes the En
28. s fields can then be evaluated The keywords that will allow you to choose the record must be provided by the data source Additional fields allow you to calculate new values from existing information With this additional fields have the limitation that they must have a simple scalar data type Additional structures are actually additional fields with a non scalar type of data This data type must always be a flat structure from the ABAP Dictionary In every case it is important to choose the right time for either reading the record or performing the calculation Here the right time stands for a table in the logical database At this time all information necessary to read the record or run the calculation must be available to the system Obtaining additional information is thus very much dependent upon these times that is upon the logical databases tables You can assign as many additional tables additional structures and additional fields to a logical database table as you want The fields from these additional tables and the additional fields themselves are retrieved when the logical database table is filled Thus they are also contained in the field list that corresponds to the logical database table and can be assigned to a field group just like the table s fields Proceed as follows when creating or changing additional information 1 On the screen for maintaining InfoSets choose the table of the data source for which you wish to
29. under certain circumstances copy and execute them see Copying Queries Seite 98 Each user can be assigned to several user groups 76 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Maintaining InfoSets Maintaining InfoSets System administrators use the component Maintain InfoSets to set up the appropriate working environment for end users InfoSets provide special views of data sources i e they determine which fields of a data source can be evaluated in queries InfoSets are assigned to user groups By creating InfoSets and assigning them to user groups the system administrator determines the range of reports the individual application departments or end users can generate using SAP Query A certain number of InfoSets are available to an end user for each user group of which he is a member These InfoSets are those applicable to the work area that is characterized by the user group An InfoSet can be assigned to several user groups mf Vendor master data can be relevant for Purchasing as well as for Accountancy The corresponding InfoSet is then assigned to the two user groups This means that queries based on this InfoSet can be copied and executed by both groups April 2001 77 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Query Areas Query Areas A query area contains a set of query objects queries InfoSets and user groups that are discrete and consistent You can differentiate between two different query areas the standard
30. 00 09 50 00 LH 0400 10 0 11 34 00 0402 0015 05 00 Tradit eer re 112 30 21 06 OG HO ae E ai ier Pit iiit n PUERA te LED a oe by ae e a ek e SA T ETTE 2 A I E rt X a m i Ler le Se ALLE Ge eee Trt ri Torrie 17 13 30 60 The sort criterion From city no longer appears on one line but at the beginning of a control level To generate this list you first copy the query G2 and call it G3 You can then change the query G3 The field From city is not assigned to a line but the sort is performed by this field If you select the column Text for the appropriate level on the Control Levels screen the control level text is displayed at the beginning of the control level April 2001 165 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Output Options for Control Levels In this case you generate the list shown above Another useful variant of this query would be one which has the sort criterion From city in the header To do this you can copy the query G3 and call it G4 To achieve this you select the column NewPzg for the control level From city so that when a control break occurs that is the sort criterion changes a new page is started You must also assign a short name for example CITY to the field From city see Assigning short names Seite 144 This short name is then used as a replacement variable amp CITY in the header see Changing Headers Seite 158 This dis
31. BERLIN BERLIN FRANKFURT FRANKFURT FRANKFURT FRANKFURT FRANKFURT FRANKFURT FRANKFURT FRANKFURT SAP Query BC SRV QUE Sorting pee ppoe fer fore FRANKFURT FRANKFURT FRANKFURT BERLIN BERLIN BERLIN YORK YORK YORK FRANCISCO FRANCISCO YORE FRANCISCO YORE FRANCISCO YORK FRANCISCO FRANKFURT FRANCISCO FRANKFURT FRANCISCO FRANKFURT FRANCISCO NEW YORK FRANCISCO NEW YORK April 2001 163 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Output Options for Control Levels Output Options for Control Levels When you specify a sort sequence the next screen in the sequence of query screens allows you to define the sort order and the output options for control levels lf for example you want to sort in descending order you must select the column Desc descending To specify output of a blank line or a new page you select the appropriate columns B nkLn NewPg You can also display a complete control level meaning all the associated lines in a box To do this for each of the flight connections between two places in our example the column Box is selected for the Destination and From city Control levels Desc Text Total Cnt Box BlnkLn NewPg From city E L E E LJ LJ Destination LJ LJ LJ LI LJ LI Departure time LI LJ LJ LJ LI LI LI You now execute the query which generates the following list FRANKFURT LH 2407 07 10 00 0e 15 00 FRANKFURT LH 415 09 25 00 10 30 00 FRANKFURT LH 465 21 25 00 22 50 00 F
32. C D F I N P T or X FLEN describes the length of the field in bytes FDEC describes the number of decimal places for the field This specification is only significant if FTYP contains the value P In all other cases FDEC contains the value 00 FOLEN describes the output length of the field in the sub list as specified when defining the query FCUR identifies the field as currency amount field currency key or currency field quantity field unit field 338 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Enhancement SQUE0001 Private File FADD indicates whether the field is an additional field generated by the query itself The following values are allowed rank specification only in ranked lists number of records read only in statistics percentage specification only in statistics average value only in statistics FDESC contains the field description which the user sees when defining the query FNAME contains the field name from the query report from which the information for the data table is derived up to Release 4 0 FCOL contains the one line column header for the data table field described by an entry in the LISTDESC table FNAMENEW like FNAME from Release 4 0 FNAMEINT contains the field name from the data table Use this name together with the statement ASSIGN COMPONENT to dynamically access the field in the data table FKEY contains the value X if the field has been output as a key field lead colu
33. CODY ING NOD 6S er EE EE E E 209 BV eA MINA INO Clo sisenes aai a a a aaraa ai i eaa a aiek 210 Deleting InfoSets ccccccccsssceccseseeecsesseecceseeecsagececsaseeceeaseeesauececsaseeessaseeessaneessseass 211 SAIC NOS OS areata cantina es ecesesnecsandomes E 212 Generating INfOSets ccccccccccsececcesseeeceeseeecceaseeeceaeeecseaseeeseaueessageeessegseesssaeeesssageees 213 Assigning InfoSets to User Groups ccccseeceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeesaeeeeeeseeeeesaaeeeesaass 215 Checking INfOSets cccccceccccsesecccceseeecceseeeceaeeecsegeeeceegseeessaseeessageeessageeessegeeesseeeeeses 216 Adj sung WO SOUS sssnrae n E E S E EEE 217 Creating and Changing InfOSets cccccccseeeeeeceeeeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeeseaeeeesaaeeesaaeeeeesaees 218 CENG MO O een eee ee ne ene eer ee ee NE eee eee eee 219 Assigning Data Sources ater tcetesisicettsceeeten eecersanendoiiuncauianimce singe testanassearienmecoieuntende 220 OSet ay acct acc sate certain e enc ion tan NER A EEE 223 TOK FIGOS aeien tanw casignniauinlancucniansaeatiaunec datas E EE 225 Denton Of Feld OrOUD S osann insa n aaan 226 Assigning Fields to a Held Group ssrnsiairiisi sidien iin a desseteen 228 Deleting Field Groups Fields from Field Groups ccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeceseeeeseeeeeaes 229 Displaying a List of Assigned FieldS ccccccsssccccesseecceeseeeceeseeecseseeeseaseeessageessaaes 230 6 April 2001 EF S
34. Copy In the dialog box enter the name of the copy 98 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Renaming Queries Renaming Queries To rename a query proceed as follows 1 Choose the name of the query you want to rename on the initial screen 2 Choose Rename 3 Enter the new name to be given to the selected query in the dialog box 4 Choose Continue This takes you to the initial screen The query has been given a new name and will appear in the query directory The following objects have to be locked when a query is being renamed e The query catalog of the user group affected e The query itself e The query list catalog The function is executed only if all these were able to be set As long as these locks are set other users may be prevented from continuing their work April 2001 99 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Deleting Queries Deleting Queries You can delete queries only if you have the authorization to make changes To delete a query proceed as follows 1 Choose the name of the query you want to delete on the initial screen 2 Choose Delete You then see a dialog box where you have to decide once again whether you want to delete the query or not If you confirm the deletion the system deletes the query and outputs an appropriate message You can also delete queries from the query directory To do this place the cursor on the desired query and choose Delete Then follow the steps described a
35. Creating and Changing Queries cccccceccccceeeeeeeceeeeeesaeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeesaeeeeessaeeeeesaeeeeesaaeeeeesaess 133 Creating Basic Lists with the Query Painter cccceccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeesaeeeeeeas 134 Creating QC S vasiisicccins iapounemardcnanenascjenineid ebasctonbesneaiedialonstinatieumndbd ddaueeiantominncind dinentquuiawmcehasaenctiontcce 136 Selecting CIOS eserirsne ina n EA aien EN EEE aE 138 Assigning Title Format and Notes ccccccccecccseeeceeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeseeeeseeeaes 139 Selecting Fields for Processing ccccssscccccsseeecceeseecceeseeeceuseecseuseeessageeessegeeessaaes 142 Assigning Short NAMES iccreiutecn teins nccetinneimetesianietvresavieveiccavianncadghienci asian mecetansiuaaets 144 Defining Local Fields sosgeaecaceteccariectacacmetenincectetinacsisecacnuiieedceatecesuaiehcasentiusaseestacacced 145 Extending the Selection Criteria ccccccecccccseceecceeeeeseeseesseeesesseeeseeseeeeessaseeeeeas 149 STAC Basie CSIs srren ie Ae E E E EE 150 Defining a Single Line Basic LI Sti ssa sivssscesievenieswesescasuiieond Manseeeawecnduvacuatuanideentedeans 151 Defining the Line Structure ccccccccsececcseseeeceesseecceeseeessageeeceaseeessuseeessageees 152 Defining Output Options for Each LIne cc ccccecccceeeceseeeeseeeeeseeeeseeeeessaeeeas 155 April 2001 5 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Defining Output Options for Each Fie
36. Download and Upload cannot transport variants The logs contain details of the variants transported 310 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Transport Types Transport Types There are four different ways you can select the objects user groups InfoSets queries to be transported They are covered by the following transport types e Transport user groups e Transporting InfoSets e Transporting InfoSets and queries e Transport queries You first select no more than one of these transport types Then you make further specifications according to the transport type chosen Each transport type has its own input fields For each transport dataset you define an import option according to the relevant transport type The import option determines the method used to insert the transport dataset in the table AQLDB of the target client during a later import There are four import options each of which has a short form Import option Abbreviation G ug With the transport type Transport user groups all user groups are transported according to the select option User groups and the chosen mport option Valid import options are REPLACE and MERGE With the transport type Transport InfoSets all InfoSets are transported according to the select option InfoSets and the chosen mport option Valid import options are REPLACE MERGE GROUP ug and UNASSIGN With the transport type Transport InfoSets all InfoSets are transported
37. HR Reporting Even beginners are quickly able to use it thanks to its clear list of available fields and preview of output function Prerequisites The object selection is switched on J If you start InfoSet Query from the SAP Easy Access menu an appropriate InfoSet is used automatically in the information systems of several HR components for example the information system for Personnel Administration Provided that you are assigned to the appropriate user group you can start creating queries immediately You can also save the created queries but you cannot transport them using the Workbench Organizer If you want to start InfoSet Query in this way you must be assigned to the appropriate user group You can set up this assignment in SAP Query see Functions for User Group Administration Seite 285 Features e Inthe top left section of the initial screen the current InfoSet is displayed with its field groups in an overview tree Each field group corresponds to an HR infotype This overview tree enables you to choose selection fields and output fields If you require further information see InfoSet Display Seite 18 g The InfoSet that you use determines the object type that can be selected with InfoSet Query If you use an InfoSet from Personnel Administration logical database PNP for example the result of a selection is always a set of persons However if you use an InfoSet from Personnel Planning the result of a s
38. Parameter There is a description for each parameter If a special text has been specified for the selection screen when defining the InfoSet this selection text is also offered for comparison e Selection criteria As with parameters there are descriptions and in some cases texts for the selection screen In InfoSets you can reduce the translation effort considerably by choosing Edit gt Get standard texts This function determines for database tables database fields and table fields the existing target language texts in the Dictionary and copies them to the InfoSet provided they are not already present If a source language text in the InfoSet still matches the corresponding Dictionary text the texts for the relevant sub object are flagged as modified 326 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Language Comparison of a Query Language Comparison of a Query To compare the language texts of a query specify the source and target languages on the initial screen select the radio button for queries and enter the query and user group names in the appropriate fields As an example we can use the queries G6 and S3 of the user group FB Choose Change to start the comparison You then see the following overview screen PM titie and notes oO Quarterly sales per airline for one year Le eee eee ae 9i 002 the 1st quarter Q2 GOO the 2nd quarter gartz GOOG the drd quarter agit OOO the 4th quarter Yee 0001 CA
39. Previous screen functions e Use the functions in the Goto menu to access individual screens directly e Use the Back function to return to the first screen in the sequence if you are not already on this screen or to another screen sequence if you are on the first screen in the sequence If you want to switch from one screen sequence to another for example go from one of the basic list screens to the field selection you can use the appropriate function in the Goto menu The following screen shows the most important navigation options 136 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Creating Queries Field selection Statistics Back Basic list Ranked list Basic list Ranked list Statistics Within a query you can define one basic list up to 9 statistics and up to 9 ranked lists These different list tyoes may be combined in any permutation you like You can also extend existing queries by adding more sub lists Unless you have specified otherwise you see the basic list first followed by the statistics and finally the ranked lists when you execute a query April 2001 137 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Selecting Fields Selecting Fields The following section describes how to make some general definitions for your query 138 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Assigning Title Format and Notes Assigning Title Format and Notes The first attributes you must define when cr
40. Query in order to make it accessible to other users or to use the other output forms and functions available in SAP Query Reports created using the QuickViewer or SAP Query may also be used to pass data to external programs Excel or MS Word for example 10 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE InfoSet Query InfoSet Query Purpose The InfoSet Query is a useful tool for maintaining queries within the SAP Query and is suitable for developing queries and for ad hoc reporting InfoSet Query is suitable for reporting in all areas of the SAP R 3 system A special feature is the Human Resources HR component When InfoSet Query is used in HR for ad hoc reporting the name Ad Hoc Query is used instead of InfoSet Query In addition due to the data model in HR the InfoSet Query contains the Object Selection function with which you should work in order to evaluate HR data You can find further information under HR in the InfoSet Query Seite 52 All query information meaning the selection criteria and output is available on a single screen The clear and concise arrangement of screen areas means that even an inexperienced user can quickly get to grips with the process of generating queries Graphical interface elements and drag amp drop make the tool easy to use Integration InfoSet Query is designed in such a way that it can be called directly from roles with a relevant InfoSet and be used directly by the end user for reporting
41. Ranked lists are therefore useful for asking questions such as Which 10 flight connections have the highest sales i When you choose a numeric value as the only sort criterion in a statistic the result is practically a ranked list With statistics however you cannot restrict the number of items to be output April 2001 191 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Creating Ranked Lists Creating Ranked Lists We can explain the definition of a ranked list by means of a simple example Suppose you want to find out the 10 flights which have the most free seats p j 3 E a TT a EN a 7 eS ri sal ERE I ma r zs a y aa z 7 k Tier z Pi P cl eae wea i E p MES E ee N as a A Tee eye TEER TR TF Paepe Serres Tes n D ny i Pre Eee Tee Ra Et a gris E A AS E Gea ase reg a He oe E E JOL neal U dq Ooo oo oon oo oo oo oo moma ome eo om BEOOORMOoOo To define this list you create a query R1 via the InfoSet FLBU From the field groups Flight connections and Flights you choose the fields Airline carrier ID Flight connection ID Flight date Free seats and Total of current bookings Then you call the Ranked list function to branch to the definition of a ranked list ze a se io we T a First you must assign a title to the ranked list This is necessary since one query can contain several ranked lists You can then specify how many entries
42. SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Totals Lists Totals Lists The sections above described how to define lists which contain control totals However it is also possible to generate lists which output only control totals and overall totals g You can always display control totals and overall totals in a secondary list by using the Display totals only function in the list display Suppose you want the query G7 to generate a list which contains the revenues i e the total bookings for each airline carrier and flight connection You first define the sort sequence and the fields to be summed Basic list with box Frame width Columns separated by Compressed display Field Line Sequence Sort Total Counter Airline carrier Id LJ Flight connection Id 2 LJ Total of current bookings E On the Control levels screen you specify that you want to output sub totals for each airline carrier and each flight connection The column Total must be selected for this control level on the screen Furthermore the column Frame is selected for the Airline Carrier ID This definition generates the following list Total of curr booking Flight connection Id 0017 ADU 12 Flight connection Id 0026 i eae Flight connection Id 0064 Viele eal Airline carrier Id AA B20 fF Flight connection Id 1699 ABU Flight connection Id 1984 Aro N Airline carrier Id DL Soe a Flight connection Flight connection Flight connection Flight connection Flight conn
43. SELECT FROM lt table gt ENDSELECT In the following cases a WHERE condition is automatically appended to the SELECT statement 1 In InfoSets where selection criteria are defined to refer to the table 2 In queries where additional selections are defined for fields of the table April 2001 277 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Sequential Datasets Sequential Datasets If you want to generate reports from a sequential dataset without having to worry about data retrieval create an InfoSet by selecting the Sequential dataset field on the Title and Database screen enter a file name and a structure created in the ABAP dictionary Then enter the sequential dataset file name you want to read Its record structure should correspond to the structure specified You can specify any file name acceptable to the ABAP statement READ DATASET If you generate a query in this InfoSet and start it online the file name you specify is displayed as a default value on the selection screen Reading from a sequential dataset is performed in binary mode You can define field groups on the following screen Here you can choose any of the options available when maintaining InfoSets which use logical databases for example linking additional tables as well as defining additional fields and structures parameters and selection criteria DATA code and START END code When linking additional tables additional structures and defining additional fields
44. Settings gt Settings in query maintenance allow you to choose the query construction procedure you want If the appropriate software requirements are fulfilled the graphical Painter always appears as the standard setting April 2001 133 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Creating Basic Lists with the Query Painter Creating Basic Lists with the Query Painter If you want to create a new query you have to enter particular information so that the system can generate your report The following information is required e InfoSet e Title and list format e Field selection fields used in the list e List layout To create a new query proceed as follows 1 Call the component Maintain Queries 2 Choose the user group to which you want to assign the new query 3 Enter the desired query name Query names can be up to 14 characters long and should not already exist in the user group 4 Choose Create You then see a list of the InfoSets assigned to your current user group 5 To select the InfoSet you require place the cursor on the InfoSet and choose Select For further information about creating InfoSets refer to Creating and Changing InfoSets Seite 218 g If many InfoSets with multiple fields are assigned to one user group you can use the search function to find the right InfoSet Within the specified InfoSets it is possible to perform any number of searches The result is a displayed list of all InfoSets and fields
45. Text are possible In the first case a field can only be provided with its own values In the second case a text can be automatically created for each field value You can find more information under Text fields Seite 225 Two columns containing the technical names and assignment for a field group are assigned to each field With logical databases this tree mirrors the logical database s structural tree and contains all its tables along with the hierarchical relationships that have been defined between them With InfoSets using logical databases from the HR application the tree contains all info types that have been copied into the InfoSet by the InfoSet Generator These information types also appear next to each other on the same level The fields defined by the dictionary for a certain table as well as additional fields that have been explicitly assigned to the table hang underneath every table e Fields from an additional table assigned to the database table see Assigning Additional Tables Seite 234 e Additional fields assigned to the database table see Creating Additional Fields Seite 241 e Additional structures see Creating Additional Structures Seite 247 These fields appear behind the actual table fields and represent an enhancement of the original table The field groups are displayed as a tree in the upper right part of the screen The same icons as found in the data source left and the technical names are assi
46. The last five queries that you saved during an R 3 session are listed in the Query menu and you can load them from there April 2001 33 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Deleting Queries Deleting Queries Use InfoSet Query enables you to delete queries that are no longer required AN The query that you delete is always the query you loaded as a template Prerequisite You have loaded a query You can check this in the header of the InfoSet Query If you have loaded a query the name of the query is displayed here Procedure 1 Choose Query Delete 2 Toconfirm choose Yes Result The query that you loaded into the InfoSet Query is deleted However the current InfoSet selections and output fields are still displayed after the query is deleted 34 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Saving Queries Saving Queries After starting InfoSet Query you can change a template as often as you like and execute the corresponding query If and where you can save a query depends on your authorizations and on the reporting you are authorized to carry out If you require further information see Rights to Access InfoSet Query Seite 47 and Type of Reporting Seite 48 If you are authorized to save queries authorization object S Query with the value 02 for the field Actvt you can use the functions Save and Save as The way these functions work depends on your previous work with InfoSet Query e Save first us
47. You may also place your cursor on a list field and depress the right mouse button The following context menu appears ID No Depart city Arrival city AA W400 HEW YORK E L La Delete field Sum of Airline carri et options List line options varali mmal Format fields justified left Field template Choose List options and maintain your options in the lower left window You can change list attributes here by making entries directly Any entry you make in this window must be confirmed using the Apply pushbutton For more information see Headers and Footers Seite 372 List Width Ruler Seite 374 April 2001 371 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Headers and Footers Headers and Footers Basic lists are displayed in the Query Painter header first followed by the line structures and subsequently a footer Two types of header lines are available page headers and column headers Headers and footers are independent of query structure You can define any number of header lines Blank header lines are not output in the list Column headers are made available to you by the system by selecting the checkbox Display header under the List Line Output Options Seite 375 This checkbox is selected in the standard The following functions help you edit headers and footers e To insert text or parameters click on the header or footer e To insert an additional line double click on the line Each double click inserts an addition
48. a whole range of formatting and export options available to you for example sorting filtering export for word processing and spreadsheet programs For more information see SAP List Viewer ALV Grid Control Extern You can log the execution of queries in the InfoSet query if you want to You can find more information under Logging Seite 42 Restrictions Because InfoSet Query uses ALV as its standard output e every query can only output one list Queries created by SAP Query that use a single level list for output can contain a basic list up to nine ranked lists and up to nine statistics per query April 2001 11 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG InfoSet Query e output can only be in single level lists This means that you cannot distribute output fields over several lines You cannot define and use local fields with InfoSet Query either For this reason you should not process an available query with InfoSet Query if it contains the following objects e several lists only the first list is displayed e abasic list with line groups the first line of each is displayed e local fields local fields are not displayed If you do use a query with one of these properties in InfoSet Query then the parts of the output are shown as described above These properties are lost if you overwrite the query These properties are not lost as long as you do not save the query and you can continue to call and execute the query with
49. all properties using the SAP Query maintenance transaction See also Maintaining Queries Seite 13 Calling up InfoSet Query Seite 46 HR in InfoSet Query Seite 52 12 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Maintaining Queries Maintaining Queries Use The overview presents the initial screen of InfoSet Query in the form of a diagram and describes the general process of generating queries Prerequisites To be able to use all the functions of InfoSet Query you should have started InfoSet Query from a role with the reporting type development and must be authorized to change queries Features After calling InfoSet Query you will see a screen with three areas giving you all the information you need on creating and executing a query Apart from a few dialog boxes this screen is the only screen of InfoSet Query April 2001 13 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Maintaining Queries gG ala GGG CHR atoa nA or InfoSet Query InfoSet BCS1 Query QUE SCHUHM_01 Benutzergruppe MI Oe Ausgabe ae ee Feldgruppe l Felder na _ Selektionsfelder aus InfoSet v H Flugverbindungen amp Mame einer Fluggesellschaft E Ankuniszeit cE kurzbhezeichnung der Flugge E Startort Se Fielort Code der Flugverbindung Abflugzeit B Entfernung GE Masseinheit der Entfernung Flugzeit Fl ge Flugbuchungen Selektion Ausgabe B Feidname omowe C CR INEW ORK zeot CL SANFRANCI
50. all the lines from which the values for graphical display are to be taken Remember that you can only select up to 32 lines 122 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Word Processing Word Processing The word processing functions can be called from the list display and from the table display display with the help of the table control There are two different functions available e Form letters using MS WORD A WORD file is created using the data from the current partial list and is linked to another WORD document Substitution variables can be incorporated into the WORD document and these can be filled with values from the created WORD file Special functions are made available to MS WORD via OLE2 for this purpose This form letter functionality can be used only if MS WORD has been installed on the PC e Creating a document The current partial list can be stored on the presentation server as a file in RTF format The use of this format allows the file to be used as a WORD document One can specify whether the colors in the list should be taken into account The filename the complete path must be specified in the dialog If MS WORD is installed on the PC then it can be used immediately for editing the file created g Only the form letter functionality can be called from the table display Suppressed lines and columns will not appear in the WORD document April 2001 123 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG ABC Analysis ABC Ana
51. allows you to designate the size of the left margin when printing the list This option does not affect the screen output of the list e Forwarding the list directly 140 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Assigning Title Format and Notes The radio buttons on the selection screen of the generated report are pre set as a result of the options for forwarding a list see Interactive Functions for Further List Processing Seite 117 The Goto gt Report assignment function can be used to integrate the query into the Report Report Interface This means that the query both can be called via this interface as recipient and can itself call other reports as sender The term report is a collective term referring to ABAP reports including queries transactions Report Writer reports EIS drill down reports and report portfolio reports When the Goto gt Report assignment function is called a window appears The other reports that can be called from the query if the query is the sender are specified in this window Since every query is also a report this technique can be used to combine several queries with each other This represents a new type of drill down technique in SAP Query The way that data is exchanged is described in Calling Other Reports Seite 116 If multiple sublists basic lists statistics ranked lists are defined for a query you can use the function Edit gt Output sequence to designate the ord
52. already contain fields however are always created for HR InfoSets The field groups are displayed in an overview tree in the top right section of the screen The infotypes that you included in the InfoSet are displayed in an overview tree on the left of the screen The infotype fields that are already included in field groups are displayed in a different color and the field group ID is displayed J In the standard system a field group is created automatically for each infotype that you included in the InfoSet a field group corresponds to an infotype In the standard system each field group contains the infotype specific fields To ensure that working with the InfoSet is as easy as possible you are advised to restrict your use of fields in each field group to those you really require This means you should remove fields that are not required An infotype s fields must only be assigned to the pertinent field group Make sure this assignment is correct If the assignment is incorrect the InfoSet could be rendered unusable When an InfoSet is created the following fields are transferred automatically to the first field group e Logical database PNP Personnel number e Logical database PAP Applicant number e Logical database PCH Object ID plan version and object type 6 Determine the fields that must be included in the field groups of your InfoSet If you require further information see Assigning Fields to a Field Group Seite 228
53. and additional table fields provided they are assigned to a field group of that InfoSet The previous sections also discussed parameters and selection criteria which you use to create selection options This topic discusses additional options which make additional tables additional structures additional fields parameters and selection criteria more flexible and give you more room to move but cannot be addressed in queries for the InfoSet These options generate ABAP code for all queries of an InfoSet but this is transparent to the end user e DATA Code This code declares data to be used in a report for example variables for calculations e START Code This code appears under the event START OF SELECTION which precedes the first database access e GET code This code appears under the event GET for a logical database table but does not depend on a particular additional field e GET LATE code This code appears under the event GET LATE for a logical database table e END Code This code appears under the event END OF SELECTION either before or after output of the list e TOP OF PAGE code This code is copied into every generated report and appears at TOP OF PAGE just before the instructions for output of the page header The diagram below shows how the structure of sections of code you can amend in a query report for the InfoSet FLBX using the logical database F1S April 2001 257 SAP Query BC SRV QUE Further Code
54. are created using the InfoSet e Do you have to take any special measures such as access protection e Do you have to change the long texts and headers of the selected fields The last two points are rather less important since you can add these components to an existing InfoSet at any time However the choice of data source determines the reports you can produce with this InfoSet When you have resolved these questions you can create the InfoSet Proceed as follows 1 Call the component Maintain InfoSets This takes you to the initial screen for editing InfoSets 2 Enter a name in the InfoSet field InfoSet names can contain up to 24 characters The lower half of the screen displays all of the InfoSets that already exist 3 Choose Create You then go to the Title and Database screen For further information read the following sections April 2001 219 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Assigning Data Sources Assigning Data Sources On the Title and Database screen you enter a description of the InfoSet The end user sees this name when creating a query It should therefore allow for an InfoSet to be identified Name Authorization group Table join by basis table O Direct read oftable Logical database Selection screen version O Data retrieval by program Data structure C no automatic text recognition Fixed point arithmetic E Further options 3 The field Authoriza
55. belonging to this group If you are editing an existing query the Edited column contains all those field groups from which fields have already been selected Selecting Fields On the following screen you now select the fields you want to display in your list from the field groups selected Select the desired fields Flight connections You can extend or reduce the selection of field groups and fields at any time even if you have already defined sublists You can change the column headers for selected fields on this screen by placing the cursor on one of the fields and selecting Edit Column headers Maintain see Changing Headers Seite 158 You then see To do this place the cursor on the desired query and choose Delete You then see a dialog box where you can change the column header or set the standard value By selecting Edit Find you can search for field names of the InfoSet The result of the search is a list of all fields with names which contain the search criteria Even here you can select fields Using the function Extras Field documentation you can obtain more information about a field To do this place the cursor on a field name and choose this function You then see a dialog box containing the documentation and some other technical information about the field This function is available on all screens where the field names are listed 142 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Selec
56. between the QuickView and InfoSet If you create QuickViews based on InfoSets differences in individual field definitions may occur between a QuickView and its associated InfoSet mf Suppose you have created a QuickView using an InfoSet and have already executed it a number of times Your system administrator then modifies an InfoSet field by changing the type of field you use in the QuickView The next time you want to work with the QuickView you get a message informing you that differences exist between the QuickView and the InfoSet If differences occur between QuickViews and InfoSets you should terminate processing and carry out a comparison between the QuickView and the InfoSet When you carry out an adjustment you see a list of all the fields that are defined differently together with information about how the field definition has changed and where the field is used in the QuickView The system gives you an automatic adjustment option for individual fields At the end of the list there are some notes telling you what to look out for with automatic adjustment and what you must do if you want to carry out the adjustment yourself 353 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Functions for Managing QuickViews Layout display The principle structure of the list created by the QuickView is displayed qE SAP Query This pushbutton takes you to query maintenance g To edit a QuickView in SAP Query choose Query Convert Qui
57. by selecting the relevant checkbox Otherwise you can switch off the text identification function for an existing InfoSet by choosing InfoSet gt More functions gt Delete text fields from the initial screen of the transaction SQ02 This procedure only works if none of the text fields has been used in a query The standard procedure for identifying texts is relatively extensive and complicated There will still be cases though for which this procedure is insufficient It is therefore possible to use other procedures for text identification You can find more information under Application specific Enhancements Seite 264 April 2001 225 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Definition of Field Groups Definition of Field Groups A field group combines related fields together into a meaningful unit It provides you with a preselection so that you do not have to search through all fields of a data source just to produce a simple list This means that the end user only has access to precisely those fields assigned to a field group Fields must be assigned to a field group before they can be used in queries Preassigning Field Groups If you made your entries in the dialog box Title and Database then field groups are prepared If the InfoSet is created using a single table or using a table join then the following dialog box appears InfoSet Initial Screen Field groups Include all table fields Include key fields O
58. code is processed before the first database access the END OF SELECTION code before the list is output is processed after the last database access but before the list is output If a first page is to be generated via code this should not be done in the START OF SELECTION code In this case the page initially would be created when the query is executed but it would not be created in interactive functions that rebuild the list printing reduction and compression of basic lists If the first page is created in END OF SELECTION code before the list is output this error does not occur Any ABAP statements may be used in the code Any data objects may be accessed However it is better to restrict to the following objects e Parameters from the InfoSet and the logical database e Selection criteria for the InfoSet and the logical database e global data from the DATA code Fields in logical database tables or additional tables and additional fields do not have a defined value at this point April 2001 261 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG GET GET LATE Code GET GET LATE Code If you want to perform calculations or other operations which are not associated with certain additional fields you can formulate ABAP code for the GET and GET LATE events of a logical database table when creating an InfoSet The code for GET events is particularly important if you have defined parameters or selection criteria for the InfoSet It is here that you mu
59. contain all the information needed for determining the required fields making the reference list incomplete This can mean that when query reports are processed some of the fields needed only ever get given their initial values If an InfoSet contains sections of code that could cause problems a warning is output each time that it is generated A check should then be made on whether any of the cases described below has occurred and the InfoSet must be corrected as appropriate It is necessary to know which fields are required for generating query reports in order to be able to draw up the reference list These can be the following fields e Fields that were included in field groups e Fields that are used for formulating the WHERE condition of connected additional tables e Fields that are accessed from code belonging to additional fields e Fields that are accessed from code called at GET GET LATE or at record processing The freedom to use any ABAP language construct at any point in a section of code means that it is possible to access fields without explicitly referring to these fields field symbols external Perform DO VARYING ADD THEN UNTIL etc However in order to ensure that query reports can be generated without errors it is essential that all fields accessed can be determined in EVERY section of code additional fields GET GET LATE record processing This means that every field used in every section of code has to be
60. dataset choose one of the transport actions Export or Download on the initial screen of the transport tool If you want to run a test export first select the checkbox Test run The system then determines which queries InfoSets and user groups would be transported for the selections entered below on the screen and generates a log It does not generate a transport dataset in the table AQTDB or a file You should always make use of this checking facility The check box labeled Overwriting permitted allows you to make sure that existing objects do not get accidentally overwritten when importing or uploading If you are doing a test run for an import then a note will be made in the log if an existing object would get overwritten at any point If you are not doing a test run and the Overwriting permitted check box is not set then the import of an object will be terminated if the object already exists in the target system and would get overwritten by the import An existing object will be overwritten only if the check box has been set A note will be made in the log that an object has been overwritten in this case too lf you want the transport to include query variants i e variants defined for the query reports select the checkbox Transport query variants The system then transports all the variants of all queries to the transport dataset Please note that to transport variants you must always use the transport actions Export and Import The actions
61. displayed on the screen If the query contains a combination of these the basic list is displayed first followed by the statistics and finally by any ranked lists For each sublist the information specifies which fields are output in which order and the options used to achieve this Description of basic lists 94 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Displaying Queries uer y 64 Flight connections 1st example User group FB Flight bookings Basic list Displayed fields From city Destination Airline carrier Id Flight connection Id Departure time Arrival time sort sequence None Summation None Inventory count None Description of statistics April 2001 95 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Displaying Queries statistic no 1 sales per airline and flight connection Displayed fields Field Format NumberaAverage Round Airline carrier Id Flight connection Id Total of current bookings Reference unit DEM sort sequence 1 Airline carrier Id ascending We Flight connection Id ascending Description of ranked lists Ranked list no 1 Free seats per flight The following are output 10 Seats Displayed fields Ranked list criterion Airline carrier Id Flight connection Id Flight date Free seats A descending Maximum capacity You can call the Description function from the query directory to display this select Environment Directorie
62. erste vor Ausgabe der Liste Seite Schreiben Ausgabe der Liste END Coding eigene letzte Seite nach Ausgabe der schreiben z B Liste Zugriffsstatistik ausgeben 283 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Code for Record Processing Code for Record Processing If you want to perform calculations or other operations not associated with additional fields when processing data records in a loop use the code for record processing g The code contains statements which check whether the record just read is to be processed according to the parameters or selection criteria The code is a standard component of every query report generated for an InfoSet without an underlying database It is transparent to the user when maintaining queries If you are on the field group maintenance screen choose Goto Code Record processing This takes you to a screen which displays any existing code for record processing It also displays or proposes if new the allocated sequence g You can also reach record processing code using the Extras function see GET GET LATE Code Seite 262 The code for record processing is placed together with the code for additional fields and SELECT statements for additional tables in the section of the generated query report containing the loop processing of data records The sequence specifications control the order within this section Usually the code for record processing is used for initialization purpos
63. field groups 3 Choose Continue For further information refer to the following sections April 2001 227 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Assigning Fields to a Field Group Assigning Fields to a Field Group You can assign fields of different tables to one field group In this way you can treat fields of linked additional tables additional structures and additional fields in the same way as true logical database fields To assign a field to a field group proceed as follows 1 Click on the field you want to select in the data source 2 Use drag amp drop to move the field into the field group of your choice Or 1 Click on the field and on the field group of your choice 2 Choose the function Add fields to field groups or the relevant function from the context menu If you want to change the assignment of a field to a field group click on the field to be changed and move it into the field group you want by using drag amp drop or double click on the field and use the value help to change the field group in the screen in the bottom right hand corner Double clicking on a field in the data source or in a field group displays all the technical information for this field in the lower right part of the screen You can change long texts and headers as and when necessary here J The assignment between the field and the long text is not always unique for example when several fields refer to the same data element Therefore you can
64. fields The first field contains the amount and the second field the currency or unit Although the fact that the logical database itself always ensures that the amount unit currency pair contains the correct values means that it is not necessary to know which reference fields belong to which amount fields when maintaining an InfoSet over a logical database in the case of an InfoSet that is not based on a logical database the InfoSet itself has to ensure that the values in the amount and unit fields belong together for example by reading another table This means that the correspondence between the amount fields and unit fields has to be known The reference field is always displayed in the lower right box for changing field texts 230 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Obtaining Additional Information Obtaining Additional Information In some cases the information that a data source supplies is insufficient In this way for example new information could be gained by simple calculations If for example the maximum number of seats and the number of bookings for a particular flight are known the number of unoccupied seats can be calculated easily Such information can be useful for different queries evaluations Three options are open to you for obtaining additional information during InfoSet maintenance additional tables additional structures and additional fields Additional tables read a record from a table This table
65. fields from specific Personnel Administration infotypes such as 0001 and 0002 and fields from infotypes 4000 to 4999 as selection and output fields e The InfoSet is based on logical database PCH Provided that object selection is switched on InfoSets based on this database enable you to use InfoSet Query to select objects of one object type such as business events qualifications and positions You can use all of the fields of infotypes allowed for the object in question and all of the object types and their allowed infotypes that can be related with the selected object type as selection criteria and for output When you create an InfoSet you determine the object type that you can select using an InfoSet The generated InfoSet can only be used to select this particular object type If you want to create reports for business events qualifications or positions for example you must create three separate InfoSets This means the reports can only be executed separately 70 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE HR InfoSets for InfoSet Query If you do not select an object type when you create the InfoSet you can only use the InfoSet for InfoSet Query if object selection has been switched off See also InfoSets in the HR Application Seite 266 April 2001 71 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG SAP Query SAP Query Purpose The application SAP Query is used to create lists not already contained in the SAP standard It
66. for example are not always the same Also symbols and icons are not displayed in saved lists To get the original display you must generate the list by executing the query again To delete any lists you no longer need select them in the first column and use the Delete sel lists function For each saved list you can see how many records are occupied in background storage Each record contains about 2900 bytes If you want to execute one of the interactive functions described in the section Interactive Functions for Further List Processing Seite 117 the system requires certain parts of the generated query report If any changes you make between saving the list and redisplaying it affect the structure of the sublists by altering the sequence of the fields displayed you may not be able to execute these interactive functions However you can still display the list J You cannot use interactive functions to display saved lists see Interactive List Display Functions Seite 109 except for when using the function nteractive list 114 April 2001 mF SAP AG April 2001 SAP Query BC SRV QUE Saving and Redisplaying Lists 115 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Calling Other Reports Calling Other Reports Reports residing in different applications can call each other in the R 3 System across the Report Report Interface RRI The term report is used here to include all of the following ABAP reports including query repo
67. graphic format The type of graphic can be specified in the query definition see Graphics Seite 161 The display style can be changed in the graphics screen In the query definition it is possible to specify that the number of values to be displayed should be decided at runtime April 2001 121 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Graphics If this kind of graphic call has been defined for a partial list of a query then when the Graphic function is called at runtime a window appears in which the number of values to be displayed can be entered type of graphic text and color display or the number of values to be displayed Those options chosen on the graphics screen while the query was being defined are used as defaults g If you want display QuickView data graphically you enter the appropriate graphical specifications at runtime In addition you can also graphically display any remainder This remainder is the sum of all values from the selected column that were not chosen for graphic display Since only 32 values can be displayed you may only select up to 31 individual values if you want to display your remainder as well If you call the Graphics function from the display with the table control the handling is different from that in the list display To pass a sequence of values for display in graphic format you must first select the column from which the numeric values for graphical display are to be taken You then select
68. group parameters and only ad hoc reporting can take place This means that a user who starts the InfoSet Query using HR s information systems either goes straight to the initial screen of the InfoSet Query where the assigned InfoSet is displayed or can choose between several assigned InfoSets In this type of call in HR the InfoSet Query is called Ad hoc Query The type of reporting depends on the report used to start the InfoSet Query You can find further information on the reports for starting the InfoSet Query under Modules for Calling the InfoSet Query Seite 49 48 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Modules for Calling the InfoSet Query Modules for Calling the InfoSet Query To call the InfoSet Query the SAP System provides you with four reports and four function modules of the same name which implement the InfoSet Query call and determine access rights and reporting type for the InfoSet Query The following reports function modules are available e SAP_QUERY_DEVELOPMENT_ROLE Access using role development Parameter Role input necessary InfoSet optional Query optional A user group from the global area has to be assigned to the role If you specify an InfoSet then it has to be assigned to the user group If you specify a query then it has to be assigned to the user group e SAP_QUERY_AD HOC ROLE Access using role ad hoc reporting Parameter Role input necessary InfoSet
69. if lt gt 0 Select this option if you want a field to be left empty instead of displaying a zero April 2001 389 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Output Options for Control Levels Output Options for Control Levels If you select a specific sort sequence for a particular list field the system automatically provides you with a text at the start of your control level and creates subtotals for the control level s numeric fields For example you have selected the following fields e A SPFLI gt H Flight schedule ELD Cl ee ee ne een oe Flight connections gt No ID Depart city Arrival city Contollevrel Airline AA Airing carrier II Sort direction W400 AA NEW YORK SAN FRANCISCO in ascending order c in descending order Time ETIME start control level Bk sort fields M Control level text L New line C New page Airline carrier 6 Flight connectio amp Frame around control level End control level M Display totaling M Display counting Apply Reset This QuickView is sorted according to the fields Airline ID and Flight connection code After you drag these two fields to the Sort fields toolbar the control level texts automatically appear above your list fields Subtotals are displayed below the list s numeric fields Whenever you choose a sort field in the toolbox the display options of its corresponding control level are displayed in the window at the lower left hand corner
70. in the structure of a logical database As long as the change of structure is nothing more than the insertion of a new table in the tree then this is also a straightforward adaptation that is performed without special messages being issued But in the cases that are described in the following a message is output and the InfoSet has to be checked and possibly revised If a table is removed from the structure and the selected fields of this table have not been used in queries then the table together with the selected fields are also removed from the InfoSet It is however still important to make a check since fields from this table may be accessed in sections of code or in WHERE conditions contained in connected additional tables These references must also be removed In the case that the structure of tree is changed so that the relationships between individual tables change then the sections of code and the WHERE conditions of the additional tables also have to be checked It is particularly important to note that the access paths in the tree the paths from the root node to the current node will now have changed and that therefore the set of fields that can be accessed has also changed These kinds of changes can be very critical It is no longer possible to be sure that the queries over the InfoSet still work exactly as they used to Therefore these must also be checked and revised where necessary If a table is removed from the structure and
71. increased by 1 every time that this field is found within the data set currently being read The resulting counter total is displayed in much the same manner as a grand total at the end of the basic list Just as with sum totals counter subtotals can be displayed for individual control levels These counter subtotals show how many values have been assigned to a particular control level Unlike totaling counting fields are not displayed automatically Fields you want to display counting fields for must be dragged to the Counter toolbar This toolbar can be displayed by choosing Tools Counting fields on off g The Counter option can also be selected for non numerical fields Example In this example suppose you want to generate a list which contains booking information for each flight A subtotal of revenues per booking should be displayed for each flight and a line containing a sum total of everything should appear at the end of the list In addition you want to know how many bookings were made per flight 1 Choose fields as shown below Numeric fields are automatically totaled Since you only want to total the field Amount in foreign currency use the trash can to delete the totals for the other fields 2 Sort the list according to the field Flight date The flight date now appears at the beginning of each control level Subtotals are displayed prior to each change of date 3 In order to find out how many bookings have been made
72. interface To do this you use the transport functions Download and Upload April 2001 307 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG General Transport Description e You must first download the source client objects for transport from the table AQLDB to a file When doing this you specify the file name and exactly where it is stored in the file system A file can only contain one transport dataset meaning that any existing file is overwritten Downloading a transport dataset to a file effectively means that it cannot be read back into the table AQLDB e Then you can upload the transport dataset stored in the file Here the transport dataset is read and inserted in the table AQLDB As with an import the system performs numerous checks which ensure that no inconsistencies occur in the table AQLDB After this general overview you can familiarize yourself more closely with the individual options offered by the transport tool On the initial screen of the component Maintain InfoSets or Maintain User Groups select Transports You then see the following screen Transport action Export Download io Display Import oo Upload io Delete Copy Standard Area Global Area Copy Global Area gt Standard Area Test run Overwriting allowed only with importuploadicopy _ Transport query variants fonly with exporimportcopy _ Transport the reportreprot interface for queries fonly with exportimporth Transport user groups Import option REPL
73. is possible to use logical database PCH to access this data but PNP meets such reporting requirements more quickly because it is best suited to the task of selecting persons Logical database PNP enables you to access HR master data and infotypes from Personnel Planning For example you have the following options e Reporting on the costs number of attendees booked and instructor for a business event on which an employee is booked e Reporting on working time and planned compensation for a position that an employee occupies e Reporting on the validity and proficiency of a qualification that an employee fulfils From a technical perspective this means you can use PNP to report on all of the infotypes that exist for objects infotype 1000 that have a direct relationship infotype 1001 with the Person object i The ability to access infotypes from Personnel Planning using logical database PNP is a Special feature that you can only use in the context of SAP Query and Ad Hoc Query You cannot use this functionality for ABAP reports you programmed yourself You can also use logical database PNP to report on data from Personnel Time Management infotypes 2000 to 2999 and Payroll special payroll infotypes for the USA and customer infotypes for more information access Customizing for the Human Resources Information System and see Payroll Results Logical Database PAP Logical database PAP enables you to access data from Recruitment
74. list statistics and ranked lists you can pass only one of these for further processing This is always the sublist where the cursor is when you call the function or the first sublist to be displayed on the screen 118 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Download to File Download to File The Download to file function allows you to download the data retrieved by the query to a local file on the presentation server The function module DOWNLOAD performs this process When you activate the function you see a dialog box where you can specify the file name and the data format The system uses the contents of the input field located next to the radio button Download to file on the selection screen as a default for your file name If no file name was entered on the selection screen the system chooses a default name for you You can choose the check box With column header in the dialog box This will save your data with column headers if its data format so allows DAT and DBF J Whereas the Download function available in the System menu choose System gt List Save Local file stores the list on the presentation server as an ordinary text file without structured list lines the Download to file function also takes the line structure into account You may enter a default file name for the file created The system uses the contents of the input field located next to the radio button Download to file on the query s selectio
75. maintain additional information by double clicking 2 Choose Extras Alternatively you can use the context menu The additional information on the selected node is displayed in the top right window GEENE Data fields se Log database Fis 2 Flight schedule Extras r Selections Co KWdditional Information on node SFI Technical name gt S Additional fields _ Flight demo table SFLIGHT b RH Flight demo table SFLIGHT la Flight booking SHOOK gt GFR Flight booking SHOOK LOCCURPRICE SEATSFREE This window contains the name of the additional information its type additional table additional structure additional field code and a long text The window s first column contains a number This number determines the order in which the code for each individual additional piece of information within the query is executed April 2001 231 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Obtaining Additional Information g The sequence numbers of the various individual pieces of additional information do not have to be different You can find more information about sequence numbers in Creating Additional Fields Seite 241 This window also allows you to Define Create Change or Delete additional information When using Change and Delete you must place your cursor on the appropriate additional information entry If you are trying to change an entry s attributes d
76. named explicitly If a section of code contains ABAP statements that access certain fields implicitly then the ABAP FIELDS statement 342 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Access Optimization in Queries must be used in the code to ensure that all database fields table fields and additional fields that are used are named explicitly l E The KNC1 table contains the UM01U UM02U and UMO3U fields These fields contain the monthly sales figures for the first three months of a year An additional field Q1 is to be used for the sales figure for the first quarter This field calculates the sum of the other three fields with an external Perform PERFORM QUARTAL1 pppppppp USING Q1 The KNC1 UM01U KNC1 UM02U and KNC1 UMO3U fields are accessed via the common memory for the KNC1 table in the query report and in the program pppppppp that gets called However it is not evident from the code fragment above that these fields are actually required Therefore this code fragment needs to be modified as follows PERFORM QUARTAL1 pppppppp USING Q1 FIELDS KNC1 UM01U KNC1 UM02U KNC1 UM03U It is important to note that all fields required must be explicitly named in every section of code This is because each section of code is included in the query report only if it is really used and therefore it has to be clear from individual section of code which fields are needed in that particular section of code Note also that only those fields
77. of another linked additional table assigned to the same logical database table In this case you must ensure that SAP Query reads the additional tables in the correct sequence e Additional fields assigned to the same logical database table April 2001 235 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Assigning Additional Tables Here you must ensure that any calculations involving additional fields are performed before accessing the additional table You can choose Check additional table to check your SELECT statement for syntax errors Otherwise it can only be corrected when you use the functions Check and Generate for the InfoSet as a whole Whenever you are on the screen for editing additional tables you can change the following settings e the sequence of the SELECT within the processing of data for the logical database table e the Buffer internally option e the key field setting However you cannot change the assignment to a logical database table To assign an additional table to a different logical database table you must delete if first and then assign it again Multiple Additional Table Assignments Alias Tables The procedure described above allows you link a table to an InfoSet as an additional table exactly once Whenever you attempt to link the table a second time as an additional table you receive an error message informing you that the table may only be used once The following example demonstrates however that multi
78. or quantities have been specified in the same currency or unit of measurement This check can be made only if the currency or unit of measurement is also output in the list When different currencies or units of measurement are present these are first converted into a reference currency or unit of measurement This reference currency or unit of measurement can be entered in a dialog window If errors occur in the conversion then the ABC analysis cannot be carried out The result of the ABC analysis is a list The first column of this list shows the segment A B or C Then come the characteristics and finally the key figure Next to each key figure there are two percentages the percentage of the total sum of all key figures represented by this key figure and the cumulative total to this point The list also includes the total sum and the intermediate sums related to the individual segments as well as the sums of the A and B segments and of the B and C segments April 2001 125 SAP Query BC SRV QUE ABC Analysis Analysis strategy Key figures percentage A segment 56 ABC Flg r B segment 36 Total of curr booking DEH C segment 20 EF SAP AG 4 Cumulative 28 832 523 16 8 399 937 22 6 486 989 39 4 919 309 77 The following interactive functions can be used on the result list of the ABC analysis 126 Hide columns 2 doF Fo AS 288 885 74 925 427 34 566 876 22 526 259 88 428 745 50 305 263 75 20
79. output in list form may be passed to other software products g The QuickViewer s output options correspond to those of SAP Query In the Query Painter you can determine how a list is output when you execute its report by selecting one of the appropriate radio buttons on the selection screen You also select an output option when creating a query Further information is found under Assigning Title Format and Notes Seite 139 In basis mode you can use the possible entries help for field Display as prior to executing a QuickView to determine whether you want to export the report or display it directly For further information refer to the following sections Common Principles when Passing Lists for Further Processing Seite 118 Download to File Seite 119 Table Calculation Seite 120 Graphics Seite 121 Word Processing Seite 123 ABC Analysis Seite 124 EIS Seite 128 Private File Seite 129 Additional Function Pool Seite 130 Direct Interaction Seite 132 April 2001 359 SAP Query BC SRV QUE mF SAP AG Converting QuickViews to Queries Converting QuickViews to Queries Use You can convert any QuickView into a query More functions and report forms are available in SAP Query than in the QuickViewer In addition SAP Query allows you to re use transfer queries to other systems and clients Prerequisites In order to convert a QuickView into a query first choose a user group that you are assigned t
80. overwrite all the field texts and should in any case always do this in the interests of the end user There is a field header for every field With fields defined in the ABAP Dictionary the header text is used The field headers are needed to determine the column headers for queries see Changing Headers Seite 158 With fields defined in the ABAP Dictionary you may want to replace the field header with a different text Headers can contain up to 30 characters But they should not contain more characters the field s output length seeing as these will then be cut off during subsequent display of the query A ruler is displayed above the header input fields allowing you to see how long your header can be The output length of the field is also displayed If you have currency amount fields or quantity fields in an InfoSet it is not necessary to include the associated currency or unit fields The query takes care of the assignment between currency amount and currency fields or quantity and unit fields itself You can use the functions Find or Find next to search for a text or technical name in both trees g Client fields of client specific tables are not included in the selection offered in the field groups since cross client reading is not supported by the query If the value of the client field is required in special cases an additional field has to be used The client field can be accessed in the coding of an additional field even if
81. point arithmetic status for an existing InfoSet When doing this however you must check all the code relating to the InfoSet If this code contains calculations with values of type P you must adapt these calculations to the modified fixed point arithmetic status If you choose the pushbutton Additional Options then the entry fields Class for Text Identification and nfoSet Generator appear Compare here the actions in the section Application specific Enhancements Seite 264 The example in this section refer to InfoSets using the logical database F1S flight bookings InfoSets using a logical database and InfoSets without any underlying database are to a large extent made in the same way so that the actions in the following units both refer to logical databases as well as to other options for retrieving data For this read the section entitled Special Features Seite 282 under InfoSets without a Logical Database or the actions in the sections that are referred to in the table above 222 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE InfoSet Display InfoSet Display You can see the InfoSet Display on the following screen InfoSet Edit Goto Extras Settings Environment System Help ce o algoloog fl ie UV a a l Ed eN ee Change InfoSet DEMO Cy Alias tables a Field groups Extras A aa Data fields Technical name Field Field Groupidata fields gt Eigi demo table SFGAT TT L 01 Flight schedule Client for
82. section InfoSets which retrieve data using a program offer you a wide range of options In a model report there are no restrictions on how you should organize the retrieval of your data Therefore you can use very complex algorithms SELECT statements that read on a cross client basis can also be used option CLIENT SPECIFIED April 2001 281 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Special Features Special Features InfoSets using logical datasets and InfoSets without underlying datsets have largely the same structure Differences only occur if the situation absolutely demands it A logical database is a hierarchical structure of tables whereas an InfoSet without an underlying database is based on a single sequential table You can think of an InfoSet without an underlying database as a special kind of InfoSet which uses a logical database consisting of a single table The facilities and options available for creating both types of InfoSet are also the same apart from the structure of the data to be processed They include e Field group structure e Options for modifying texts e DATA Code e START OF SELECTION code e END OF SELECTION code e Parameter e Selection criteria The facilities for InfoSets without an underlying database are simpler as a result of the simpler structure of the data to be processed This applies to e Additional fields Additional fields do not need to be assigned to a particular table However the seq
83. started with R 3 J You can also display the list on the screen first and then select Print If a query contains multiple sublists a dialog box appears with checkboxes allowing you to select which sublists you want to be printed April 2001 105 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Executing Queries Online 106 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Executing Queries in the Background Executing Queries in the Background If you want to execute the query as a background job choose Exec in background When scheduling a job you must define a variant and specify the start time Please remember that background processing always requires a variant If you have still not created a variant for the query you can do this on the initial screen for background processing For information on all other options and processes refer to the online documentation Getting Started with R 3 April 2001 107 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Improving Response Times Improving Response Times Response times depend largely on the type of system you have and the system load at the time although the number of database accesses needed to process your query also plays a part The actual processing of the data is virtually irrelevant as far as the runtime is concerned Reducing Database Accesses The InfoSet you choose see Creating and Changing Queries Seite 133 determines the database to be evaluated Each database has an associated sel
84. template lt and gt and the number of underscores are retained e Sub total texts The same applies for sub total texts i e the texts which are output at the end of each control level if a sub total has been requested as for control level texts The template for the value of the control level field must be retained in every language version e Field templates Field output templates also need to be compared if they contain texts However it is very important that the delimiters LL lt and gt and the number of underscores are retained in every language version e Basic list headers The fixed header and footer lines defined for a basic list can be compared Please also note here that replacement variables for field contents amp field occur in every language version 328 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Language Comparison of a Query e Statistics The title the fixed header lines and the footer lines must be compared for each statistic As with basic list headers replacement variables for field contents amp field occur in every language version e Ranked lists The same texts exist for ranked lists as for statistics and the language comparison procedure is similar April 2001 329 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Language Comparison for User Groups Language Comparison for User Groups The only texts generated with user groups are the user group long texts These texts are also processed by
85. that are directly used in a section of code need to be named there Ly The additional fields F1 and F2 are defined in the following code F1 F1 TAB FELD TAB FELD is a database field F2 F2 Fl 2 Even though F2 indirectly accesses TAB FELD it is not necessary to list TAB FELD in the code of F2 as being one of the fields used This kind of indirect reference is automatically resolved when the InfoSet is generated The sections of code for both additional fields is therefore correct exactly as given above In exceptional cases the following statement can be used in code FIELDS TAB where TAB is a database table or an additional table This has the effect of using all the fields of the TAB table in the query report However this means that the access to the TAB table is no longer optimized and that therefore a considerable loss of performance can be expected when processing queries If the advice given here on maintaining an InfoSet is carefully followed it will always be possible to generate a complete reference list However the generation process itself cannot check whether the InfoSet has been maintained correctly and therefore it is always possible for a faulty case to slip through the net resulting in an incomplete reference list being generated If a reference list is incomplete for a query report this could lead to fields that are needed not being read from the database and therefore always retaining their init
86. the remainder in whole number division You can use parentheses in the usual way J Please note in the example that time specifications TIME in calculations are always quoted in seconds To define the values of symbol and icon fields you can specify the names of symbols and icons in formulae These names begin with SYM_ or ICON_ and can be determined by pressing the appropriate pushbutton A formula which contains a symbol or icon can consist only of this symbol or icon i e symbols and icons cannot be linked with other operands You can make the calculation of the value of a field dependent on a condition In this case the value according to the calculation formula is only made available if the condition is satisfied If the condition is not satisfied the field is set to its initial value g These types of fields are required when calculating special statistics see Defining Statistics Seite 180 To formulate conditions you use Boolean formulae These formulae consist of comparisons e g AMOUNT 5 gt LIMIT which can be linked with the operators NOT AND and OR Parentheses may also be used in the usual way In more complex cases you can make the calculation of the values of a field dependent on any number of conditions i e the value is calculated differently depending on which condition is satisfied You can even specify a calculation formula to be used when none of the conditions is satisfied For any of thes
87. to the output in the full screen You can use the following options Function Sort ascending Sort descending Subtotals Delete field s April 2001 Procedure Iicon Select a column and sort ascending by choosing or descending by choosing T You can use several sort criteria To do so do not select a column and then choose ft or T You reach the Define Sort Order dialog box You can select any output fields as sort criterion and decide whether to sort according to this criterion in ascending or descending order Select the column you want and choose amp 3 A total is output at the end of the column Select the column that contains the criterion for subtotals and choose ae If the criterion for subtotals changes a subtotal is output Select the column you want to delete from the output list Choose i SAP Query BC SRV QUE Formatting the Output What you need to know You can create totals only for columns that contain numerical values If you also want to output subtotals you must first create totals using the numerical column You can use columns as a criterion for subtotals only if they contain non numerical values The list is automatically sorted according to this criterion If you report on the annual salaries of your employees for example you can create totals for the Annual Salary column and output a subtotal for each organizational unit If you do not select
88. transports all members of that group from the source client It does not transport the assignment of InfoSets to this user group in the source client During an import the import option REPLACE first deletes all members of that group in the target client and then enters the members of that group from the source client During an import the import option MERGE merges all members of that group from the source client with all members of that group in the target client You can enter a new user group member in the target client only if a user master record exists The assignment of InfoSets to this user group remains the same in the target client April 2001 313 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Transporting InfoSets Transporting InfoSets When transporting an InfoSet the system transports the InfoSet and the assignment of that InfoSet to user groups in the source client To import an InfoSet the appropriate logical database must exist in the target client Moreover a thorough check is run on the logical database This check highlights the there are inconsistencies between the InfoSet and the logical database During an import the import option REPLACE first deletes the assignment of that InfoSet to user groups in the target client It then transfers the InfoSet to the target client and copies the assignment of the InfoSet to user groups from the source client if corresponding user groups exist in the target client During an impor
89. using the appropriate context menu You can determine the output fields at the same time as the selection fields or after you have made your selection You can choose output fields from the field groups as required 66 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Output g You can output all data on the selected persons as a Value and you can also output some of the data as a Text For example the form of address key value 01 text Mr value 02 text Ms The icon used to flag a field indicates whether the field has a text The context menu for each field with a text enables you to determine whether the text the value or both are output If you select fields by using the checkboxes or drag amp drop the standards determined under Settings apply 3 You use the preview of output to format output as required see Format Output Seite 27 4 You start output in the InfoSet Query screen or as a full screen April 2001 67 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Output Data for Selected Objects Output Data for Selected Objects Prerequisites Maybe you have made a selection and edited the hit list If you do not want to edit the hit list you can start output without a prior selection The selection is made automatically before data is output You are advised to use data output after you have entered selection criteria It is possible to start output without selection criteria but this means that all of the objects that can
90. whether you want to output the relevant currency or quantity unit before or after currency amount fields and quantity fields or not at all g Currency amount fields and quantity fields are numeric fields which each have an assigned currency field or unit field The correct interpretation of the values of one of these fields depends on the currency or unit The assignment of amount fields to unit fields is defined in the ABAP Dictionary and evaluated by SAP Query In the column Color you can assign a color to each field This may differ from the color of the line defined on the previous screen As with assigning a color to a line you assign a color to a field with the possible entries key The standard color value assigned to each field is the Line color This means that the field is output with the color defined for the line g You only have to maintain values in the column Color if you want to output a field with a different color from that defined for the line If you select Query gt Layout display you can display the line structure and the color attributes The color Key has a special meaning It ensures that any field output with this color can never be shifted horizontally in the display With lists which are wider than the window where they are displayed on the screen it is therefore easy to define key columns which always remain in the visible part of the screen when the list is scrolled horizontally Please note that
91. which satisfy the search criterion You may now begin to define your report The system first takes you to a screen for Assigning Title Format and Notes Seite 139 Branch to the Query Painter by choosing Basic list You can select the fields you want in the Query Painter Or choose Next screen before you start the Query Painter and choose the fields you want to structure your query with This procedure is useful if you want to define local fields g The definition of local fields allows you to generate new information from the fields in an InfoSet without having to include an additional field Consult the section Layout Mode The Graphical Query Painter Seite 367 if you want to choose your fields using the Query Painter If you want to create local fields and include them in your query before you call the Query Painter consult the following sections selecting Fields for Processing Seite 142 Assigning Short Names Seite 144 Defining Local Fields Seite 145 Extending the Selection Criteria Seite 149 You can find further information in the section Layout Mode The Graphical Query Painter Seite 367 You can then skip over the section on field selection and selection criteria since you will have already done this in advance 134 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Creating Basic Lists with the Query Painter April 2001 135 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Creating Queries Creating Queries T
92. with InfoSet Query Procedure Log analysis with a query 1 Inthe SAP Easy Access menu choose Tools gt Utilities SAP Query gt Queries You reach the screen User Group Queries lt User Group gt Initial Screen 2 Make sure that you are working in the global area with the user group SAPQUERY SQ and the InfoSet SAPQUERY_LOGGING Select the required query Choose gt Enter the data required for selecting the log data Choose gt The log data corresponding to your criteria is displayed 2 ot a a Procedure Log analysis using the data browser 1 In the SAP Easy Access menu choose Tools gt ABAP Workbench Overview gt Data Browser You reach the screen Data Browser Initial Screen 2 Enter the table name AQPROT 3 Choose vy You reach the selection screen for the table AQPROT Enter the data required for analyzing the log Choose amp The log data corresponding to your criteria is displayed 44 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Deleting Log Data Deleting Log Data Use You can delete log data that is no longer required for working with InfoSet Query We recommend that you regularly delete log data that you no longer require This ensures that space is not wasted on the database Prerequisites You are in InfoSet Query in the initial screen of the maintenance transaction for InfoSets Procedure 1 Choose Extras gt Manage log This takes you to the Deleting Logged Query
93. within his her roles This also means that the end user does not have to carry out any SAP Query administration functions for example assigning him herself to a user group The queries created by InfoSet Query can also be processed with other SAP Query tools Conversely queries that have been generated with other SAP Query tools can be processed with InfoSet Query Features When you call InfoSet Query you are first provided with a more or less detailed template an InfoSet or an available query that you can change or adjust however you like You can change the selection fields and selection values used as well as the output fields and output format These changes are temporary meaning that all changes are lost when you leave the query ad hoc reporting The advantage is that several users can use the query as a template at the same time without locking each other out If you require further information see Saving Queries Seite 35 It is also possible to save changes thereby overwriting the available query or creating a new query development The process of creating queries is always the same An explanation of the differences between using InfoSet Query as an ad hoc reporting tool or as a development tool can be found in the section Calling the InfoSet Query Seite 46 InfoSet Query uses the SAP List Viewer ALV as its standard output medium This means that after executing a query the output list is displayed in the ALV There is
94. you execute this function a window appears where you can determine the maximum number of data records you want to read Each individual record is considered a database access If you are using a logical database to select data from multiple tables all records from all tables used are counted The system terminates data selection when the maximum number of selections has been reached You can also enter a variant in this same window if you want to execute with variant After you choose one of the functions described above the selection screen is sent Here you may enter selection criteria just as if you were starting a report Below is an example of a selection screen April 2001 103 SAP Query BC SRV QUE mF SAP AG Executing Queries Online Program selections Output format SAP List Viewer O ABAF list Display as table 0 Graphics O Word processing O ABC analysis O Spreadsheet O Executive Info System Els Private file O File store Save with ID Selection screens normally consist of two parts e The upper part of the screen contains the database selections These are determined by the underlying logical database and are automatically displayed on the screen e The lower part of the screen contains program parameters that come either from defining the InfoSet or the query or that were automatically generated by the query J These program parameters may consist of any of the following e Parameters and se
95. 5 781 25 r FPT L TEE Le 202 427 71 200 678 57 168 883 96 159 786 78 153 822 21 153 782 85 112 253 25 0 AG Sea G GGG GGG G G aa hh Wn ee E E E e An AUN h h e h Da h a N 7 746 695 85 14 233 605 24 The Hide columns function can be used to remove chosen characteristics columns from the display Place the cursor on the characteristics column to be hidden and then call the function Show columns The Show columns function can be used to re display columns which were hidden with the Hide columns function All characteristics April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE ABC Analysis This function is of use if a list or table contains further characteristic columns non numeric fields to the right of the key figure column when the ABC analysis is called Normally these characteristics are not included in the result list of the ABC analysis The Edit All characteristics function can be used to include these characteristics in the result list They will however appear to the left of the key figure e Convert This function allows you to convert currencies and quantities into reference currencies or units of measurement Conversion is however only possible if a currency or unit of measurement exists for all currencies and quantities in the dataset The conversion is always based on the values in the dataset so that it is also possible to perform multiple conversions e Print The Print function can
96. ACE User groups to a io Transport InfoSets Import option REPLACE InfoSets to G io Transport InfoSets and queries Import option REFLACE InfoSets to aueries to S gt import option queries REPLACE _ Transport queries Import option REPLACE Wiser groups to gt Queries to a Dataset with imports to oP Delete after successful import You must make a number of entries here First you choose one of the following transport actions by selecting the appropriate radio button 308 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE General Transport Description Display Displays the transport dataset in the table AQTDB Delete Deletes transport datasets from the table AQTDB Copy Standard Area gt Copies query objects from the standard area to the global area Global Area Copy Global Area gt Copies query objects from the global area to the standard area Standard Area When you have specified this field and if necessary other fields you can start the transport action by selecting Execute The system always generates a log containing details of the individual actions executed April 2001 309 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Generating Transport Datasets Generating Transport Datasets The following sections contain information about generating transport datasets Transport Types Seite 311 Transporting a User Group Seite 313 Transporting an InfoSet Seite 314 Transporting a Query Seite 315 To generate a transport
97. AP AG InfoSet Directory InfoSet Directory If you have authorization to change queries you can display a list of all InfoSets which are assigned to the user group you have chosen You are allowed to create queries based on these InfoSets To display the directory choose Environment Directories gt InfoSets 92 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Managing Queries Managing Queries The following sections describe what kinds of query management functions are available to the user April 2001 93 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Displaying Queries Displaying Queries To display information about the structure of a query first enter the user group and the name of the specific query you are interested in Now you can either choose Description or Display f you want to see all of the details of the query s definition choose Display All screens are displayed in the same manner as if the query were being changed however no new entries can be made If you are interested in an overview of the query without wanting details about its list layout choose Description First you see an overview containing general information about a query This includes e Title of the query e Author and last person to make changes e Notes about the query e InfoSet used to define the query e Origin of the selected data e Generated list types sublists e Additional selections Information about individual sublists is also
98. AP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Obtaining Additional INfOrmatiOn ccccccseeccecseeeeeeceeeeesaeeeeesaeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeesaeeeenas 231 ASSIGNING Additional Tables waiecaayvicmesylvatinn aan a alana E 234 Assigning Table Fields to a Field Group cccccsccecceseeecceesseeceenseecseseesseeeeeeeas 238 Displaying a List of Assigned Additional Tables ccccccceccceseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeens 239 Deleting the Assignment of Additional Tables cccccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeas 240 Creating Additional Fislds tui sswe nese dadl ener et ieee ave 241 Assigning Additional Fields to a Field Group ccccccceeeceeceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeenens 244 Displaying a List of Existing Additional Fields cccccccecsseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeas 245 Deleting Additional Fields scccxc nares waar aie sanchanscavevaeveaseceadsu stenaieseiceiecsan acer detadae 246 Creating Additional Structures 5 2c s 5 25 asics Sets inetecaite aes ios ese Hate ita ieee acetate 247 Assigning Structure Fields to Field Groups ccccccecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeees 248 Deleting the Assignment of Additional Structures cccccccccececseeeeseeeeeceeeeeeeeees 249 Creating Extra Selection Fields cccccccssceccsssseecsesseeeceeseeecsegseecsseesssageeeseegseesseseeeeas 250 Creating ace e LS CS eae ee a ee er a one 252 Creating Selection Criteria cccccccsssc
99. Activities screen This screen lets you determine which logs you want to delete You can determine for example whether you want just the log data to be deleted that is created for a certain InfoSet or a certain user 2 Enter the data required 3 Choose Result The log data that corresponds to the criteria entered is deleted from the database April 2001 45 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Calling the InfoSet Query Calling the InfoSet Query Purpose The Administrator can make the InfoSet Query available to users in a number of ways e For example the call can be implemented using four reports that determine the particular call parameters These reports decide which access rights the user has for example from which role and with which InfoSet the InfoSet Query can be started and which reporting type can be used development or ad hoc reporting e The InfoSet Query can also be started from the maintenance transaction for queries in the SAP Query See also Type of Reporting Seite 48 Rights to Access InfoSet Query Seite 47 Modules for Calling the InfoSet Query Seite 49 Starting InfoSet Query Seite 16 46 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Rights to Access InfoSet Query Rights to Access InfoSet Query The Administrator can control access rights to the InfoSet Query using roles or SAP Query user groups e Roles The technical background to controlling access authorization using roles is as follows
100. B tl SFLIGHT MANDT lt 5 02 Flight demo table Airline carrier SFLIGHT CAR 02 Airline carrier ID Flight connecti SFLIGHT CON 02 Flight connection Id Flight date SFLIGHT FLDA s 03 Flight booking Airfare SFLIGHT PRICE Flight date Local currency SFLIGHT CUR gt Plane type SFLIGHT PLAN eE Maximum cap SFLIGHT SEAT eE Occupied seal SFLIGHT SEAT Total of curren SFLIGHT PAYM Flight booking SAOOK TF Flight booking SHOOK Field Client for SBOOK MANDT Technical name SFLIGHT CARR TE Airline carr SAQOK CARRID in field group H2 cP Flight de Flight conn SHO0K CONNID Flight date SBQOK FLDATE 03 Booking ni SBOOK BOOEKID eE Customer SHOOK CUST e Business SHOOK CUSTT eE Smoker SBOOKSMOK lt gt __ lt gt fIOO 14 l J If you select Change on the initial screen the screen above is subsequently displayed Although you can still return to the title screen by choosing Goto Title database you can only make changes which do not affect the structure of the InfoSet data The data source structure logical database table join table with the corresponding enhancements additional tables additional structures additional fields is displayed as a tree in the left half of the screen Each field is marked with an icon The icons Simple Field and Field April 2001 223 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG InfoSet Display with
101. Basic Lists Seite 348 statistics and ranked lists in tabular form with the help of the table view control facility This type of display does not include totals lines sub totals line and lines with control level texts g The function always manipulates the statistic which is either indicated by the cursor or appears first on the screen The advantage of this display over the list is that it gives you access to a range of interactive functions These include functions which are automatically provided by the table view control facility e g column switching storage of settings etc With other functions you can manipulate the displayed dataset by selecting lines and columns The functions are e Convert This function allows you to convert currency amounts or quantity specifications to a reference currency or reference unit by marking the column containing the amounts to be converted The currencies or units must also be in the table e Sort Two important functions are those allowing you to sort in ascending or descending order The sort proceeds from left to right and depends on the column s you select i e the marked column on the extreme left of the display becomes the highest sort criterion The sorted columns are highlighted in the display By switching and selecting columns you can thus sort the data any way you like e Summing The Sum function allows you to calculate totals It calculates an overall total for each nume
102. Create empty field groups You can choose here which fields should be assigned to field groups If the InfoSet is created using a logical database then the following applies Where the logical database contains a maximum of four nodes exactly one field group will be created for each node If the logical database contains more than four nodes then you can determine first in a dialog for which nodes a field group should be prepared For this the structure tree of the logical database is displayed in a dialog box Each node that should have a field group prepared for it can be selected here with a checkbox The prepared field groups have the same long texts as the corresponding nodes They are empty meaning that no fields have been assigned to them i a The logical database F1S consists of three hierarchically arranged tables Three field groups are generated in advance accordingly 01 Flight schedule _ 02 Flight demo table J 03 Flight booking J Flight schedule SPFL FH Flight schedule SPFLI e I Flight demo table SFLIGHT P Flight demo table SFLIGHT ST Flight booking SBOOK b PR Flight booking SHOOK The predefined and perhaps preassigned field groups can be changed in any way you like Long text can be changed Field groups can be deleted or taken up afresh You are recommended however to use and keep the preset 1 1 relationship between field groups and tables or nodes 226 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Quer
103. F SAP AG Defining Basic Lists Defining Basic Lists The following sections use sample lists to demonstrate the different basic list processing options that SAP Query provides 150 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Defining a Single Line Basic List Defining a Single Line Basic List A directory of flight connections is created The query name is G1 On the initial screen you specify this name and select Create Then you choose the InfoSet FLBU flight bookings and assign a title and list format Since you just want to generate a list of flight connections you only need fields from the field group Flight connections You select the fields you require Arrival time Short description of airline Point of departure Destination Flight connection code Departure time by marking them Then choose Basic list On the next screen you start to define the basic list The following sections explain how you proceed when defining a simple basic list Defining the Line Structure Seite 152 List Line Output Options Seite 155 Defining Output Options for Each Field Seite 156 Changing Headers Seite 158 Graphics Seite 161 April 2001 151 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Defining the Line Structure Defining the Line Structure On the Basic List Line Structure screen you specify the lines in which you want to display and the order in which you want the fields to appear The following basic list contains all t
104. HEEGEES HELGE HEEGEEHS HEEGUEB HEEGUEE HOEEEEES HEEEEEES Total Fl Bond James flelcke E Tillinger Hans SAFP Asia Sterk U Ruthenberg K SAF Als SAP Australia Pty Ltd Meyer K Date 11 05 1999 Number Fl Date oT Sh ST os SY eT C3 03 TY oS Ty Air Nr Depart Occupied Free 5 Amount f for currncy 1 465 56 469 139 1 455 24 1 949 14 2 0 ff 405 56 424 93 SE 90 515 585 394 61 l6 197 47 1 z9 045 41 538 26 As 4 240 079 1 455 24 1 405 56 4 4190 74 1 4 0 40 1 455 24 4 102 210 1 409 fF 1 465 56 2 410 4 4 951 097 o 61 7 f EF SAP AG Arriva If you are totaling a particular field the total is output in the same column as the field that is with the same output length For this reason the output length may be too short for the total and cause overflow ABAP identifies these overflows by placing an asterisk in front of the affected value when it is output To avoid overflows like this when outputting totals you can simply increase the output length of the field This is possible on the screen Output Options Field In the above example summing is performed on a field which contains currency amounts Here a currency distribution is generated automatically that is the individual currency amounts are summarized depending on their currencies 172 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Sorting and Subtotals Currency specific summation also a
105. P Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Saving and Redisplaying Lists List Backup for Query G1 of User Group FE 31 06 1999 15 24 55 All flight connections Existing saved lists 31 08 1339 15 24 02 Flight connections of airline AA 31 00 7999 15 23 41 Flight connections of airline DL 31 00 7999 15 22 59 Flight connections of airline 50 On this screen you identify each list by the date and time it was created There is also an explanatory text for each to help you locate the right list Your current list is the first entry The system shows the date it was created You have to add the explanatory text To save the text and the list select Continue This returns you to the display of your current list Redisplaying Lists To redisplay a list which has already been saved select Goto gt Saved lists on the initial screen You then see an overview of the lists already saved for that query Query 61 User group FB Records C 31 08 1999 15 24 02 Flight connections of airline AA 1 C 31 08 1999 15 23 41 Flight connections of airline DL 1 C 31 08 1999 15 22 59 Flight connections of airline 54 1 To choose and display a list from the overview place the cursor on the desired list and choose Display The saved list is then displayed on your screen g If you want to know which selections were used to create the list use the Selections function When saved lists are displayed not all conditions may be reproduced as you remember them Colors
106. Query Authorizations Seite 81 e Assigning InfoSets All InfoSets covering one task area are assigned to one user group The members of this user group can define only those queries in the InfoSets assigned to their group As a rule a user is part of one user group But it is also possible that users with several work areas are also members of several user groups To manage user groups you use the component Maintain User Groups April 2001 285 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Displaying User Group Directories Displaying User Group Directories User Group Directory For a list of existing user groups select Environment Directories User groups or display a list of possible entries for the relevant input field The resulting output contains the user group ID and description for each user group lf you choose a user group from this list the system returns you to the initial screen and displays the user group you have selected in the appropriate field Directory of Users per User Group For a list of users and the user groups to which they are assigned select Environment gt Directories Users user groups The selection screen of this report allows you to restrict the list to individual users or user groups If you do not specify any restrictions the system generates a list of all users belonging to any user groups You can scroll through the list and choose a user group with the Choose function InfoSet Directory
107. RANKFURT LH 2462 06 30 001 07 35 00 FRANKFURT LH 2402 10 30 001 11 35 00 FRANKFURT LH 2436 17 30 00 15 35 00 FRANKFURT AA O0D26 05 30 00 09 50 00 FRANKFURT LH 0400 10 10 00 11 34 00 FRANKFURT LH 040213 30 00 15 05 00 FRANKFURT SAN FRANCISCO LH 0454 10 10 00 12 30 00 FRANKFURT SAN FRANCISCO UA 0941 14 30 00 21 06 00 SAN FRANCISCO AA 0017 13 30 00 16 31 00 SAN FRANCISCO UA OOGY 14 45 00 17 55 00 SAN FRANCISCO DL 1699 717 15 00 20 37 00 FRANKFURT 35 7 OF G5 00 09 05 00 SAN FRANCISCO FRANKFURT LH 0455 15 00 00 10 30 O0 SAN FRANCISCO FRANKFURT UA 3504 15 00 00 10 30 00 SAN FRANCISCO NEW YORK AA 0064 09 00 001 17 41 00 SAN FRANCISCO NEW YORK DL 1984 10 00 00 18 25 00 164 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Output Options for Control Levels Control levels increase the options you have for varying the layout of your list You can for example output a list with the following format es 5 a iyne wee TOO eh LAN a at SURAT ES ESTE ary EN HiT pe ie EAT H E ae eerie ASIA NATA CE E y FRANKFURT T E f i 3 I FRANKFURT 2415 ag ei eee eer pea pe sss SPT ea wits O wes yee BERLIN iLH J E OEMS SETE f NEW YORK i NEW YORK N E Y O Ri K af lal x TS z s he aa i ees aan ee Git Sn AEE AEE AE 3 ee a pe ee a a Pee oe aa a er e J i aa oo26 o8 30
108. RANKFURT NEW YORK O 000 DEM D LH 0400 FRANKFURT NEWYORK 66 81 87804 DEM ou NEW YORK 140 DE 0400 DE Ml city LICCUIED B Fa 228 Ad O2 FRANKFURT NEW YORK 10 12 294 36 DE 0402 FRANKFURT NEW YORK 16 20 979 60 DE 02 FRANKFURT NEW YORK 41 63 416 52 DE 0402 FRANKFURT NEW YORK 62 gt 77 666 72 DE Fal I F Fy Lo E R I 2 J m e TIN TE J2 FRANKFURT NEWYORK 74 9261335 DE 2402 FRANKFURT BERLIN O 000 T 05 7 l hJ E I z 02 FRANKFURT BERLIN 9 9 4 13705 DE 2402 FRANKFURT BERLIN 30 1357030 DE 02 FRANKFUR 2402 FRANKFURT BERLIN 97 43 669 40 DE hI k I mF SAP AG April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Layout Mode The Graphical Query Painter Layout Mode The Graphical Query Painter Use The graphical Query Painter is called whenever you choose to define a QuickView in layout mode It allows you to format a list according to your wishes and is used especially for constructing basic lists Features In layout mode you can e Define output options for lines e Change the positioning and size of fields e Create screen templates e Edit headers footers and column headers e Define control levels e Sort e Create totals lists etc QuickViewer Q2 fist design laos Basis mode Execute S AB E Ruler Ruler All tools onoff ub Header Header Footer Footer amp Mode assignment Datafields ist Si ee ee H Flight sche
109. RITE LISTDESC FDESC LISTDESC FNAME LISTDESC FPOS 340 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Example LISTDESC FTYP LISTDESC FLEN LISTDESC FDEC LISTDESC FOLEN LISTDESC FCUR LISTDESC FADD LISTDESC FCOL ENDLOOP SKIP 1 WRITE Data table ULINE LOOP AT DATATAB NEW LINE DO ASSIGN COMPONENT SY INDEX OF STRUCTURE DATATAB TO lt F gt IF SY SUBRC lt gt 0 EXIT ENDIF WRITE lt F gt ENDDO ENDLOOP ULINE April 2001 341 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Access Optimization in Queries Access Optimization in Queries You can get considerably improved performance from ABAP reports thanks to enhancements made in OPEN SQL SAP Query exploits these enhancements in order to achieve an improved runtime for query reports One important enhancement is that it is now possible in all SELECT statements to specify a list of fields that should be read from the database table If is used for the field list then all the fields are read Since time consuming conversions are often applied to fields when they are read from the database into program fields this procedure is particularly ineffective if the database table contains several fields of which just a few are really needed in the program This is in fact the usual case for query reports The GET statement has been enhanced which also affects field lists in SELECT statements It is also possible to specify here a list of fields that are required in a re
110. RRIO rere repose aepnanaenmeeneneemeenee carrier Id Since the subsequent procedure is already known the list here contains only the different sub objects or texts which can occur what if anything needs to be noted e Title and notes e Local fields Texts of local fields exist in two forms a description or long text and headers Please note that with headers replacement variables for field contents amp field occur in every language version April 2001 327 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Language Comparison of a Query Modify Sub object Local field Qir O0 Description EN Bookings for the 1st guarter DIE Buchungen im 1 Quartal Header EN Ist quarter amp Y DIE 1 Quartal amp e Field headers Field headers are always offered for comparison if non standard headers have been defined in the query definition As with local fields replacement variables for field contents amp field occur in every language version e Selection texts These are texts which identify the declared additional selections on the selection screen e Control level texts If you have defined control level texts for sort criteria and these texts are to be output at the beginning of each control level they are also offered for comparison Please note here that the template in each control level text for the value of the control level field must occur in every language version It is especially important that the delimiters for the
111. RV QUE Interactive Functions for Further List Processing Interactive Functions for Further List Processing SAP Query also provides a range of interactive functions allowing you to pass lists or more precisely data retrieved by a query and displayed in lists to other software products for further processing Further information is contained it the following sections Common Principles when Passing Lists for Further Processing Seite 118 Download to File Seite 119 Table Calculation Seite 120 Graphics Seite 121 Word Processing Seite 123 ABC Analysis Seite 124 EIS Seite 128 Private File Seite 129 Additional Function Pool Seite 130 Direct Interaction Seite 132 April 2001 117 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Common Principles when Passing Lists for Further Processing Common Principles when Passing Lists for Further Processing The interactive functions for further processing lists are governed by certain common principles e These functions can handle any statistics and ranked lists and can also be used with most basic lists as well For more information please refer to the section on Interactive Basic Lists Seite 348 e You can also call these interactive functions from the display with the table control However it is important to remember here that hidden columns are always passed on for further processing but hidden lines are not e lf alist in SAP Query consists of several sublists a basic
112. S et sericea aE a E E E a E a a aS 38 SE a E E E warn eodesnenemtnooe se 39 Eole T EAO EN E E AAE E E E A A A E E E 42 Acuvaung LOgdIN gesse ge e E aN EE S E 43 Analyzing Log ND AN ai bakssesrentetsacrns bantame E eE E EEEN 44 Deleng Log Dal aeee a E EE E EEEE E NEEE 45 Calling the InfoSet Query siccenissrasennsseincnncexciidsansactaseinesrscavessgarstausincanesskntatattieanesaxsinaneuesiacsenoeet 46 Rights to Access InfoSet QuETY cccccecccccccceeeceeeeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesessaeeseeeeeeeseeeaaeeeeeeesesauaaseess 47 Type of REDOING Beene eee ren ere ere eee EE EEE E N EN EEN 48 Modules for Calling the InfoSet Query cccccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeesaaaeeeeessaaeeeeseaaaees 49 Including InfoSet Query in Roles n0annnnaannnneannneanenrnneosnrenonrrrsnrerornrersnrersrnrrrsnrersrnrrrsnrersnnenne 51 AR mn Tie QUCTY erase et cap eaccetsaeieatenngumceeneanbesnecdsaravectahenmeinanevinmevnedneneeresiucereihbeneiisennblaess 52 Switch Object Selection ON OFF cccccesccccssseeccceseeecceeeecsaseeeceeaseecceageeessageeeceueeeessuseeessageees 54 Overview Of FV CUO sats ieee ccteeiwiamec sey dene cstente cea ticn questa tee esuanucyedaabaaeetininwusiaeanincsiaedsxeaieeee 55 21S 216 g ese eR ee aC Era ee nr A E A E E ee eer ee 58 MAKE SCIS CON M 60 Edit Selected Set Of Objects cc cecccccsescecceeseeecesseecseaseeeceaseeeceegeeeseeaseessageeessaneeesssaeenenes 62 Restrict the Reporting Set
113. SAP AG Creating Parameters Creating Parameters To create a parameter proceed as follows 1 Choose Selections in the InfoSet maintenance screen 2 Choose Create 3 Inthe dialog box that appears determine whether you are defining a parameter or a selection criterion and enter a name for the selection containing up to eight characters 4 Define the parameter Description Departure airport Selection text Departure airport Format Type L Ligth O03 LIKE SPFLI AIRFFROM Extras DBLIGATORY Error message l Checkeode 38 By specifying a sequence on the selection screen you can determine the arrangement of the parameters This is generally in ascending order If two parameters have the same sequence specification the order in which they appear on the selection screen is uncertain g The sequence number applies equally to parameters and selection criteria The text you enter on the Description line serves as documentation and should describe the selection criterion as well as possible It should describe the parameter The Selection text appears on the selection screen of every query report within that InfoSet If you do not enter a selection text the system uses the description as the selection text When defining parameters you have the same options as when you define additional fields If you want to assign attributes such as type and length specifications to the parameter use the field Additns There you c
114. SAP Query BC SRV QUE ro ae gist ot a Ripa Aas iig aJ OLS tek jaa HELP BCSRVQUE Release 4 6C SADA SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Copyright Copyright 2001 SAP AG All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors Microsoft WINDOWS NT EXCEL Word PowerPoint and SQL Server are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation IBM DB2 OS 2 DB2 6000 Parallel Sysplex MVS ESA RS 6000 AIX S 390 AS 400 OS 390 and OS 400 are registered trademarks of IBM Corporation ORACLE is a registered trademark of ORACLE Corporation TM INFORMIX OnLine for SAP and Informix Dynamic Server are registered trademarks of Informix Software Incorporated UNIX X Open OSF 1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open Group HTML DHTML XML XHTML are trademarks or registered trademarks of w3c World Wide Web Consortium Massachusetts Institute of Technology JAVA is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc JAVASCRIPT is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc used under license for technology invented and implemented by Netscape SAP
115. SCO Fuga o a gt amp Geschanervatunde E SSUUUUUESBUULS AUIOUBOUUUUUE alel 18 07 1999 o9 081903 141020 Arne ooe 200810098 141720 famine f 0 08 M4ooo ago law iinne ee BIE 1 000 P pwdfo33 INS E The current InfoSet is displayed in the top left hand corner of screen You can choose between three display options e Overview tree of the InfoSet with its field groups default setting e Structure of the logical database e Field catalog You can open another screen area under the InfoSet display to display technical information on a selected field The selections used as options for reading the dataset are displayed in the top right hand corner of the screen You have two options for displaying the selections e Selection control ALV grid ready for input e Selection screen 14 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Maintaining Queries The output preview is displayed in the lower area of the screen as long as output fields have been selected You can edit the output at this point For example you can change the order of the columns form totals and subtotals or display the results list of the query What the sub screens contain after InfoSet Query is called depends on the template with which you started InfoSet Query Depending on the parameters used during call up see Calling InfoSet Query Seite 46 you can use a certain InfoSet or query with selection and ou
116. SELECTION SCREEN has to be made separately for each selection When generating a query report you ensure that the check coding for all selections is grouped together at a joint time AT SELECTION SCREEN Parameters which are defined for an InfoSet belong to every query in the InfoSet They are however not fields which you can assign to a logical database table For this reason they cannot appear as fields in a query list You can use parameters in InfoSets wherever ABAP code occurs that is in any of the following situations e when specifying values for the key fields of linked additional tables e the code of additional fields 250 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Creating Extra Selection Fields e the code for the events GET GET LATE e the code for the events START END Parameters are not associated with particular logical database tables As with parameters selection criteria defined for an InfoSet belong to every query of that InfoSet and appear on the selection screen You can use selection criteria wherever ABAP code occurs for example in any of the following e the code of additional fields e the code for the events GET GET LATE e the code for the events START END g Selection fields must always be backed up by ABAP code to ensure that they function properly Further information can be found in the following explanations of parameters and selection criteria April 2001 251 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF
117. See also HR InfoSets for InfoSet Query Seite 70 InfoSets in the HR Application Seite 266 270 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Creating InfoSets without an Underlying Logical Database Creating InfoSets without an Underlying Logical Database As well as producing reports on logical databases you can also use SAP Query for reports whose data did not come from a logical database There are four ways of executing reports without any underlying database You can evaluate sequential datasets e You can execute a report with the help of a table join The result set of a table join is a table each of the lines of which contains all the fields of all the tables used in the join e You can read the contents of tables directly Here the system uses a SELECT statement to retrieve data e You can evaluate any dataset To do this you must write a data retrieval program yourself and store it as a model program e In this case the system retrieves data as it would for a report using a logical database Select one of the four data retrieval methods specified These evaluations use largely the same methods as those described in Creating and Changing InfoSets Seite 218 If the InfoSet is based on a table join then you should specify the name of the first table of the join in a table join lf you opt for data retrieval using a program you must specify the name of the data retrieval program If you decide to read a sequent
118. Set i a Suppose you have created a query using an InfoSet and have already executed it frequently Your system administrator then modifies the InfoSet by changing the type of a field which you use in the query When you next want to use the query you get a message informing you that differences exist between the query and the InfoSet If differences occur between queries and InfoSets you should terminate the processing and perform a comparison between the query and the InfoSet This is possible only if you are authorized to change queries To perform a comparison select Query gt More functions gt Compare You then see a list of all the fields defined differently together with information about how the field definition has changed and where in the query the field is used The system gives you an automatic adjustment option for individual fields At the end of the list there are some notes telling you what to look out for in an automatic adjustment and what you must do if you want to carry out the adjustment yourself g Differences between queries and InfoSets can also occur after transports April 2001 101 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Executing Queries Executing Queries When you have chosen a query and a user group on the initial screen you can execute the query online or in the background Further information about this is contained in the following sections 102 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE
119. You may also enter an Exchange rate type here All conversions are then undertaken according to this exchange rate type If multiple lines containing currency values exist all conversions are made according to the exchange rate type In addition you can also enter a reference currency on the selection screen Whenever multiple columns with currency values exist all conversions are made on the basis of the reference currency If you do not enter a reference currency Conversions are made using the reference currency entered during query definition You can define up to 9 statistics for each query The Next statistic allow you to proceed to the Statistics screen where you can define another statistic The annual sales in DM were output in the first statistic We can change this by entering a number in the column Rnd If you enter a 3 the amounts are converted to amounts in thousands When you execute the query the statistics you have defined are displayed one after the other After the statistics you get an overview stating which currency conversions were performed as well as the date and exchange rate on which the conversions were based The overview also provides information about quantity conversions and the conversion factor You select these on the next screen and then use the Statistics function to branch to definition of a Statistic They are determined by SAP Query itself The color attribute Key is automatically assigned to all non n
120. a column this function deletes all output fields 27 SAP Query BC SRV QUE Formatting the Output Initialize formatting Update data Change column sequence Output do not output currency or unit 28 Choose fi Choose Si The query is executed and the results list is displayed in the lower part of the InfoSet Query screen Select the column whose position you want to change and use drag amp drop to move it to the required position In the basic list currencies or units are output automatically in an additional column after the value column Choose the following in the context menu of the value column to change the position of this column Currency Before the value or After the value Unit Before the value or After the value Choose the following in the context menu of the value column to prevent the currency or unit column from being output Currency Do not output Unit Do not output mF SAP AG Resets output formatting to its original state Use this function if you no longer need to create subtotals or totals The column sequence is not reset After the query has been executed you can use the ALV functions from the output on the InfoSet Query screen for example Excel Inplace display or the export for text processing programs If you change the output list in such a way that a new selection must take place when you add a new field for example y
121. according to the select option InfoSets and the chosen mport option Valid import options are REPLACE and MERGE Furthermore all queries are transported according to the select option Queries which use the InfoSet for each of the InfoSets selected in this way The query user groups are of no relevance here The only valid import option for these queries is REPLACE This transport type facilitates the transport of a modified InfoSet and all associated queries With the transport type Transport queries all queries are transported according to the select option User groups and the select option Queries as well as the chosen mport option Valid import options are REPLACE and GROUP ug If for example you want to export the InfoSet FLBU and all the associated queries you must make the following entries April 2001 311 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Transport Types LOR OR OES REPLACE REPLACE REPLACE REPLACE You get an export log in the export result The export log shows which objects queries InfoSets user groups are exported and which import option is used to import each object during a later import If you export data to the table AQTDB the export log still contains the name of the generated transport dataset which matches the name of the generated transport request 312 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Transporting a User Group Transporting a User Group When transporting a user group the system
122. ade can mean that the amount paid can be less than the fare specified in the table SFLIGHT Tables with Additional Information The tables of logical database F1S also contain a range of information only in short form Only short names are given for the airline carriers for example LH for Lufthansa Detailed information about an airline carrier for example its full name is stored in a table that is not part of the logical database The reason for this is as follows The airline carrier is not the only key in table SPFLI It occurs several times in this table once for each flight connection it runs Saving more detailed information in table SPFLI would be largely redundant Only space saving short codes are therefore used in table SPFLI Whenever detailed information is needed you can retrieve it by accessing an additional table The key for this additional table is the short code of the airline Carrier The same applies for a range of further information Airport information technical data about aircraft and customer information is also stored in this way This is how logical databases usually operate The query provides utilities that allow you to access all this information Listed below are the most important tables which contain additional information to that in the logical database F1S Table SCARR This table contains additional information about an airline carrier particularly the full name long text The table key is the airl
123. age This function will take you to a dialog box where you can enter a new query name and a description The system proposes a new name if the template you called up was an InfoSet if it was a query then the system proposes the query name If you save a query under the same name again meaning overwrite it then it is locked for other users That is other users of InfoSet Query can continue to use the locked query as a template but cannot overwrite it If you are working in a context which uses the SAP Query user groups you can also select from the dialog box a user group to which you want to assign the query At this point you can switch between user groups to which you are assigned and which have access to the current InfoSet e Save if not the first time If you are using the function again with a changed query during a session with InfoSet Query the query you saved before is overwritten The dialog box is not shown again Locks that already exist remain valid e Saveas This function primarily exists for you to copy queries and edit them afterwards With this function the dialog box is always shown to enter the query name and a description The system proposes the name of the query that you used as template The query is saved and locked under the name entered If you have already saved and therefore locked the template this lock is removed If you are working in a context which uses SAP Query user groups you can also selec
124. aia bundubdarmareh bohests cuspesestdeweadth bagacsaadeweeiepteds 100 COMPO QUCTICS pri a E E Eaa 101 SC TING UCI SS riis abion EE aa e a EEEE aE 102 Exec ting QUCMES ONING ssrsesserssiisiirisa kiesnek kaia aar aaas kariaia 103 Executing Queries in the Background cccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeesaeeeeseeeeeeseeueeesaaeeeessaeeees 107 Improving Response TIMES ccccccecccseeccseeceececeueecseeecueecsucecaueesaueeeessaeeseueessueessueenaees 108 Interactive List Display Functions ccccecccceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeseeeeseusesaueeeseeessneeenaeees 109 Saving and Redisplaying Lists ccccccccseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeseeseeesseeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeas 113 Calling Other REDOMS crasicinsesevid dasinnresasuacctwdeicsmeveniacabucetbusiandeuarestatusuintedasnestdasusdhendbuamedundsitens 116 Interactive Functions for Further List Processing cccccseeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeesaeeees 117 Common Principles when Passing Lists for Further ProceSSing cccsssceeeseeeees 118 LOW MOC COTM aaa nprtinattetacne E E E E EE 119 Fable G aC UIA OM onn EE E EEE E EE EO 120 APIC ae E E E E T 121 vord FO CS SN caou EEE A E EEEE EIE 123 AB CANAN SG eee E E A E EN 124 L E EEEE T EE E E E E E T 128 HIENA a E A E E A E ince nate in EN E E ed E E E E 129 Additional Function POO ccccccccecseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseaeeeseueessaueesseeessaeeeseeessees 130 DE E O O usna E 132
125. aintain codes for this choose Codes for Extras in the Extras tabstrip This brings you to an Editor All commands normally available in ABAP editors are also available here April 2001 241 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Creating Additional Fields Extras Selections i Code Enhancements Coding section Additional fleldtstructure Ee sequence of coding section Additional field SEATFREE Modes SPFLI Note the editor function Check which checks your code for syntax errors Otherwise it can only be corrected when you use the functions Check and Generate for the InfoSet area as a whole You should check carefully that the fields used in the code all contain valid values at the time the ABAP code is executed The system helps you to do this by allowing the following fields e Parameters see Defining Parameters Seite 250 e Data from the DATA code see Further Code Seite 257 e Fields of the data source table to which the additional field is assigned and fields of superior logical database tables In the case of the latter any additional fields and additional table fields assigned there are also allowed E If for example you have assigned the additional field to the SFLIGHT table of the logical database F1S fields of the SPFLI and SFLIGHT tables are allowed It is also possible to access the fields of additional tables as well as additional fields assigned to the table SPFLI e Other additional fields assigned to the
126. aintaining InfoSets April 2001 201 SAP Query BC SRV QUE mF SAP AG Selecting InfoSets for Processing Selecting InfoSets for Processing This is what the initial screen for the InfoSet maintenance component looks like InfoSet A Changes oy Display 2 Description User group assignment InfoSet Title TableviewsIc uso LIS HR Personal Salary Benefits juso2 HR US Time Managment EE Applicant Management When you start the component the system displays the names and titles of the InfoSets that have already been defined in the lower part of the screen A range of display and maintenance functions is available to you for these InfoSets There are two possible ways of selecting an InfoSet for processing by one of these functions e Enter the name of the InfoSet in the appropriate input field or e Select the list entry for the InfoSet in the lower part of the screen You can now execute the function g Whenever you call value help for the nfoSet input field a list of InfoSets that have already been defined is displayed There are several different functions available Choose the Search function if you are looking for particular terms In the directory you can use the Database structure function to retrieve detailed information about the logical database underlying an InfoSet This information includes specifications about the database structure as well as any select options and parameters that app
127. al line e To delete a line in your header drag the trash can icon to that line g If you have only a single header line and you delete it you can re insert a header by choosing Additions gt Insert header You can define fixed header lines and footer lines so that when you generate the list they receive current values You can use the following fields directly as variables amp NAME Name of the user processing the query amp DATE amp D Current date amp TIME Current time amp PAGE i Current page number 6 characters amp P Current page number 3 characters Example This is what a list formatted in the Query Painter looks like Depart city Arrival city ID No Depart Arrive NEW YORK SAN FRANCISCO AA GOT 13 30 00 16 31 00 Time amp I IME amp SPAGE At execution it looks like this 372 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Headers and Footers Fright comections at 08 01 1808 Depart city Arrival city ID No Depart Arrive NEW YORK FRANCISCO SAN FRANCISCO YORE NEW YORK FRANCISCO SAN FRANCISCO YORK FRANKFURT YORK FRANKFURT YORK FRANKFURT FRANCISCO SAN FRANCISCO FRANKFURT FRANKFURT BERLIN BERLIN FRANKFURT BERLIN FRANKFURT FRANKFURT BERLIN FRANKFURT BERLIN BERLIN FRANKFURT ROME FRANKFURT FRANKFURT NEW YORK NEW YORK SAN FRANCISCO FRANKFURT SAN FRANCISCO SAN FRANCISCO FRANKFURT Time 10 24 23 J Please note that although the number of header lines in the page header and
128. amples in this handbook two fields exist in the table SPFLI for departure and arrival airport Both fields contain a key for the table SAIRPORT which contains the long texts for airports In a case like this you should buffer the additional table internally since it is safe to assume that records in SAIRPORT will be read multiple times You must now specify values for all key fields that do not contain a default value You can of course overwrite the defaults For this purpose you can use fields for example SY LANGU number literals for example 34 text literals for example D or parameters You should check carefully that any fields you assign to key fields contain valid values when the additional table is read SAP Query helps you to do this by allowing only the following fields e Parameters see Creating Parameters Seite 252 e Data from the DATA code see Further Code Seite 257 e Fields of the logical database table to which the additional table is assigned and fields from hierarchically superior tables of the logical database In the case of the latter any additional fields and additional table fields assigned there are also allowed ey lf for example you assign the additional table to the table SFLIGHT of the logical database F1S you can use fields from the tables SPFLI and SFLIGHT It is also possible to access the fields of additional tables as well as additional fields assigned to the table SPFLI e Fields
129. an specify all the additions allowed with the ABAP statement PARAMETERS If required you can use several additions one after the other 252 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Creating Parameters The system then performs a syntax check For every selection that is defined by the InfoSet or provided by the logical database you can create code at the AT SELECTION SCREEN in order to carry out checks Ensure that the cursor is positioned on a selection in the overview screen for the available selections and then call the Check code for element function The code at AT SELECTION SCREEN has to be made separately for each selection When you generate a query report checks are made to ensure the check code for all selections is collected at the same AT SELECTION SCREEN and that only those selections that appear on the selection screen are referred to You should also evaluate parameters that you define A typical example would be CHECK lt parameter gt to evaluate parameters in a GET event in order to allow only certain table lines to be processed April 2001 253 SAP Query BC SRV QUE mF SAP AG Creating Selection Criteria Creating Selection Criteria Selection criteria are created in much the same way as parameters see Creating Parameters Seite 252 Description Flight date Selection text Flight date Format FOR SPFLI Extras OBLIGATORY Error message A Check code 3 By specifying the sequen
130. ansport actions mport or Upload on the initial screen of the transport tool If you want to perform a test import first select Test run The system then carries out all the usual checks for an import and prepares an import log The import log also contains information on which locks need to be set during import The test import enables you to check that importing a particular transport dataset will be successful and shows the changes that would be made in table AQLDB of the target client Test runs never actual perform these changes themselves however You should always make use of this checking facility To perform an import or test import you must define the transport dataset s you want to import The transport datasets in the table AQTDB have a key which matches the name of the transport request created for the transport system during the export In the select option Transport request you must specify the key of the transport datasets to be imported The section 318 below describes how you can get an overview of the transport datasets in the table AQTDB If for example you want to re import the dataset exported in 310 you must make the following entries Transport action ia Expat Download i2 Display amp Import i Upload Copy Standard Area gt Global Area Copy Global Area gt Standard Area Test run Transport query variants fonly with exportimporttcopy Transport the reportreprot interface for qu
131. are products SQUE0001 consists of the following components g The Private file function has largely been made obsolete with the introduction of the Additional function pool see Additional Function Pool Seite 130 SAP will continue to support the Private file function for reasons of compatibility It is however recommended that you gradually re define those functions that you have in the Private file so that you can add them to the Additional function pool Be aware that additional function pool functions can only be processed online in the foreground and thus CANNOT be called during background processing In contrast contents of the private file CAN be called during background processing SQUE0001 consists of the following two components e the function module EXIT RSAQEXCE_001 e the menu enhancement RSAQEXCE DAT When you activate the enhancement in a project using Transaction CMOD an additional interactive function called Private file function code DAT is made available in each report generated by the SAP query which calls the aforementioned function module when activated The tables mentioned above data table and description table are then passed to the function module The selection screen thus contains an additional parameter which like the other interactive functions EXCEL Graphics EIS Download to file and Save allows the user to execute the query without displaying the list beforehand Since the name of this paramet
132. area and the global area e Standard Area The standard query area is primarily designed for ad hoc queries that is for queries that are created to fulfill a one time demand and never used again Standard area queries are client specific They are not connected to the Workbench Organizer e Global Area In the global query area queries are developed that are used throughout the entire system that is they are cross client These queries are also intended for transport into other systems Query objects created in the global area are registered in the Workbench Organizer They can be created and transported using the normal correction and transport procedure All query objects delivered by SAP from Release 4 0 are located in the global area You can tell which objects have been delivered by SAP and which objects are customers objects by looking at their prefixes see Query Areas Seite 297 Both query areas provide you with a full range SAP Query functions 78 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Transports Transports e Global Area Global area objects are created and transported via the Workbench Organizer e Standard Area The components Maintain InfoSets and Maintain User Groups contain utilities for transporting standard area objects user groups InfoSets and Queries This enables you for example to transfer tested queries to the production system April 2001 79 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Lan
133. ariants match If two language variants reveal differences the system also notes which of the two variants contains changes and indicates which variant has the most up to date text The language comparison facility is not intended to be used constantly A language comparison should first take place when the query or InfoSet is stable meaning that no more essential changes are expected You can of course still carry out changes at any time If you change texts that have already been matched you must then perform another comparison SAP Query provides utilities to help you analyze these texts You perform language comparison with the component Language Comparison The following sections explain which texts you compare individually It is important that non specific references exist To be able to edit a query in different languages you must first perform a language comparison for the relevant InfoSet since many InfoSet texts are either used as an aid when creating the query or are copied directly to the query This chapter contains the following sections General Language Comparison Procedure Seite 321 Language Comparison of an InfoSet Seite 325 Language Comparison of a Query Seite 327 Language Comparison for User Groups Seite 330 320 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE General Language Comparison Procedure General Language Comparison Procedure You can use the component Language Comparison to compare the language tex
134. as been made you can continue processing this set or output data on the objects as required g InfoSet Query only enables you to select one object type The InfoSet you use determines which object type can be selected If you use an InfoSet from Personnel Administration for example the result of a selection is always a set of persons InfoSets from Personnel Planning can only be used to select an object type such as business events or positions If you require further information see HR InfoSets for InfoSet Query Seite 70 and InfoSets in the HR Application Seite 266 This section gives you an overview of options available for selecting objects and continuing to process this set Activities Selection Using One Or More Selection Criteria In the simplest of cases you can use a selection criterion But you can use as many selection fields as you want To do so choose the selection fields from the overview tree choose a selection option and enter a value You then start the selection The result of the selection is the objects that meet the selection criteria and those that lie within the specified reporting period such as all of the business events taking place in New York in March 2001 g You can also make a selection without any selection criteria whatsoever The result of the selection is all of the objects in the system that can be selected with the InfoSet you have used and which are valid in the specified reporting period
135. assigned to development class TMP Whenever this happens no dialog box asking you to determine a development class will appear g In order to simplify matters it is recommended that you always assign user groups and InfoSets in the global area to transportable development classes In this way all queries can be assigned to any development class you want All query objects in the global area that are assigned to non temporary development classes must be entered in a correction request when being created or changed An exception occurs with customizing settings Changes like assigning users to user groups and InfoSets to user groups can be made without having to be entered in a correction request Transports made using the Workbench Organizer do include InfoSets user group assignments not however users user group assignments You can change development classes in the various query object maintenance components by choosing either Query gt More functions Change development class InfoSet gt More functions Change development class or User group gt Change development class However in accordance with the rules for assigning development classes formulated above the following restrictions apply e Changing a user group from a non temporary development class to a temporary development class only makes sense if all of the user group s queries are assigned to a temporary development class e Changing an InfoSet from a n
136. at each time the field is read in a dataset the field s value is added to the sum total The grand total is displayed at the end of the basic list With control levels you can also display subtotals A subtotal contains all values of a field that are assigned to a particular control level that is a particular sort string The Counter option causes the counter number for a particular field to be increased by 1 every time that this field is found within the data set currently being read The resulting counter total is displayed in much the same manner as a grand total at the end of the basic list Just as with totals counter subtotals can be displayed for individual control levels These counter subtotals show how many values have been assigned to a particular control level April 2001 383 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Totaling and Counting Example You want to create a list that displays information about the airline ticket sales of a specific airline over a certain period of time In addition you want to display how many flights per flight connection are planned Proceed as follows 7 First create a QuickView with logical database F1S as its data source Further information can be found under Creating QuickViews Seite 355 2 Select the following fields in the upper left hand window in the Query Painter Airline ID Flight code Departure airport Departure city Arrival airport Destination city Flight date Airplane type M
137. aximum occupancy Occupied seats and Current total of revenues 3 Use the trash can to delete all sum totals except for the sum total for the field Current total of revenues 4 Drag the fields Airline ID and Flight code to the Sort Fields toolbar Hide the control level text for Flight code by clicking on it and undoing its field selection in the Output Options for Control Levels Seite 390 Drag the Airline ID field to the trash since it is displayed in the control level text Click on the control level text for Airline ID and change it to Airline Switch on the Counting fields toolbar and drag the field Flight date to it Choose Node assignment The fields in the first line of the list have been taken from different levels of your logical database hierarchy v J SPFLI eh gt FA Flight schedule on O 2 D No ID Airp From city Apt Dest Figt date Plane Capacity Occupied Booking total H Flight demo table Airline carrier ID Flight connection 0017 AA JFK NEW YORK SFO SAN FRANCISCO Flight date Ea AN 11 19 1999 747 400 660 o 0 00 USD pe too M 5 11 22 1999 747 400 660 96 0 00 USD eee 11 29 1999 747 400 660 48 0 00 USD Maximum capaci Occupied seats Total of current b gt O SBOOK Total Flight connection 0402 0 00 USD i Total Airline LH G 00 USD ie This means that the list is displayed as follows o KgKgagaguUu UKROL A mmn 384 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Totaling and Counting
138. bases Extern This is the same authorization that you need in order to be able to display tables using either the Data Browser transaction SE16 or the initial table maintenance screen transaction SM31 April 2001 81 SAP Query BC SRV QUE SAP Query Authorizations Maintaining InfoSets Maintaining User Groups Language Comparison EF SAP AG The component Maintaining InfoSets can only be accessed by users with authorization for the authorization object S_ QUERY and the appropriate value for Maintenance 23 The authorization for maintaining InfoSets is restricted in such a way that a user wanting to store some ABAP code in an InfoSet can do this only if s he has authorization for maintaining the authorization object S DEVELOP with value PROG for field OBJTYPE and with value AQ for field OBJNAME This is the same authorization that you need in order to be able to use the ABAP Editor to create or change programs whose names begin with AQ If s he does not have this authorization then s he can only select fields connect additional tables or structures and define parameters and selection criteria The component Maintain User Groups can only be accessed by users with authorization for the authorization object S_ QUERY and the appropriate value for Maintenance 23 The component Language Comparison can only be accessed by users with authorization for the authorization object S_ QUERY and the appropriate value for Tran
139. be depicted using a Dictionary type TYPES BEGIN OF person name 20 first_name 20 birthday 10 END OF person BEGIN OF address street 30 number 6 Zipcode 10 city 30 END OF adress adress table TYPE address OCCURS 0 TYPES BEGIN OF personal_ data person TYPE person first_adress TYPE address other_addresses TYPE address_table END OF personal_ data If the logical database node PDATA is of type PERSONAL_DATA the following fields of this node can be evaluated using ABAP Query 346 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Logical Databases with Different Node Types PDATA PERSON NAME PDATA PERSON FIRST_NAME PDATA PERSON BIRTHDAY PDATA FIRST_ADDRESS STREET PDATA FIRST_ADDRESS NUMBER PDATA FIRST_ADDRESS ZIPCODE PDATA FIRST_ADDRESS CITY Those fields containing information about additional addresses OTHER ADRESSES cannot be evaluated because a table type is being used here Additional restrictions apply to nodes with type Data type type C Due to the fact that nodes of this type are not defined as ABAP Dictionary types no long texts or headers exist for these fields Therefore when defining an InfoSet you can only use the technical names of the fields as name suggestions for example PERSON NAME In order for these fields to appear in the same way that all other database nodes do you must maintain all texts for them Additionally pay attention to the fact that reference field definition is not poss
140. be selected using the current InfoSet are indeed selected and output This can result in extremely long runtimes Procedure 1 If necessary determine the output settings see Settings Seite 39 2 Inthe overview tree navigate to the required field groups and fields 3 Select the required output fields by setting flags in the Output column You can also determine output fields by drag amp drop To do so select one or more fields and drag them to the preview of output You can also determine output fields using the context menu To do so select a field and use the right mouse button to access the context menu In the Output context menu select one of the output options If a field has a text the options are Text only Value only and Value and text If a field does not have a text the option is Value only The system transfers the fields to the preview of output as columns If fields have already been selected for output the new columns are added to the list after the selected fields 4 Format output as required by changing the order of columns for example see Format Output Seite 27 5 To start output in the InfoSet Query screen choose il from the application toolbar in the preview of output 6 To start output in a full screen choose EE Output Result The information on the selected objects is output in accordance with your entries In the standard system the data records that meet the selection conditions are
141. be used to print the result list of the ABC analysis The printed form of the list will correspond to the current screen display so that hidden columns will also not appear in the printed list e New Analysis This function can be used to start a new ABC analysis on the same dataset The Back function takes you back to the list April 2001 127 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG EIS EIS This function provides a link to the Executive Information System EIS It transfers the data in your query to the EIS database via an interface and you can then perform further analyses When you activate the function you specify various options for storing the data in a dialog box For further information see the EIS implementation guidelines 128 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Private File Private File If you are using the version of SAP Query supplied by SAP you do not have this function However the delivery system includes an enhancement SQUE0001 which allows all customers to add their own interactive functions The Private file function appears on your screen only if you take advantage of this enhancement option To do this you or your system administrator must take the necessary steps and activate the enhancement For further information see Enhancement SQUE0001 Private Files Seite 334 Generally this function works in the same way as the other standard interactive functions It gathers the data from your query
142. bove Queries and InfoSets are placed in a temporary storage buffer trash can when you delete them You can retrieve them from there when you want Every deleted object remains in the trash can for 30 days After 30 days all items in the trash can are deleted automatically The trash can is administered for each user group If at least one query from a user group has been deleted a Trash can pushbutton appears in the application tool on its initial screen When you execute the Trash function a list is displayed of all queries from that user group that have been deleted From this list it is then possible to select a query with your cursor and either Retrieve the query or Delete tt The Retrieve function reads the query from the trash and places it back in the user group The system checks whether the retrieval is possible If for example the corresponding InfoSet has been deleted retrieval is not possible at least not until the deleted InfoSet has also been retrieved from the trash Successful retrieval is documented in a log The Delete function allows you to permanently delete a query from the trash before thirty days are up The Retrieve and Delete functions both lead to a query s subsequent removal disappearance from the trash 100 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Comparing Queries Comparing Queries Sometimes differences in the definition of individual fields may occur between a query and the associated Info
143. ccccssccccessseecceeseeeceeseeeceeuseessageeecsaeeecseuseeessageeessageesseasensees 63 SE 8 2 11 6 9 cea eee ne ee ee eee ee roe ee eee ear ee ee eee re 64 Execute Set Operations ccccccssccccsseecesececseeeccsececcuseecaueeseageeseageeeeaeeessuseeseuarsoueeenaueeess 65 0 3 ener ere ne tere ve ee a arenes ren a mie ee Can ae eee eae eee ee eee 66 Output Data for Selected Objects ecccceccceccessecceseeeceeusceccseeeeceeeeecsueeeessageeessneeessaaes 68 Process Selection Result in General Reporting cccccccccsseeeeeceeeceeeseeeeeseeseeeeeaeseeseaeeeeeaaees 69 HR InfoSets for InfoSet Query ccccceessccccceeeseceesceeeseceesceeessceeseeaeeeeesseaaceeessuaaseeessauaeeeessaas 70 TG acacia een ewe reece vice a srs ces een nce eae oye E E E enna eduam ecto 72 ASE Ol COMPONENTS seica 73 Groups Of Query USCIS ccceeeeeeeee eee eee seen eeeeeaaeeeeeeee sa eeeseaesaeesseaesaeeeseeeasseeseeeeaaeesseeaaaaeesseaaaannes 74 Maintaining Queries se cecanicarccacsoccnancudctenia cuscssnlnacacssinn ceassunnncinnleecidesesecutnndeatteniumnsceaswennebienuannennes 75 Maintaining User Gl OU DS vnicicasericnsscacssnsniunnsniailednushsadengeadasemeanhisansscimcianitabailansianasaanaesinaserdiaiadananewdes 76 Mamaning TPE US iinan AARE AA 77 RS he isa Aaa EEN a anaa aa co cee casa eng a eaaa gs 78 4 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE DN Ae Es segs sintacesto i tds A S EE Richa es para O EAA ARIS 79 Lang
144. cccsssseecceeseeecseeecseseecseseeessageeecsageeessaseesssageees 254 Displaying a List of Existing Parameters cccccccseeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeenaeeeesaaes 256 PUNE C OCG oc tra cats I A E A 257 DATA C Ode ania a a a a a a a a a Aa R 259 START COU G ap E asta dae wade BG la Onde dete eed 260 END OCS ast ch coe serenade cance as une ESEE I ven sede Ea seaaseee season sacen certs aai 261 GET GET LATE COUGO ice so tskacpiitis sc tis a E O 262 TOP OF FPAGE COUO asiana a aaa aE a a a E a aaa 263 Application specific Enhancements cccccceccceesceceeeceseeecececeeseecesseeeesaucesseeeeseeeessaeees 264 InfoSets in the HR Application cccccccscccccssceeceececseeeeseeeeseaeeeseaeesseeeeseueesseeeeseeeeeseaees 266 HR LOGICal DaltaDaSeS axis catasar Sibidve tual aed dainiesieWincw deta Oram a Gaslie aaa 2 0 Creating InfoSets without an Underlying Logical Database ccccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeenaes 271 Graphical Table Join Definition ccc cccccceecceceececeeeeceeeeeseeessecesseeeeseeeesaeeeesseeeeseeeenes 212 Definition of a Table Join without Graphics cccccccecccseeceeseeeeeseeeecaeeeecaueeeseeesseesenseees 274 PFS CT INS AG esen a 217 SEGUE Hla Datasets csini aa a aa a a aa 278 Retrieving Data With Programs c ccccceseccssseccseseeceeececeueceneuecesaseeeeageesaueesseeeensuesenses 219 Special CATS Ss ates Hae ncttian cud Sagsued a e ncanad sieht nce Sa hasediewton
145. ce you can control the arrangement of selection criteria on the selection screen This is always in ascending order g The sequence number applies equally to parameters and selection criteria The text you enter on the Description line when defining a selection criteria serves as documentation and should describe the selection criterion as well as possible The selection text is displayed on the selection screen of every query report for the InfoSet If you do not enter a selection text the system uses the description as the selection text Selection criteria assignment for a data source node takes place using the FOR field that has to be assigned to each selection criterion The selection criterion is set on the query selection screen if the corresponding data source node is in any way relevant to the query If you want to assign special attributes to the selection criterion use the Additns line There you can specify all the additions allowed with the ABAP statement SELECT OPTIONS If required you can use several additions one after the other The system then performs a syntax check For every selection that is defined by the InfoSet or provided by the logical database you can create code at the AT SELECTION SCREEN in order to carry out checks Ensure that the cursor is positioned on a selection in the overview screen for the available selections and then call the Check code for element function 254 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query
146. choosing Change You then see a screen which contains a list of the texts used in this query April 2001 321 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG General Language Comparison Procedure Field headers E SPFLI CARRID Airline carrier Id ERE Basic list headers You then see an overview screen which lists in the column Sub objects all parts of the query definition where texts are used The sub objects are classified in text groups and even into sub groups if several sub objects of the same type may exist The column Description column contains a more precise explanation of each sub object The first column on the overview screen indicates whether the texts of a sub object have been compared or not If this column is flagged compared texts exist Therefore you can easily tell which texts remain to be compared J A text is considered as compared if the component Language Comparison has been used to generate the source and target languages and if no changes have been made to any of the texts by another SAP Query component You can also restrict the overview screen to the sub objects which have not yet been compared To do this select Only differences The overview now only displays those sub objects whose texts still must be compared g If the Only differences function concludes with the message that there are no more differences all the texts have been compared You can therefore use this function to check whether a language co
147. ckView from the initial screen in SAP Query For further information see Converting QuickViews to Queries Seite 360 354 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Creating QuickViews Creating QuickViews To convert a QuickView into a query proceed as follows 1 Call the QuickViewer using System Services gt QuickViewer or transaction SQVI 2 Enter the name of the QuickView QuickView names can contain a maximum of 14 characters 3 Choose Create The following dialog box appears QUICKVIEWDENO Flight connections 2 Data from tablefdatabase view Tableview 4 Enter a title for the QuickView and remarks if you think they are relevant 5 Ifyou do not want to base your list on a table use the possible entries pushbutton in the Data source field to select another data source You can choose logical databases or InfoSets In addition you may also create table joins For further information see Selecting a Data Source Seite 356 6 Choose Basis mode Seite 361 if you want to create the list directly with no list design Choose Layout mode Seite 367 if you want to define the layout of your list yourself April 2001 355 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Selecting a Data Source Selecting a Data Source The first step in creating a QuickView is selecting its data source You can choose one of the following e Table e Logical database e InfoSet e Table join Logical databases InfoSets an
148. cks are performed and a log is generated Copy Global Area Standard Area copies Query objects from the global Query area to the standard Query area This corresponds to object export out of the global area and object import into the standard area The options Test run Overwriting allowed and Transport Query variants perform the same functions as described in Generating Transport Datasets Seite 310 You can choose which objects you want to transport by entering their names in the input fields on the transport maintenance screen The development classes of those objects copied from the global area are ignored that is their copies in the standard area have no development class or are local objects Copy Standard Area Global Area copies Query objects from the standard Query area to the global Query area This corresponds to object export out of the standard area and object import into the global area Pay attention to the following concerns related to development classes of objects copied into the global area e If an object in the global area is overwritten the new object copied in inherits the development class of the object overwritten e If the object being copied into the global area is a new object a window appears asking you to assign the object a development class Depending on what kind of development class you assign it may or may not be necessary to assign a correction request as well If the object being copied into the gl
149. connections and specify on the Control levels screen that you want each control level to be displayed in a box No column headers are necessary in the new list We can therefore delete the option Header in the Output Options List Line screen If you now proceed to the next screen in the sequence you branch to the Field Output Options screen 178 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Output Positions of Fields You specify a fixed output position for the fields From city Departure time and Arrival time This means they are always output from this position The fields Short name Departure time and Arrival time are output specially formatted or with text The Template option is therefore selected Line color Line color ee Line color M The Tmpl option allows you to include formatting characters in a field You can make your specifications for the template on the next screen For example you can insert a text or enter separators POMC asoDod LI LI LI LI 3 E O CoO E Ait ari gt The system replaces each underscore by the contents of the relevant field The output length of the field is increased by the number of formatting characters When you return to the Field Output Options screen after entering a template you see the new output length in the column New When you change the output length of a field whether directly by defining a length on the Field Output Options screen or indirectly by defining a
150. control levels are framed 396 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Toolbars Toolbars The layout window contains several toolbars for changing list layout and attributes A toolbar is made up of a frame containing a header and other elements depending on the type of toolbar it is icons for example Notes on the functions available from individual toolbars are displayed in the lower left window on your screen whenever you click on a toolbar s header Consult the corresponding passages in the online documentation on the Query Painter for more detailed information The following is a list of the functions available for switching toolbars on off and altering their position on the screen Hiding all toolbars Choose the pushbutton A I tools on off to hide or redisplay all toolbars at the same time Hiding individual toolbars Right click on a toolbar s header after have selected the toolbar as a whole A deactivation pushbutton appears for hiding that toolbar Alternatively you can use the entries found in the Too s menu to activate deactivate individual toolbars g2 The toolbars Toolbox and Trash can can be displayed horizontally Right click their headers and then choose Horizontal Moving toolbars Clicking on a toolbar s header changes your pointer into a move cursor cross You can now reposition this toolbar The Counting fields toolbar is not switched on in the standard To do so choose Tools Counting field
151. ct these catalogs A selection screen is displayed where you can choose which catalogs you want to reconstruct Query variants can only be transported if these variants have been created as system variants see Global Area Query Variants in Query Areas Seite 297 All other variants cannot be transported The following entries are included in a correction request when any global area Query objects with transportable development classes are altered 1 User groups R3TR AQBG bbbbbbbbbbbb This transport object only contains the catalog entry for a user group The user assignments and InfoSet assignments of this user group are neither recorded nor transported Changes to the user user group assignment or the InfoSet user group assignment can be made without having to be entered in a correction request When the transport request is released it includes InfoSet user group assignments not however users user group assignments 2 InfoSets R3TR AQSG ssssssssssssSSsSsSSSSSSSSS 304 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Transporting Global Area Objects This transport object contains the catalog entry for an InfoSet its definition and its user group assignments When the transport request is released the InfoSet s current user group assignments are transported as well 3 Queries R3TR AQQU bbbbbbbbbbbbqqaqqqagqqaqaqaag This transport object contains the catalog entry for a Query its definition and the Query itself 4 Syst
152. ction criteria can only be changed after the appropriate field has been selected and Enter chosen You should use selection criteria of this type only if they cannot be implemented using dynamic selections The advantage of dynamic selections is that the number of database accesses is reduced In our example selection by Flight connection code you should use dynamic selections since they are supported by the logical database J If selection criteria are defined for InfoSet fields and local fields and these fields contain character strings type C then the ABAP Dictionary definition of this field determines whether case sensitivity is maintained when the selection criteria are input or if all input values are converted to capital letters uppercase With additional fields and local fields whose data type definitions do not use a LIKE reference to a Dictionary field that is with fields that have no Dictionary reference all input values were previously capitalized by default This meant that selections based upon case sensitivity upon a mixture of upper and lowercase letters could not be made in the past From Release 4 5A the selection criteria for those character strings with no ABAP Dictionary reference are no longer automatically converted to capital letters This means that when inserting selection criteria you must now pay attention to the exact manner in which they have been written April 2001 149 SAP Query BC SRV QUE E
153. ction pool select the function you want to delete and choose Edit Delete A dialog box appears asking you to confirm that you really do want to delete the entry from the additional function pool choose yes to delete the entry The function module however remains intact Each entry in the additional function pool constitutes a unique transport object AQXI The creation change and deletion of this kind of entry are monitored by the Change and Transport Organizer Thus whenever you assign these entries to non temporary development classes they are distributed to other SAP systems according to normal transport procedure g Because all additional function pool settings are valid in both query areas all changes made to the additional function pool take effect in both the global area and in all clients in the standard area of your SAP system 302 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Transporting Query Objects Transporting Query Objects Query objects are transported in different ways according to the query area in which they were created In order to Know which transport options are available you must first understand how query objects are created e Standard Area Query objects are stored in the client specific table AQLDB They are not connected to the Change and Transport Organizer e Global Area Query objects are stored in the cross client table AQGDB They are connected to the Change and Transport Organizer
154. ction pool maintenance in order to be able to use them 130 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Additional Function Pool Each function has a name and a corresponding long text description The function module found in the list is called each time you call its corresponding function g When executing a query in the background you can no longer use direct passing to call these functions April 2001 131 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Direct Interaction Direct Interaction It is possible to execute queries without displaying the query list on the screen You can instead run interactive further processing functions display the list as a table or interactive list or save the list automatically The section below refers to this process as direct interaction or direct further processing of the list When using direct interaction you should bear in mind the following points e The radio buttons for the interactive functions Display as table SAP List Viewer Download to file Word processing Table calculation Graphics ABC analysis EIS Private file and Additional function pool appear on the query selection screen only if the first sub list is a basic list a statistic or a ranked list The option Download to file allows you to include a suggested name for your file as well e You cannot enter the name of an Additional function pool function directly it must be inserted in the field with the help of the possible ent
155. cular field has been determined a control level is created At the end of this control level subtotals appear for all numeric fields in the list A subtotal contains all values of a field that are assigned to a particular control level that is a particular sort string Delete those subtotals that you do not need using the trash can icon If you do not want subtotals to be displayed at the end of a control level deselect the Display subtotals option under Output Options for Control Levels Seite 390 Example The list displayed below list displayed below is sorted according to the fields Airline ID and Flight connection code The subtotals are created and displayed accordingly Mo AITE From city Apt Dest Flgt date Capacity Flane Occupied Booking total 040i FRA FRANKFURT JFK MEW YORK 11 29 1999 DE 10 10 19 23 456 52 12 02 1999 DE 10 10 140 175 664 16 12 09 1999 DE 10 10 66 01 670 04 12 29 1999 OC 10 10 0 0 00 12 41 1999 DE 10 10 259 291 266 44 Total Flight ID 0400 572 26r 16 DEM 0402 FRA FRANKFURT JFK MEW YORK 11 19 1999 DE 10 10 20 379 60 11 22 1999 DE 10 10 12 294 36 11729 1999 DEe 10 10 re 060 f2 12 19 1999 De 10 10 63 416 52 12 21 1999 DE 10 10 92 613 96 Total Flight ID 0402 06 5 3 16 DEM Total Airline LH 030 640 32 DEM aa April 2001 393 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Counting Fields Counting Fields The Counter option causes the counter number for a particular field to be
156. d containing all selection fields for the InfoSet This window contains the sequence number the names of the selections and a checkbox respectively in order to determine whether the selection is to appear on the selection screen of the InfoSet query In the case of InfoSets associated with logical databases all selections for that logical database are also displayed You cannot change these selections The window s first column contains a number This number determines the order in which the code for each individual selection field will appear on the selection screen This number only affects those selection fields that have been defined using the InfoSet These are displayed on the selection screen after selection fields from the logical database and before all query specific selection fields g If two selection fields have the same sequence number then the order they appear in on the selection screen is uncertain This window also allows you to Create Change or Delete selection fields When using Change and Delete you must place your cursor on the appropriate selection field entry You can also trigger the Change function with a double click For every selection that is defined by the InfoSet or provided by the logical database you can create code at the AT SELECTION SCREEN in order to carry out checks For this the cursor must be placed on a selection and then the function Check Code for Element should be called The code at AT
157. d table joins are all different techniques for consolidating data from multiple database tables Logical databases are pre defined paths for accessing database tables These paths can be made available to various reports in code form Logical databases are especially useful if the structure of the data you want to read corresponds to a hierarchical view This can be realized using a logical database More information on logical databases can be found under Logical Databases Extern InfoSets are used in SAP Query InfoSets can be based among others on logical databases Since the number of fields in a logical database can be extremely large you can also hide fields In addition you can define help fields that users can edit like database fields You can attach additional tables to read long texts and store ABAP code for example If you choose an InfoSet as your data source the InfoSet must come from the standard query area InfoSets from the global query area may not be used when creating a QuickView consult the section on Query Areas Seite 78 for more information Also consult the section Creating and Changing InfoSets found in the SAP Query documentation if you are thinking about using an InfoSet Multiple tables can be linked together to form a join The result set is a table each of the lines of which contains all the fields of all the tables used in the join Hierarchical relationships between tables cannot be analyzed using a table jo
158. der lines followed by the line structure and then the footer lines Fixed header lines depend on the structure of the query These header lines can accept input on the screen and you can maintain them simply by entering your own values The Edit menu contains functions which allow you to insert or delete lines At least one fixed header line is available with statistics The statistics title is output in this header line You can define fixed header lines and footer lines so that when you generate the query list they can receive current values of certain fields You maintain column headers field by field If you do not want to use the header proposed by the InfoSet you can define a query specific header for each field If you want to change a header for a particular column place the cursor on the relevant field in the column header area and select Edit Column header Maintain With currency amount fields and quantity fields you always use the second line of the column header for specifying the reference unit When entering your own headers you should therefore ensure that the headers only cover one line a You can also set graphics parameters for each statistic This works in exactly the same way as for basic lists see Graphics Seite 161 188 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Error Analysis with Conversion Errors Error Analysis with Conversion Errors Using quantity fields can sometimes result in convers
159. diately after the character lt but the system does not distinguish between upper and lower case g Generating the InfoSet is possible only if the model report exists conforms to the above conventions is free of syntax errors and has the correct fixed point arithmetic setting When you generate query reports which use a model report the generated reports inherit the attributes of the model report In the end this allows you to retrieve data by using a logical database However you should only make use of this option in special cases since if you are using a logical database it is better to set up the InfoSet this way also Below is a model report which uses the SELECT statement Below is a model report which uses the LOOP statement 280 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Retrieving Data with Programs The data is retrieved and placed in an internal table which is filled by an import from the INDX In the LOOP structure each line must be read from PLANEDATA into SAPLANE because the InfoSet was created via the structure SAPLANE and the query expects the data in a field string called SAPLANE You can see all the options available for you to use with InfoSets using logical databases in the screen for InfoSet maintenance for example connecting additional tables and the definition of additional fields and so on Make a special note of the special features called Sequential Datasets Seite 278 at the end of the
160. dule 4 4 Airline carrier ID Lii Flight connection Id C Country key LJ Depart city Arrival city Depart Arrive City of departure w Country key LJ Destination airport i Departure time E Arrival time m Distance C Flight type charter c Ta ia Delete Separators aa 8 a Airline carrier ID Insert line List field White Background Dark blue Heading Gray Normal Yellow Totals Blue Key City of departure Technical name SPFLI CITYFROKH Output length 20 standard 20 Output position fe z z Help topics Selection fields List display options List width ruler Header and footer lines Line List field color 1 rmats Color Heading Separators Further options Field formats Position and size Color Line color T i ing Output template Currency and quantity fields Further options Control levels The Query Painter is made up of screen divided into four windows whose size may vary according to wish The individual windows contain e Those fields at your disposal organized on the left in tree form e The list layout on the right e Information about the list element currently selected lower left e Links to the corresponding documentation as well as error messages and warnings lower right April 2001 367 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Layout Mode The Graphical Query Painter The window on the upper left hand side of you screen disp
161. e ALV Grid Control set by default at the start of InfoSet Query e Selection screen can be used as an alternative You can switch between the two display options by choosing Extras Standard Selection Screen or Extras Selection Control On The two display options are described in more detail below ALV Grid Control Fietwname Option wet TE Civotdenatwe NEWYORK Analy E E Ss 2 a gt Businessipivate customer PSCC If you use the ALV grid to display the selections and choose a selection field a new line appears in the selection field list The selection field list contains six columns as follows H Selection column click in this column to select the line required You can select one or more lines You can move selected lines to another position within the list using drag amp drop or you can delete the selected lines e Column 2 This column specifies whether the value amp or the text for value EE is used for the selection You can subsequently switch between Text Value and Text and Value in the text field context menu e Field name Contains the field names e Option Contains the selection option You can use the pushbutton in this column to call up a selection screen for the selection options and select the option required for example lt or gt If you do not select a selection option is used by default e Value Is there for entering a selection
162. e amounts Conversion errors also have the same procedure as statistics see Error Analysis with Conversion Factors Seite 189 All ranked lists contain lead columns They are determined by SAP Query itself The color attribute Key is automatically assigned to all non numeric fields When you scroll horizontally these fields always remain in the visible part of the screen As with statistic you can access the screens for maintaining the header and setting graphics parameters by following the normal sequence of query screens The same rules apply for both these screens If you want to define another ranked list you choose the Next ranked list function April 2001 193 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Changing Queries Changing Queries To change an existing query proceed as follows 1 Choose the component Maintain Queries 2 On the initial screen choose a user group and enter the query name The query you specify must already exist in the user group 3 Choose Change This takes you to the Title Format screen You then proceed as described above lf you want to know who created the query or who last made changes choose Extras gt Status info 194 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Maintaining Queries in the Human Resources Application HR Maintaining Queries in the Human Resources Application HR When you create queries via InfoSets which use logical databases from the Human Resources HR applicati
163. e application classes can either re implement the IF TEXT IDENTIFIER interface or be derived from the basis class The relevant class for text identification is specified in the InfoSet corresponding implementation for the interface method is called for reading texts in all queries for this InfoSet You can use the program RS_ TEXT IDENTIFY TEXT to test text identification Essentially the class CL TEXT IDENTIFIER evaluates the ABAP dictionary It can happen that texts exist for particular fields but the link between value field and text field is not apparent in the ABAP dictionary If this occurs you can define exceptions in SAP reference IMG Basis SAP Query You can for example specify a function module for creating a text or create a text for a field in a table directly The procedure for defining exceptions is described in the documentation for the IF TEXT IDENTIFIER interface The following interfaces are defined for Release 4 6C Automatic text identification Interface IF_TEXT IDENTIFIER Methods IDENTIFY_TEXT READ_TEXT Basis class CL_TEXT_IDENTIFIER InfoSet generator generation and Interface IF_ QUERY_INFOSET GENERATOR preassignment of field groups Methods MODIFY_INFOSET Basis class CL_QUERY_DATASOURCE_GENERATOR You can enter a special class in the dialog box when creating an InfoSet More Options 264 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Application specific Enhancements The specified service clas
164. e complex cases you use the Complex calculation function on the screen for maintaining local fields When defining the calculation formula you can make use of different functions which allow you to display existing short names symbols and icons You can also choose a symbol or an icon from the short name display and place it in the position within the formula where the cursor stands By entering a value on the selection screen In this case the local field is treated like a parameter whose value is determined once by an entry on the screen This is not possible for symbol and icon fields If you want to force input of a value on the selection screen select the field Obligatory g You can use these types of fields in conditions for calculating other local fields This means that it is possible to influence these calculations when the query is processed For an example of this see below in this chapter When you have made all the necessary specifications for defining a local field on the screen select Continue to return to the Select field screen The field you have defined is now included in the specified field group and can be used on all screens just like any other field from the InfoSet April 2001 147 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Defining Local Fields An example of a complex calculation is the local field Long text flight class It determines a long text for the field Flight class with the short name CLASS The field i
165. e current Release work has begun on enhancing SAP Query so that it is possible to evaluate application specific logic without having to modify SAP Query itself The procedure for setting up these enhancements is similar to that for defining and implementing Business Add Ins Extern Specific interface methods are called at different times for example when creating an InfoSet or during a query runtime These interface methods are either implemented by a basis class standard or from a special class containing additional application logic If you want your queries to use application specific functionality rather than basis functionality for a particular service using an InfoSet then you can deposit the class that implemented the corresponding interface in the InfoSet The InfoSet then becomes a carrier for all the information on application specific logic A practical example should help explain the procedure The interface methods IDENTIFY TEXT or READ TEXT forthe IF TEXT IDENTIFIER interface are called for automatic text identification when creating an InfoSet and for reading relevant texts on query runtimes This interface is implemented by the basis class CL TEXT IDENTIFIER and this implementation in turn is used by default Texts that cannot be identified by the basis class could possibly be determined by additional logic in a particular application context For example the CL HR TEXT IDENTIFIER class in the HR environment In principle th
166. e file O File store O Save with ID Selection screens normally consist of two parts e The upper part of the screen contains the database selections These are determined by the underlying logical database and are automatically displayed on the screen e The lower part of the screen contains program parameters that come either from the QuickView s definition or that were automatically generated by the QuickView These program parameters may consist of any of the following e Additional selection criteria specified when defining the QuickView e Parameters and selection criteria defined for example in the InfoSet used e A parameter for the currency conversion date if such conversions are performed in the QuickView April 2001 357 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Executing QuickViews e Several radio buttons allowing you to send the list for further processing see Interactive List Display Functions Seite 109 When you have entered the selections choose Execute to display your list If you want to output the list to a printer instead of on the screen proceed as follows 1 Start the QuickView as described above 2 On the selection screen choose Execute and print You then see a screen where you can specify the print options You can also display the list on the screen first and then select Print 358 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Output Options Output Options Data retrieved by QuickViews and
167. e following options First you reach a dialog box in which you can select a query area a user group and an InfoSet This brings you to the InfoSet Query screen in which the InfoSet Query is displayed but no selections have been made InfoSet Query is started directly with an InfoSet or a query You can start working straight away 2 Expand the field groups you want in the overview tree 3 Puta tick in the Selection column use drag amp drop or choose the context menu to select one or more fields as selection fields The system transfers the selection fields to the list of selection fields on the right of the screen The corresponding value field can be maintained 4 Inthe Value field enter selection values for the selection field you have chosen If necessary use input help for selecting selection values The value types numeric alphanumeric date that you can enter for the selection fields depend on the type of selection field 5 Inthe Options field choose selection options Such as lt or 6 Choose a reporting period 7 Choose Si Hit list Result In the Hit list field the system displays the number of objects that meet your selection criteria 60 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Make Selection You can now e edit the selected object set Seite 62 e use the set of objects selected as a reporting set for further selections See Restrict the Reporting Set Seite 63 e output
168. e substitution u E In the example below the airport codes have been inserted in parentheses An output length of three characters has been provided for the airport code These three characters are indicated by the underline ____ and may not be overwritten by additional entries 5 Enter the text you desire Example Several descriptive texts have been inserted in the following list Depart FRANKFURT 18 76 66 Arrival HEW YORK 11 34 68 Depart FRANKFURT 13 30 00 Arrival NEW YORK 15 05 00 Depart FRANKFURT 18 38 68 Arrival BERLIN 11 35 68 April 2001 387 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Currency Fields and Quantity Fields Currency Fields and Quantity Fields Currency amount fields and quantity fields are numeric fields which each have a currency or unit field assigned to them The correct interpretation of the values in these fields depends on its currency or unit of measure Therefore you can decide whether you want their corresponding currency unit of measure to be displayed before or after the field or not at all Proceed as follows 1 Select the field 2 Choose one of the options from the window on the lower left before No currency field unit or after 3 Choose Apply g The assignment of amount fields to unit fields is defined in the ABAP Dictionary and evaluated by the QuickViewer 388 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Further Options Further Options e Display field only
169. e term is not found or no more occurrences are found you get an appropriate message e Show hide lines and columns The Hide lines columns function allows you to hide lines and columns You can thus restrict a display to relevant sections and make it easier to read The sort sum search and print functions always refer to the visible dataset i e hidden lines and columns are ignored J You can store settings with hidden lines as a variant of the table view control The Show lines columns function allows you to redisplay hidden lines and columns e Fixing columns Two further functions allow you to make certain column positions fixed or to cancel the fixing Although not all columns of wide lists are visible in the table view control you can use the horizontal scroll bar to display those columns which cannot be seen Initially all fields are moved when you scroll horizontally If you then select the Fix column function the selected column and all those columns to the left of it are fixed i e horizontal scrolling has no effect on them Before you use this function all columns to be fixed must be in their original positions To release columns from their fixed positions select Cancel fixing e Print The Print function allows you to print the table as it appears on the screen This means that when you print out a screen list only the visible lines and columns as well as the sorting totals lines column switches and changes in column
170. e that you want to assign to an additional table and choose the function Extras 1 Choose the function Create in the lower right half of the screen A dialog box appears where you must first choose to define either an additional table an additional field an additional structure or code SCARR Type of additional information Additional table O Additional field O Additional structure O Code J The Change function then automatically displays the appropriate maintenance screen It can also be triggered by a simple double click 2 Choose Additional table and enter a name for the table You can use all table names found in the ABAP Dictionary or those already declared as alias tables for your InfoSet see Multiple Additional Table Assignments below The system then creates the corresponding SELECT statement in another dialog box if you selected a logical database as a data source It then proposes a range of the assignment of this SELECT statement in the code section of the generated query report for the GET event of the logical database table This sequence is important where for example you use a table field that derives its value from a SELECT statement as a key in the SELECT statement of another table assigned to the same logical database table The system shows you the key fields for the specified table The system often also gives you a proposal as to how the key field could be filled For example it always prop
171. e these texts for each control level Below is the first screen in the sequence for the query G6 Control level Flight date Standard texts Standard header Total Flight date Number of Flight date lt subtotal Text Total Fl Date Subtotal text Number Fl Date On this screen there is a sub total text and a counter text for the control level Flight date because you selected the columns Total and Counter for this control level on the Control levels screen If you had also selected the column Text the control level text would also be displayed on the screen Apart from this you see the standard texts provided by SAP Query You can now change the control level texts as you like The templates in the texts with lt and gt as delimiters are placeholders for the contents of the control level field that is in the list the template is replaced by the field contents The characters lt and gt are not part of the template and are ignored when outputting the field Each underscore in the template represents a character of the field contents If you insert other characters in the template or change the number of underscores the field contents are re formatted accordingly If you have already changed the texts and then decide you want to use the standard texts after all you can reinstate them with the Standard header function 174 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Changing Control Level Texts April 2001 175
172. e you selected in InfoSet Query 3 Enter a report name in the Report field or choose a report 4 If you want to carry out the report with variants choose a Variant 5 If you want to start the report via the selection screen so you can restrict particular values for example you must select the Start via selection screen indicator 6 Choose Result The report you have chosen is executed for the selected objects April 2001 69 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG HR InfoSets for InfoSet Query HR InfoSets for InfoSet Query To access data stored in the system InfoSet Query uses an InfoSet It provides you with a view of data in specific parts of HR that is structured by infotype On the initial InfoSet Query screen the InfoSet is displayed with its field groups as an overview tree This overview tree enables you to choose selection fields and output fields The InfoSets used in InfoSet Query are created and managed in SAP Query When you create an InfoSet you select a logical database on which the InfoSet is based and determine which infotypes are included in the InfoSet They are displayed in the InfoSet as field groups After you have selected the infotypes you can determine which fields are included in the field groups for each infotype i In the standard system all infotype specific fields of the selected infotypes are included in the InfoSet You are advised to check the selection of fields carefully and adapt the selectio
173. eady shown apart from the overall total at the end of the statistic you can output sub totals lines by selecting the field Su on the Statistic Structure screen When switching a sort string a sub total line is created for this sort string respectively The following three conditions must however be met e Sub totals lines are only possible for fields by which you are sorting e the fields in the statistics must likewise be fields with sorting the sort sequence must be ascending e None of the subsequent fields in the statistic may have a smaller sort number April 2001 183 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Sorting Statistics g You can also set the option New page with sort fields A page break is then inserted after each change of sort field The same restrictions apply to the New page option that apply to the option Subtotal The next example demonstrates how you can use local fields with calculations which depend on conditions in a sorted statistic The statistic contains quarterly sales figures of individual airline carriers for a year which you specify on the selection screen ID ist quarter 1999 nd quarter 1999 ard quarter 1999 4th quarter 1999 DEM DEM DEM DEM AA 95 410 25 167 22 05 24 366 63 570 8932 00 13 890 70 290 420 43 200 602 05 420 296 74 ES oala oig og 42 1 069 144 76 2 r36 026 06 125 642 60 had 623 14 465 043 76 2 215 716 66 Exchange rate conyversion factor 1 81240 1 14 09 1999 You
174. ear on the logical database selection screen You can choose Extras Status info to display information about a particular InfoSet including who its author is and who altered it last Up to 10 previous alterations are displayed with their date and the name of the user who made the changes 202 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Displaying the InfoSet Directory Displaying the InfoSet Directory This section describes the functions for displaying InfoSets and associated queries April 2001 203 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Directory of Queries for an InfoSet Directory of Queries for an InfoSet To display the directory of queries defined for the specified InfoSet choose Environment gt Directories Queries for InfoSets You then see the names of the user groups as well as the name and long text of the queries 204 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Query Directory Functions Query Directory Functions With Goto gt Query Directory you start a report which you can operate in the query directory You can control the resetting of change locks the generation of query reports and the deletion of queries from the directory In any of these cases the report selection screen allows you to restrict the section of the query directory shown to the relevant extracts g You can search for a particular query which is locked against changes by other users or for queries locked by a particular use
175. eating or changing a query are the title and page format This is the first screen of the Field selection sequence Display of all possible flight connections List format Special attributes Lines Standard variant Columns Execute only with variant Change lock Table format Print list Columns With standard title Mo of characters left margin SAP List Viewer O ABAF list O Display as table O Graphic O Word processing O ABC analysis O Spreadsheet O Executive Information System Els 0 Private file O File store SAP Query uses the title you define in this screen later as the title of the screen or when printing as the first line of the heading for the lists generated by the query Additionally there are three lines where you can enter notes that are used to document the query When you request the query directory the system displays these notes with the title There is a standard format for lists displayed on the screen but you can always overwrite this Unless you specify otherwise the system automatically adapts the standard format to the output device used For output to the screen the default is a dynamic page size i e no fixed number of lines and 83 columns In the case of output to a printer the system proposes a standard format on the print option screen but you can also overwrite this With the number of columns you define how wide list lines can be Regardless of this however the width of each
176. ecceseecceaeeeceaeeecsauseeessageeessaneeessaass 332 E Sa EE E E EE E E E I E E 333 Enhancement SQUE0001 Private File cccccsssccccsesseecceeeeeceeseeceseeeseaeeessegeeessegseesees 334 Be MNS ese Sense te sens E aed genes ected wae cee tee ae E ageendee dee ase EE 340 ACCESS Optimization in Queries ccccceeccecesceeceseeteeseecsnecessececeeceneneeeeeseeeagecesaeseceneseneneeeaes 342 InfoSets and Structural Changes in a Logical Database cccececceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeas 345 Logical Databases with Different Node TypeS cccceecceeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeeeseeeeeneas 346 Interactive Multiple Line Basic Lists ccccccceeecseeceeeeceeeeceeeeceeeecaeeceueecseeseusesaueesseeesaeeseas 348 Logical Database F1S cccccsssccccessseecceseeeceaseeeceeueeecsuseeessageeecseuseesseaeeeessageeessegseessegeeesias 349 E107 ON ospea eR Oe 352 Functions for Managing QuUICKVICWS cccccesseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeesesneeseneneeseasneeeseaneessoesaessonsneesenens 353 Croannd CIC VIEWS cei eee NEA 355 Selecting a Data Source see ner teem rte rere et er eter rnin ne eo eee erat ee ee ree eee ea eee ere eee 356 Executing QUICKVIOWS areata neta ccc one aerate etemreenee nnn ettenrdasabentmnacdaneverenteesuatuanandeanencnannres 357 U dol i a Toi e 9 eens erm ees ern eee ee ee a ne ner ee eter ae ee a eer er ere nee a 359 Converting QUICKVIEWS tO Queries cccceeeeec
177. eck and generate to check and generate more than one InfoSet at a time Initially this function calls a selection screen where you can enter the InfoSets you want to check and generate In addition you must designate whether these InfoSets are simply to be checked or if they should be generated as well The function generates a log as part of its results listing the errors found or informing you that the checking and generation process has been successfully completed 216 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Adjusting InfoSets Adjusting InfoSets Use InfoSet More functions gt Adjust to find out if the technical properties of fields from database tables are used in a particular InfoSet have been changed for example type length output length use as a currency amount or quantity field Changes like this should however be the exception lf however these kinds of changes have been made a warning is displayed when the InfoSet is generated in which the differences between fields in the InfoSet and Dictionary fields are described InfoSet More functions gt Adjust allows you to copy these technical property changes for your InfoSet if you so wish Initially the screen is displayed with the same warning that appeared when it was generated This screen also contains an Adjust function that you can use to copy the appropriate Dictionary entries for your InfoSet g Immediately after adjusting an InfoSet al
178. ecked The START code is transparent to the end user Choose the pushbutton Code in the InfoSet maintenance screen and the START Code field help to create or maintain START Code max sptli_lrecords 5 max stight records 200 Choose Check to check your code for syntax errors 260 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE END Code END Code The END OF SELECTION code consists of two parts Before list output and After list output The first part is processed before the list is output and the second part afterwards Choose the pushbutton Code and with the aid of F4 help END OF SELECTION before list output or after list output if number _sptli_records gt max_sptli_records or Humber stlight_ records max sTtlight_records perform inftorm_system_manager faqdbtlbx using Aumber_sptli_records number_stlight_records endif This division means that you can make your own additions to the list created by the query both before and after the list is output Since your own additions are always output on a separate page you can use this to generate a first and a last page that are output independently of the query definition You should however note that these special additions to the output cannot be displayed by the layout display in the query maintenance component The difference between the code for START OF SELECTION and that for END OF SELECTION before the list is output is that whilst the START OF SELECTION
179. ection Flight connection Airline carrier Id LH Totals lists also generate an automatic currency distribution if the summed field is a currency amount field In contrast to single item output however the currency always appears after the totals Logically the same applies to quantity fields 176 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Totals Lists Just as in the example above you can define a list where only the results of counter operations are displayed You can combine both types of lists as well April 2001 177 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Output Positions of Fields Output Positions of Fields Until now we have only specified the output line and the sequence of fields when determining the output position of fields It is however also possible to position fields in a screen You can add texts to your lists too For example you can format the list of flight connections G1 as follows light AA 0017 MEW YORE SAN FRANCISCO Depart 13 30 Arrival 16 31 Depart B80 Arriva 885 Tight AA OE FRANKFURT MEW YORK Depart Ge 30 Arrival 08 60 7 light AA 0064 SAN FRANCISCO MEW YORE Depart 08 0E Arrival 17 21 light DL 1699 MEW YORK SAN FRANCISCO Depart 17 15 Arrival 20 37 light BDL 1984 SAN FRANCISCO MEW YORE Depart 10 00 Arrival 10 25 After copying the query G1 to G8 you can first change the output lines and the sequence of fields You then sort by the individual flight
180. ection screen which is automatically displayed when you start a query Any selections you enter on this screen directly affect the response time Therefore the more precisely you select your data the shorter the response time will be Please also make use of the dynamic selections facility Dynamic selections also directly affect response times 108 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Interactive List Display Functions Interactive List Display Functions There is a range of interactive functions for every list that is displayed in the screen The list can be displayed differently with some of these functions g You can use these functions if you choose ABAP List in the query output selection screen List Overview If your list consists of several parts e g a basic list two statistics and a ranked list SAP Query allows you to choose one of these list types directly To do this proceed as follows 1 Select List overview You then see an overview of the sublists 2 Place the cursor on the desired sublist and select Choose You then return to the list display screen that contains the sublist you selected Selections If you want to know what selections were entered on the selection screen use the Selections function This is particularly useful with saved lists See Saving and Redisplaying Lists Seite 113 Drilldown Functionality for Multiple Line Basic Lists With multiple line basic lists you can sometim
181. ectories Additional fields For each additional field this list contains the data source table assignment and the specified sequence of the codes for processing data in the data source table Subsequent lines contain the description and the ABAP code April 2001 245 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Deleting Additional Fields Deleting Additional Fields If you want to delete an additional field you must first call the additional information screen for the corresponding database table To do this place the cursor on the additional field and choose Delete This is possible only if the additional field is not used by any queries If you want to delete an additional field even if it is used in a query you must first change all the queries affected To do this follow the steps described in Deleting the Assignment of Additional Tables Seite 240 246 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Creating Additional Structures Creating Additional Structures To create an additional structure proceed as follows 3 Double click on a data source and choose the function Extras 4 Choose Create Another dialog box appears where you must first choose to define either an additional table an additional field an additional structure or code 5 Choose Additional Structure Enter the name of the additional structure and then the name of a structure from the ABAP Dictionary Additional structures are actually additional fields with a n
182. ee cess eeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeesaeeeseeeasaeeeseeaaaaeeseaanneeeseoaanes 360 Bk ica cc ee esse cee area E E E E E E E E E 361 selecting LST eS ossai a NE ENEE EEEE EREA E E EEE EAE 362 Determining the Sort Sequence cccccceeeccccesseeecseseeceeseecceaeeessauseecseaseeessueeessageeessenseeseas 363 Selecting Selection FieldS cccceccccsssscecceseeeecsesececsegeeecceeeeessgeeecsageeecseuseeessegeeesseneeeseaess 364 BAIN ONS oen E E E owed nian d namie denne dinedeiet eee eonedeees 365 Layout Mode The Graphical Query Painter cccccsesseeeeeeeeeeseeneeeeeeseeessesneessneneeseeeneesenens 367 selecting Hist Fields iecersscarce nace saetemacaaniesunttawamenecamaterasiieed EEEE EER E NEET 369 Selecting Selection FieldS cccccccccssssceccesececceeseeecsegseecceueeeecegececseuseeeseuseesssugeeessseeeseaess 370 List Display Options sacncteb deenekepcosecdins apectetas tovnelee enennseed outer amp pected dese atest demeates 4 bocteies ayaetee eneneseeeeees 371 ES ACS s And FOOI eo sepsis ecpudannt pe cpsdaraecausaonueqcis cameeanuse SER 372 BEE AS GIG E E stan entre E TE O N E E O E A O E A 374 AS EIS OUPO STON Serisinin RERS iaka 375 ONS rashes eters E Sets hc t nsec bap deed Sere eee nauededa E Uhoemted Semecen cece 376 Column HeadolS senseirenianirmdinrr a re e e r A Ea E E E A EEEE ENEO EA 377 EPO S E EET E EE EAE E EEE E EEEE E EEEE 378 Furno IC ANS acre tees aA E E EEE coe E EATE EE E AE EE E 379 Fie
183. eft hand corner of your screen choose Create Another window appears where you can enter the alias name and the name of the assigned table from the Dictionary In order to delete an alias name place your cursor on the appropriate entry in the list of alias names and choose Delete You can delete only if the alias table is not used in the InfoSet 236 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Assigning Additional Tables In order to link a table as an additional table within an InfoSet more than once proceed as follows 1 Link the table once using its original name 2 Define an alias name for the table 3 Link the table a second time as an additional table using this alias name J Note that the fields from this table will now appear twice within the InfoSet with the same long texts and headers Hence when a table is linked multiple times the long texts and headers of its fields must normally be changed whenever they are assigned to a single field group April 2001 237 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Assigning Table Fields to a Field Group Assigning Table Fields to a Field Group The fields for the inserted additional table are displayed at the end of the field list of the respective table as follows TEE b gt Hf Flight booking SHOOK They can be assigned to a field group using the method already described A Do not forget to assign the fields you need from a linked additional table to a field group The
184. election is always a set of objects of a specific object type The object type such as business event or position is determined when the InfoSet is created If you require further information see HR InfoSets for InfoSet Query Seite 70 and InfoSets in the HR Application Seite 266 e Inthe top right section of the screen the system displays the reporting period reporting set list of selection fields and options and number of hits in the hit list This screen section is used to determine selection criteria and execute object selections You can open and close the Reporting period and Reporting set screen sections If you require further information see Selection Display Seite 23 e Once output fields have been selected a preview of output with example data is displayed in the lower section of the screen You can format output at this point For example you can change the order of columns Furthermore this screen section enables you to start outputting real data If you require further information see Output List Display Seite 25 April 2001 55 SAP Query BC SRV QUE mF SAP AG Overview of Functions G qE CeO SH8 S555 fF ee Ad hoc Query 0 H output Wa ie Field groupitields Selection Output Selection fields from infoSet tt Actions Personnel Number Action Type Reason for Action Leaving date Entry date Length of service fin year Length of service tin mon Length o
185. em Variants of Queries R3TR AQQV rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrVVVVVVVVVVVVVV This transport object contains exactly one system variant of a single Query System variants can only be created when their Query is not assigned to a temporary development class You should also pay attention to the fact that this transport object cannot be locked and can thus show up in different correction requests simultaneously If the Query is transported together with the system variants because of this make sure that the system variants are included in the same correction requests as the Queries Changes to the user user group assignment or the InfoSet user group assignment can be made without having to be entered in a correction request When the transport request is released it includes InfoSet user group assignments not however users user group assignments April 2001 305 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Transporting Standard Area Objects Transporting Standard Area Objects This chapter describes how to transport Queries InfoSets and user groups found in the standard area Standard area queries are client specific Transporting these types of objects can mean that these objects are being transferred to another client within the same system or that they are being transported into a totally different system To access the standard area transport tool call the component Maintain InfoSets or Maintain User Groups and choose Transports For furt
186. er Groups Renaming User Groups To rename a user group proceed as follows 1 Enter the name of the user group in the field User group on the initial screen 2 Choose Rename 3 Enter the new name of the user group The following objects have to be locked before this function can be executed e User group catalog e Query catalog of the user group being renamed e Queries of this user group e Query list catalog of the queries of the user group The function is executed only if all these were able to be set As long as these locks are set other users may be prevented from continuing their work Note that renaming a user group can be a very time consuming activity 294 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Deleting User Groups Deleting User Groups To delete a user group proceed as follows 1 Enter the name of the user group in the field User group on the initial screen 2 Choose Delete First the system asks you to confirm your intention to delete It then checks whether any queries exist for the user group If so it gives you an opportunity to delete them Deletion is possible only if no further queries exist for the user group April 2001 295 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Changing User Groups Changing User Groups To change a user group proceed as follows 1 Enter the name of the user group on the initial screen 2 Choose Change A dialog box appears where the user group s long text can be altered Yo
187. er a name in the field User group A user group name can contain up to 12 characters This must be a user group name which does not already exist 2 Choose Create You then see a screen where you enter a long text for the user group Since the long text of a user group is seen by all end users it should reflect the nature of that user group more precisely than the group s name Fair Flight data evaluations 3 Save your entries April 2001 289 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Assigning Users and InfoSets Assigning Users and InfoSets 1 Enter a name in the field User group 2 Choose Assign users and InfoSets 3 Enter the names of those users that should belong to this user group If you do not want to enter the names of users individually choose Settings gt With selection You then see a list of all users with a user master record in your system In this list select the desired names If you want to enter the names yourself select Settings Without selection In order to change queries a user needs an authorization for authorization object S_ QUERY with the value Change see SAP Query Authorizations Seite 81 These change authorizations can be revoked for each individual user of a user group By de selecting the checkbox behind a user s name you can revoke the change authorization of individual users In order to revoke change authorization for all users choose Delete all change authorizations J
188. er in which these sublists should be displayed When you call this function a dialog box appears in which all sublists that have been defined up until this point are listed in the order that they are displayed An input field appears in front of each sublist where a number between 1 and 90 can be entered This sequence determines the output sequence of the sublists Sublists with no sequence number the standard setting will be displayed in the order they appear in this list after those sublists with sequence numbers have already been displayed If two or more sublists have the same sequence number or no number at all the order basic lists before statistics before ranked lists is used J The function Edit Output sequence is available on all maintenance screens To go to the next screen select Next screen April 2001 141 SAP Query BC SRV QUE mF SAP AG Selecting Fields for Processing Selecting Fields for Processing On the Select Field screen you now select the fields you want to process in your basic list statistic or ranked list or those you want to use as additional selections Selecting Field Groups To facilitate pre selection the InfoSets are divided into field groups If you want to generate a list of existing flight connections you do not need any detailed information about individual flights and associated bookings By selecting the field group Flight connections you restrict the number of fields offered to those
189. er on the selection screen is Private file you are recommended to give the menu enhancement the same name This corresponds to the SAP standard a When you have activated the enhancement you should regenerate all queries so that the additional parameter appears on the selection screen You can achieve this best by going into the component Maintain InfoSets and selecting Goto Query directory Function module EXIT RSAQEXCE 001 This section describes which parameters are passed to the function module EXIT RSAQEXCE_001 and how the values they contain are interpreted or processed The following example demonstrates this process 334 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Enhancement SQUE0001 Private File In client 03 a user in user group RX has created a query X1 which consists of a one line basic list a statistic and a ranked list The basic list outputs the following fields in order The statistic outputs the following fields in order For the field KNC1 UM0O1U details are also required about the number of records read the percentage value and the average value The ranked list outputs the following fields in order KNC1 UM01U Sales in posting period 1 Parameters of function module EXIT RSAQEXCE 001 The function module EXIT RSAQEXCE_001 has the following parameters PROGRAM parameter The PROGRAM parameter contains the name of the query report which called the function module From this name you can determine wh
190. er one or two lines If you do not want column headers for a column place the cursor on the relevant line in the Column header area or in the Line structure area and select Edit Column header Delete line If you require column headers for a line of your query place the cursor on the appropriate line in the Line structure area and select Edit Column header Insert line Additionally you can also specify column headers on the List Line Output Options screen You maintain column headers field by field If you do not want to use the header proposed by the InfoSet you can define a query specific header for each field The advantage of field by field maintenance is that column headers can always be updated automatically whenever the line structure changes The column header for one field can cover one or two lines Since the column header for each field is changed individually the area for column headers is not ready for input on the maintenance screens If you want to change a field header place the cursor on the relevant field in the Column header area and select Edit Column header gt Maintain You then see a screen where you can maintain the column header for the selected field Page header fheaders and column headers Display of all possible flight connections Standard header 3 Even with the column header for a field you can substitute the value of another field using amp field in the header However please
191. eries fonly with expartimport L Overwriting allowed only with importfupload copy Transportuser groups import option REPLACE Usergroups to T gt i0 Transport functional areas import option REPLACE Functional areas to roe ii Transport functional areas and queries Inport option REPLACE Functional areas to re Queries to Foe Import option queries REPLACE ii Transport queries import option REPLACE User groups to Fe Queries to re Dataset with imports B2OK901245 to T Delete after successful import 316 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Reading Transport Datasets When the import is finished the system outputs a detailed log of all the checks performed and all the changes made to the table AQLDB If you have selected the Delete after successful import parameter the system deletes the transport dataset from the table AQTDB after importing it if no error occurs You should use this parameter only if you are sure that you no longer need the transport dataset The following section describes other ways you can delete transport datasets April 2001 317 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Managing Transport Datasets Managing Transport Datasets You can use the functions Display and Delete in the transport tool to manage transport datasets in table AQTDB Whenever you choose the transport option Display all transport datasets contained in transport table AQTDB are displayed with their name w
192. erted into the list according to need The fields attributes remain the same as when they were deleted J The system empties the trash whenever you exit the program Be aware that example data is used when structuring the list The factual consistency of data in the layout mode is in contrast to data displayed at list execution not guaranteed April 2001 369 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Selecting Selection Fields Selecting Selection Fields You can choose what selection fields you want to work with in the Selection Fields column of the upper left hand window on your screen in the Query Painter Select those fields that you want displayed as selection criteria on your selection screen by placing a check in their checkbox Selection fields are displayed as input fields on selection screens before your report is executed Users can reduce the amount of data output in the report by entering values in these fields If for example you select Flight connection code you can specify in the program selection area that you only want to display flights with certain flight numbers Those selection fields mandated by your logical database or InfoSet are already selected 370 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE List Display Options List Display Options Click on the ruler in the window on the upper right of your screen to determine list attributes Several attributes may then be altered in the window on the lower left
193. ery simple model this logical database contains all the important aspects of logical databases Logical database F1S contains data for flight bookings The database contents are updated each time a booking is made Any evaluation of this database therefore always reflects the current state of flight bookings Structure of the Logical Database Logical database F1S contains three tables SPFLI Information about individual flight connections SFLIGHT Information about individual flights for each flight connection SBOOK Information about bookings for a flight These tables are arranged in a hierarchy as follows SPFLI SFLIGHT aa SBOOK For each record flight connection in SPFLI there are several records flights for each flight connection in SFLIGHT For each record in SFLIGHT the table SBOOK contains one record for each booking made Structure of Table SPFLI The table SPFLI contains information about individual flight connections A flight connection is identified by the airline carrier short name and a flight number code which together form the table key For each flight connection the table contains information about departure and destination city airport and time distance and flight duration A local currency is also specified for each flight connection This is the currency which the airline carrier uses for its invoices Structure of Table SFLIGHT The table SFLIGHT contains information about individual fli
194. es and appears before the additional fields and SAP tables For this reason the system proposes 0 as the sequence number On the screen for defining the code for record processing you can thus perform the same operations as when you define the GET GET LATE code see GET GET LATE Code Seite 262 s To ensure that query reports can be generated without problems it is important that it is clear which fields are accessed in every piece of code If some code contains ABAP statements that access certain fields implicitly then an ABAP FIELDS statement must also be used in the code to ensure that all fields used are explicitly named You can find an example of this and further information in Access Optimization in Queries Seite 342 284 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Functions for Managing User Groups Functions for Managing User Groups Within a team or department the problems you solve using SAP Query reports are fairly similar and involve the same InfoSets For this reason SAP Query has been designed to allow you to combine users with similar concerns together in user groups J The information is intended for system administrators The characteristics of a user group include e Grouping together users with similar tasks to perform Each member of a user group can execute any queries within that group However only those user group members possessing the required authorization can maintain the queries see SAP
195. es choose between an expanded format and a compressed format J A multiple line basic list is a list containing several lines with a different structure Suppose a basic list is defined with four lines The first three lines contain information about a single flight and the fourth line contains information about a booking In the expanded format of the basic list the flight information is followed by all the bookings for this flight The compressed format of the same list would contain the flight information but not the bookings The Expand basic list and Compress basic list functions allow you to switch between a full display and a compressed display You can completely display the information that belongs to lines of a compressed basic list using the menu path Edit Detailed view a In terms of the basic list in the above example choosing Detailed view for a specific flight would produce a details list for the flight containing all the relevant bookings By selecting Back you can return to the original list Compression may extend over several levels Whether and to what extent this is possible and which lines of a multiple line basic list are output in a compressed list depends on the structure of the logical database to which the query refers You cannot influence this when defining a query unless you modify the structure of individual lines g Compression can only be used on basic lists with numerous entries However a mul
196. es for passing data outlined above Each of these functions must be implemented using a function module with a defined interface Which and how many of the functions you want to make available to the user can be determined by using the maintenance component for the Additional function pool You call the additional function pool maintenance screen transaction SQ09 from the initial screens of both the InfoSet maintenance component and the user group maintenance component by using either the function Environment Additional function pool or its corresponding pushbutton When you call the additional function pool maintenance component a screen appears listing all of the functions already contained in the additional function pool For further information refer to the section on the Additional Function Pool Seite 130 You can also enter as many new functions or functions of your own to the Additional function pool as you like Each function that you want to call using the additional function pool must be 1 Implemented as a function module with a fixed interface 2 Entered in specific tables in the R 3 System 3 Released for use in the additional function pool activated g The interface required for function modules used in the additional function pool is the same interface as used in function module RSAQ_XINT_DISPLAY_BASIC LIST This function module is one of the functions for the additional function pool delivered by SAP Whenever you
197. ext field You can use different processes check tables fixed values and so on to automatically define texts to field values When using a field like this in a Query you can decide whether you want to use the value or the assigned text For further information see InfoSet Display Seite 18 During the InfoSet maintenance the data source of each field is inspected to see whether a text can be provided for a text field or not The result of this check is displayed as an icon in front of the field cx You can only use values for selection and output with these fields Gt A text can be defined automatically for every possible value of the field If a text field is transferred to a field group the InfoSet user can always use values and texts If a field like this is removed from a field group you can use neither the value nor the text This means that you cannot only transfer the text of the field to a field group for example You can use the technique of automatically providing texts for InfoSets that already exist To do this you have to choose nfoSet gt More functions gt Update Text fields for each InfoSet from the initial screen of the transaction SQO2 Texts exist for all possible fields after the InfoSet is regenerated Under some circumstances it may be that you do not require the automatic provision of texts In this case you can switch off the automatic text identification when you create the InfoSet in the first dialog box
198. f service tin days Organizational Assignment Company Code Personnel Area Employee Group Employee Subgroup LT B Personnel Numbers Firstname Lastnames 7100 Personnel Numbera 000 Personnel Number Q00 1 002 e pwd Reporting period Today 3 62 16 2000 Reporingset Unrestricted YE Curent hit list 2 JOU SO SOU G T a E i a i JOU T f G T E a a Gea A 1900 Activities The numbering represents the principle of reporting using InfoSet Query with object selection For detailed instructions see the specific sections 1 Selection fields and output fields are chosen from field groups 2 Values and selection options are entered for the selection fields or a reporting period is selected 56 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Overview of Functions 3 All ofthe objects that meet the selection criteria are selected for example persons 4 Output is formatted and output starts in this screen section if necessary 5 The required data is output to a full screen See also Selection Seite 58 Output Seite 66 April 2001 57 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Selection Selection Use When the selection is made the system determines which objects meet the specified selection criteria in the reporting period The result of the selection is a set of objects After the selection h
199. field ype C length 01 text flag for graphic FTYP type C length 01 ABAP type of field I LID type C length 03 D of the sub list ype N length 01 number of continuation line type N length 02 position of field NAMEINT KEY GTYPE SONLY SORT LPOS NUMBT ID CONT CURPOS TYP April 2001 337 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Enhancement SQUE0001 Private File indicates to which query sub list the field belongs The parameter values can be the same as for the LIST_ID parameter see above describes the position of the field in the sub list specified by the LID parameter The positions are counted consecutively from 1 for example 01 02 describes the number of the continuation line in which the field is output 0 1 This can occur with basic lists that collapse due to a too small list width LINE SIZE Field numbering as in FPOS is not affected since it is independent of the FCONT value Normally this field is not required for the Private file function FCURPOS describes the start position of the field in the list line if the field is numeric FTYP P I F Otherwise FCURPOS contains the value 000 Normally this field is not required for the Private file function FGRAF contains the value X if you use the value of the non numeric field as a help text for the graphic Normally this field is not required for the Private file function FTYP describes the ABAP type of the field and can accept the values
200. first need to define some local fields for this statistic 184 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Sorting Statistics 7 m Li LI L LI LI LI LJ LI Li LI LI LI HIE The field Year is a local field which you specify on the selection screen Its value determines the year for which quarterly sales figures are required April 2001 185 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Sorting Statistics Field definition Short name T Field description Year Heading Year Functional group Flights Attributes O Same attributes as field Textfield Mo of characters O Calculation field Number of digits Decimal places Date field Time field Symbol 5 icons Condition nputon selection screen Mandatory retrieves per flight flight date the total existing bookings Using the flight date you can thus determine to which quarter this total is to be assigned Furthermore only the quarters of a pregiven year should be determined according to the task A quarterly sales figure is therefore the same as the booking total if the flight data lies in the pregiven year and in the correct quarter As an example we can use the definition of the field for bookings in the 2nd quarter 186 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Sorting Statistics C Field definition d Short name Oe Field description Bookings for the 2nd quarter Heading nd quarter amp Y Functional group Flights Attributes
201. footer is unrestricted the total number of these lines must be smaller than the number of lines per page You can only check this partially in the QuickView definition since the number of lines per page may change at processing time for example when printing If this condition is violated at processing time the program is terminated April 2001 373 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG List Width Ruler List Width Ruler The ruler is located on the edge of your screen at the upper right in the Query Painter It is switched on in the standard You can hide or re display the ruler on demand by using the appropriate pushbutton B a Ruler All tools onio Header et Footer do Mode assignment ee Pa aa Ae ieee Wee cthe se cthes cs Glo ce stra a idee oe ee oe ee Cere T aoe To set list width proceed as follows e Place your cursor at the right end of the ruler Once the frame appears expand or contract it to the width you want Alternatively you may directly enter list width in characters in the List width field located in the lower left hand part of your screen g If you want to decrease list width so that it is smaller than the combined width of the fields on it overhanging fields are inserted in a new line If you want to frame your list select the checkbox List with frame g Your list must be framed if you want to use field separation 374 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE List Line Output O
202. for example the fields Flight searching the dialog box is still on Connections Flight Details or the screen You can continue the Percentage of Seats Occupied search by choosing W in the dialog PORTH box Display options Depending on the current settings choose either TE au or In the menu that appears select one of the display options Field groups Structure of logical database or Field catalog Display all certain fields Choose You can only use this function for of a field catalog To restrict the field catalog to fields the display option Field Catalog of a certain field group select one of the field groups in the dialog box that appears To display all the fields choose All fields April 2001 21 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Editing the InfoSet Display Technical names on off You can display the technical names of the fields in an additional column To do this in the context menu of the InfoSet display title choose Technical Names on off Display field properties You can display the properties such as data type and length of any field you want in an additional area of the screen Select the field you want Choose Display field properties in the context menu 22 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Selection Display Selection Display The query selections are displayed in the top right hand corner of InfoSet Query The following displays are possible e Editabl
203. ge mode you can activate and deactivate those functions available on the overview screen and determine the sequence of those functions that are active You activate a function by selecting the checkbox in the Active column and can deactivate it by deselecting the same checkbox Once a function is active the No column is ready for input You can enter sequence numbers whole numbers here AN Activating deactivating functions and determining their sequence on this screen is actually a technical process similar to Customizing settings No change request is made for these settings in the Change and Transport Organizer This also means that these settings have to be remade in every SAP system In order to enter a new function in the additional function pool choose Create on the overview screen A dialog box appears where you enter the function name long text and the name of its function module You may only enter the names of those function modules that have the right kind of interface Function modules may only be entered once in the additional function pool Once a function has been entered in the pool only its long text may be altered To do this select the function whose long text you want to change and choose Edit Change text The same dialog box is displayed that was displayed when you added the function to the function pool however now only the long text field is ready for input In order to delete a function from the additional fun
204. ght connection Id 2 Flight date Ticket price Local currency of airline Plane type Maximum capacity Occupied seats Total of current bookings Flight booking b HA Fields _UUUUUUSIOO e Field catalog Sy fad Be Field list fall fields selection Outout Airline carrier ID Flight connection Id Country key City of departure Airport of departure ca Cc im a Arrival city Destination airport Flight time Departure time Arrival time Distance Wass unit of distance kms r Flight type charter or schedu SPFLI PERIOD Airline carrier ID Flight connection Id AbD a JL OHOUOUUUUOUUOUBOOBOOO OOCOCOCOCOORAA COO OCO CLC C April 2001 19 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG InfoSet Display Every InfoSet field is indicated with an icon that tells you if field values have corresponding texts The following icons are displayed e You can only use values for selection and output with these fields You can use this field for selection as well as for output e FA text can be automatically determined for every possible value of the field When selecting a field like this for selection or for output you can decide whether you want to use the field value or the text that belongs to the value or both You can set the default by using the function Settings Seite 39 If you want to make a selection that is different to the default select the field and make the selecti
205. ghts for each flight connection A flight is identified by the flight connection airline carrier and flight number and the flight date which together form the table key For each flight the table contains information about the plane type and number of seats the price and some other compressed data about bookings already made The price of a flight is normally specified in the currency used at a flight connection s point of departure The data about bookings already made covers the number of bookings and the total amount taken Since individual bookings can be made in different currencies this total is always specified in the local currency of the airline carrier April 2001 349 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Logical Database F1S Structure of Table SBOOK The table SBOOK contains information about individual bookings A booking is identified by the flight connection airline carrier and flight number the flight date and a booking number which together form the table key For each booking the table contains information about the customer customer number business or private customer with or without invoice creation the booked seat class smoker the amount paid and the weight of the luggage The amount paid for the booking is specified in two currencies first in the currency in which payment was actually made and second in the local currency of the airline carrier Discounts that can be negotiated when a booking is m
206. gned to each field in a separate column The tree display makes it possible here as well we in the data source to expand and collapse to the section you want to see on the screen Creating and changing field groups is possible using special functions that can be found as pushbuttons above the field groups To select fields for field groups first select the fields you want with a single mouse click in the data source These fields can then be transferred using drag amp drop into the field group of your choice It is also possible to select the relevant field group with a single mouse click and call the function Add Fields to Field Groups Double clicking on a field in the data source or in the field group displays all the technical information for this field in the lower right part of the screen You can change long texts and headers as and when necessary here It is possible to mark every numerical field as one that cannot be summed When you call the functions ul Extras Jal Selection E Coding and Enhancements corresponding maintenance screens are shown in the right part of the screen With ES Field groups you can display field group maintenance again The following sections tell you about the options that are available to you when you use these functions 224 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Text Fields Text Fields Every data source field is indicated with an icon that tells you if it is a normal field or a t
207. guage Comparison Language Comparison Defining queries InfoSets and user groups involves entering a lot of text Some of this contributes to the internal organization of SAP Query while the rest is used in the generated ABAP programs A language comparison facility exists for all these text elements This means that for each text there is an equivalent text in one or more other languages The texts you see in your SAP R 3 System are usually displayed in the logon language You perform this language comparison with the component Language Comparison 80 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE SAP Query Authorizations SAP Query Authorizations End users system administrators and translators must all have appropriate authorizations to use SAP Query For example it would not make sense for end users to have the authorization to maintain InfoSets Also it can be desirable to set up authorizations within a user group in such a way that some end users can maintain and execute queries while others can only execute existing queries SAP Query has two means of assigning authorizations to individuals e User groups To be able to use the component Maintain Queries you must be a member of at least one user group In all other user groups maintenance may only be performed after your user name has been explicitly assigned to them This means that you can only access certain InfoSets e Authorizations You can also assign authoriza
208. h of these functions must be implemented using a function module with a defined interface Which and how many of the functions you want to make available to the user can be determined by using the maintenance component for the Additional function pool For further information refer to the section on Maintaining the Additional Function Pool Seite 301 The following functions are delivered in the Additional function pool 1 Crystal Reports Allows you to save a query that you have created as a file on your PC in Dbase format You can subsequently generate a Crystal Report from the query The report generated from your query can be formatted in numerous ways using the large number of analysis and visualization functions that are put at your disposal You can design the report s layout and include such things as a company logo or graphics You then save the report and can subsequently open the template you have created each time you call a query Note Field names are restricted to a maximum of 10 characters in Dbase format 2 InfoZoom This function allows you to connect the external PC tool InfoZoom for displaying reports and altering their layout You must also install InfoZoom on your frontend and make sure that the file name extension foc name extension for InfoZoom files is registered This function formats sublist data so that InfoZoom can read it and writes the data to a temporary folder on your PC This folder is created in the direct
209. have its own title since there can be several statistics You can specify the sequence in which you want to output the fields and whether they should be in ascending or descending order Totals are always calculated for numeric fields For this reason you can also determine average values the number of selected records summands and percentages sales per airline Detine statistic Field Mo St De 5u NS No Av Len Rnd Unit Text Airline carrier Id i E_E Total of current bookings 2 B Og pom ig To calculate average values and percentages you must sum over currency fields You must also convert the amounts to one currency the reference currency There are two reasons for this Firstly the individual currency amounts to be summed may be in several different currencies Secondly a statistic is only meaningful when the values in a column can be compared The same applies when using quantity fields in statistics April 2001 181 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Generating Statistics The reference currency for currency amount fields and the reference unit for quantity fields are defined for each currency amount field or quantity field On the screen for defining statistics or ranked lists you can define a reference currency or reference unit for each individual field You define the conversion date for currency amounts yourself when you execute a query by using the parameter Date of currency conversion on the selection screen
210. he Selected Set of Objects Seite 62 April 2001 59 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Make Selection Make Selection Prerequisites The object selection is switched on g If you start InfoSet Query from the SAP Easy Access menu an appropriate InfoSet is used automatically in the systems of several HR components for example the system for Personnel Administration Provided that you are assigned to the appropriate user group you can start creating queries immediately You can save the created queries but you cannot transport them using the Workbench Organizer If you want to start InfoSet Query in this way you must be assigned to the appropriate user group You can set up this assignment in SAP Query see Functions for Managing User Groups Seite 285 Procedure Before working with InfoSet Query for the first time read the Overview of Functions Seite 55 to get a basic idea of how InfoSet Query is used 1 Start InfoSet Query as described in the section Starting InfoSet Query Seite 16 This brings you to the InfoSet Query screen If you are assigned to a role that supports Reporting with InfoSet Query and you have started InfoSet Query from the role menu InfoSet Query starts with an InfoSet and a query This means you can start to determine a new query or to execute or edit the loaded query straight away If you are not assigned to a role and have started InfoSet Query from SAP Query or from a menu you have th
211. he counter number is always equal to the number of addends for that field The Counter option can also be selected for non numerical fields April 2001 173 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Changing Control Level Texts Changing Control Level Texts The previous examples demonstrated how you can design the layout of your list if you select the columns Text Total and Counter when you are on the Control levels screen e Text If you select the column Text a control level text containing the field contents is output at the start of the control level that is whenever the contents of the affected field change e Total If you select the column Total the sub total for all summed fields is output at the end of the control level Here again a control level text is also displayed This describes the control level and contains the contents of the control level field e Counting If you select the column Counter this displays the number the of times the selected fields appeared in that particular dataset at the end of the control level Here a text is displayed that describes the control level and contains the contents of the control level field In the examples so far always those texts available as standard for the query have been used as control level and sub total texts You can however change these texts When you leave the Control levels screen and continue with the sequence of query screens you reach a series of screens where you can defin
212. he fields on one line g This basic list is also known as a single line basic list Basic list with box Frame width Columns separated by Compressed display Define basic list Field Line Sequence Sort Total Counter From city 1 Destination Airline carrier Id Departure time 1 1 1 Flight connection Id 1 1 1 Arrival time e E eet ee ees ee ae ee cee E eee From_city Destination Air Flig Gepartur Arrival_ There are three variants of the Basic List Line Structure screen The lower part of the screen for each of these variants contains different information 1 The line structure of the basic list 152 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Defining the Line Structure If you make changes in the upper part of the screen these are reflected at once below that is after you press ENTER To display the complete list layout choose Query gt Layout display 2 The individual options 3 The field display By using one of the functions Settings gt With help texts Settings gt Without help texts or Query Line structure and then choosing the appropriate pushbutton on the screen you can switch between these three screens J All the screens for defining basic lists statistics and ranked lists have these three screen variants Navigation between the variants is always the same By selecting Settings gt Settings you can define which of the three variants you want to d
213. he list that those fields still missing will not be displayed in the list lf for example a basic list has been defined with two lines line 1 and 2 and a random number of line 2s can belong to line 1 you must distinguish between the following cases e Exactly one line 2 belongs to every line 1 found in the list In this case exactly one line is inserted in the internal table containing the values of both lines e Multiple line 2s belong to every line 1 found in the list In this case multiple lines are added to the internal table the fields found in line 1 repeat themselves and the fields from line 2 are new for each new table line e No line 2s whatsoever belong to every line 1 found in the list In this case exactly one line is added to the internal table in it the fields for line 2 are initial If a basic list contains more that two lines the process described above occurs at multiple levels In general all basic lists that do not retrieve their data from a logical database are interactive If a list s data comes from a logical database all fields used in the list my lie on one path in the database In other words those multiple line basic lists that process fields from parallel tables are not interactive 348 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Logical Database F1S Logical Database F1S The logical database F1S is used in this user guide to demonstrate the options available to users in SAP Query Although it is a v
214. he selected object type s infotypes are displayed on the last level e lf you use logical database PNP to create an InfoSet you can use the infotypes from Personnel Administration They are grouped together according to the current user group in Personnel Administration Furthermore all of the object types that can be related to the persons object are listed below Infotypes of related objects The next level in this tree outputs all of the relationships that can exist between the respective object type and the person object type The following relationships for example can exist between persons and qualifications fulfils has potential for interests and preferences and dislikes All of the selected object type s infotypes are displayed on the last level e lf you use logical database PAP to create an InfoSet you can use the infotypes from Recruitment and some infotypes from Personnel Administration 4 Choose the infotypes that are required in the InfoSet A field group is created in the InfoSet for each infotype that you select The name of the field groups corresponds to the name of the infotype or consists of the object name relationship name and infotype name for example qualification fulfils object 5 Choose This takes you to the Change Infoset lt nfoSet name gt screen You now have the option of creating field groups and assigning fields as required for non HR InfoSets Field groups that correspond to infotypes and
215. he selected user group 3 Select the InfoSet that you want to use for the query 4 Choose Result This takes you back to the InfoSet Query screen You can use the InfoSet to create queries 38 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Settings Settings Use With the settings you can determine e whether the data is displayed as a list basic list or aggregated before output statistics ranked lists and which output form is used e whether the query is started using a selection screen e which reference currency and which reference unit is used for statistics and ranked lists e how many data records are displayed in a ranked list e how data is exported to Crystal Reports e which default settings should apply for using fields with texts Prerequisites If you want to export the data to Crystal Reports you must have them installed on your local PC Activities 1 On the InfoSet Query screen choose Edit gt Settings You get to the dialog box Settings On the Output tabstrip you can determine the type of output list and the output format as well as whether the query is to be started via a selection screen Output Statsiranked list Crystal reports Default Valitext Type of output list Basit ien ssdaddiibiibiiibiabiabii Ue OL SAP List Viewer Start via selection screen Use selection conditions On the Statistics Ranked List tabstrip you can determine the reference currency for the con
216. helps you select a color Once you have chosen a color and applied it to a line you can undo this selection by choosing Line color once again J The colors available are described by terms which identify their use in SAP standard displays 382 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Totaling and Counting Totaling and Counting Totaling Whenever you create a list in the Query Painter all numeric fields are automatically totaled These totals are displayed at the end of the list All numeric fields are also placed in the Totaling fields toolbar To undo totaling for specific fields select the fields from the toolbar and drag them to the trash or drag the trash to them or to the corresponding total in your list layout If sort fields have been defined for your list subtotals are automatically displayed at the end of each control level If you want to undo subtotaling for a specific sort level select the trash can and drag it to the appropriate subtotal on the list layout display To suppress all subtotaling functions deselect the field Display totals in the Output Options for Control Levels Seite 390 If you are totaling a particular field the total is output in the same column as the field that is with the same output length For this reason the output length may be too short for the total and cause overflow ABAP identifies these overflows by placing an asterisk in front of the affected value when it is output To avoid o
217. her information refer to the following sections 306 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE General Transport Description General Transport Description Queries InfoSets and standard area user groups are usually stored in the client specific table AQLDB When transporting these objects however you use the transport table AQTDB which is not client specific You can transport objects either e from one client the source client to another client the target client within the same SAP System or e from one client the source client in one R 3 System the source system to another client the target client in another R 3 System the target system In both cases you use similar procedures For a graphical overview see Transporting Query Objects Seite 303 There are two options for performing transports The first of these involves using the transport table AQTDB and the transport actions Export and Import e You must first export the objects for transport from the table AQLDB to the transport table AQTDB This creates a transport request for the transport system that includes all entries created by the export from table AQTDB transport dataset The request covers all the entries from table AQTDB transport dataset generated by the export and has a name which corresponds to transport system conventions sysKnnnnnn The name of the transport request is given in the export log In the table AQTDB the transport data
218. hich contains all the fields of all the tables used in the join The links between the various tables used in the join are all specified separately These specify the exact combinations of records from the individual tables that become part of the result set J The result of a table join is also a flat table Therefore hierarchical relationships between tables cannot be analyzed using a table join This requires logical databases More detailed information about table joins you should refer to the online documentation for the ABAP SELECT statement If you want to allow the user of the query to run reports you should create an InfoSet for which you enter the name of the first table in the join in the Table field on the Title Database screen and select the Table join field The table must be entered in the ABAP Dictionary and must exist in the database For technical reasons the first table in a join cannot be changed later Choosing Continue takes you to the Tables in the join screen Other information needed for the table join can be entered here Joined tables Join conditions Lett Outer Inner Table ge Table SPFLI SPFLI SFLIGHT 5 SPLIGHT at Define condition All the tables to be included in the join are entered on the left hand side of this screen The type of link to be used between each pair of tables must be specified e inner join default setting A record is included in the result set for each rec
219. hich is the same as the name of the transport request and contents If you want to delete the transport datasets choose the transport action Delete and fill out the select option Transport request All transport datasets are then deleted according to this select option g In order to avoid unintentional deletions you cannot Delete unless a value has been entered for the select option Transport request A log is generated containing a list of those transport datasets that have been deleted 318 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Transporting Objects Between Query Areas Transporting Objects Between Query Areas Copying objects from one Query area to another is similar to transporting objects between different clients in a single system Thus you should go about copying objects between Query areas in much the same way as you would transport objects within the standard area In principle all objects may be copied to the other different Query area There are two transport options available on the initial screen of the Query transport tool that allow you to do this e Copy Global Area Standard Area e Copy Standard Area gt Global Area Both of these options are combinations made up of an export step and an import step The only difference being that no transport dataset is created in transport table AQTDB and no transport request is generated in the Change and Transport Organizer During import all of the usual che
220. hics menu If you mark the field as Define at runtime then you can specify the number of values to be displayed when the query is executed type of graphic text and color display or the number of values to be displayed Those options chosen on the graphics screen are used as defaults The option Define at runtime is always set to default every time a basic list statistic or ranked list is re defined April 2001 161 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Sorting Sorting Suppose you want to generate a list of flight connections sorted by Point of departure Destination and Departure time To do this you can use the existing query G1 Copy G1 and assign to it the name G2 You can now change the copy Enter a note to document the difference to G1 for example Sorted by point of departure Destination and Departure time You can select more field groups and fields The fields that have already been selected suffice for the directory however On the screen where the basic list line structure is defined you specify the sort sequence by entering it after the corresponding fields Point of departure 1 Destination 2 Departure time 3 in the column Sort m m m m o o o o T es a 6 Uc a a 6m WCU OEE This concludes the definition of a sorted list You can now execute the Query When you have entered your criteria on the selection screen you can display the list 162 April 2001 mF SAP AG T From city BERLIN
221. his proposal Then enter the name you want to give the copy and proceed with the copying process The copy is saved automatically J SAP Query always copies the generated version of an InfoSet If no generated version of the InfoSet exists you are requested to generate the InfoSet before copying April 2001 209 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Renaming InfoSets Renaming InfoSets To rename an InfoSet select the Rename function on the InfoSet maintenance initial screen In the dialog box enter the name of the InfoSet that you want to rename The InfoSet currently being processed is the InfoSet that the system proposes Enter the new name for the InfoSet in the lower entry field The following objects have to be locked before this function can be executed e User group catalog e InfoSet catalog e Query catalogs for user groups to which the InfoSet you are renaming is allocated e Queries with this InfoSet The function is executed only if you were able to set all these locks As long as these locks remain set other users may be prevented from continuing in their work Renaming an InfoSet can be very time consuming 210 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Deleting InfoSets Deleting InfoSets To delete an InfoSet enter the InfoSet name on the initial screen and choose the Delete function Confirm that you want to delete the InfoSet on the next screen that appears The system then checks to see if any queries e
222. his type of call up for InfoSet Query This only happens when you select a query in the maintenance transaction for queries and edit this with the Change function Type of Reporting Seite 48 Calling up InfoSet Query Seite 46 Rights to Access InfoSet Query Seite 47 April 2001 17 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG InfoSet Display InfoSet Display Use The current InfoSet is displayed in the top left hand corner of the InfoSet Query You can choose between three display options e Overview tree of the InfoSet with its field groups default setting In addition to the InfoSet field groups the additional field group Selection fields from InfoSet is automatically displayed This contains the fields that were defined as selection fields in the InfoSet or in the logical database wla Field group Fields Selection Output b O Selection fields from InfoSet _ Flight schedule SJ Flight table Airline carrier ID Flight connection Id 2 Flight date Ticket price Local currency of airline Plane type Maximum capacity Occupied seats Total of current bookings Flight booking re J I E COOS LCC e Structure of the logical database 18 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE InfoSet Display S SH Jake Logical database structure selection Output b LJ Selection fields from InfoSet j E _ Flight schedule 2 J gt H Fields _ Flight demo table v fi Fields Airline carrier ID Fli
223. hould always set the indicator Skip selection screen Result The InfoSet Query is available as a menu entry for the role The available InfoSets are determined using the user group assigned to the role Using the other report parameters you determined the specifications used to start the query April 2001 51 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG HR in InfoSet Query HR in InfoSet Query Purpose You can use InfoSet Query to report on data from Human Resources HR by using InfoSets based on HR logical databases PNP PCH PAP InfoSet Query is used in HR to create reports to meet requirements that are not satisfied by standard reports By selecting selection fields and output fields you can access data stored anywhere within the Human Resources System You do not require programming skills to create reports using InfoSet Query InfoSet Query supports two types of reporting e For ad hoc reporting e For query development InfoSet Query has been integrated with HR information systems to enable you to perform ad hoc reporting that is you can create and save queries in the standard query area However there is no transport link to the Workbench Organizer In this context InfoSet Query is known in HR as Ad Hoc Query There are two ways of using InfoSet Query in HR e With object selection Before data is output a set of objects is selected for which you can output data as required You can edit the selected set of objects before outp
224. however you should be aware of the following special features e f you define the InfoSet without a logical database you cannot make any assignments to a database table e The sequence you specify for sections of code involving additional fields additional structures and additional tables is important When defining an InfoSet without a logical database it obviously makes no sense to specify code for the GET and GET LATE events of a logical database table Instead you specify code for record processing This option is described in the section Special Features Seite 282 278 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Retrieving Data with Programs Retrieving Data with Programs If you want to make evaluations for datasets but SAP Query automatic data retrieval is not sufficient for the task create an InfoSet by selecting the field Data Retrieval with Program in the Title and Database screen then specify a program name and the name of a structure This structure must reflect the record structure of the dataset you want to evaluate If you use the component Maintain Queries to create a query for this InfoSet SAP Query uses the report as a model when generating the query report the model report itself thus remains unchanged Before generating the InfoSet for the first time you must create the model report yourself in the ABAP editor The model report has to be syntactically correct and have the same definition for fixed point ar
225. i FRA FRANKFURT JFK MEW YORK 11 29 1999 DE 10 10 23 456 12 02 1999 OG 10 10 175 664 12 09 1999 DE 10 10 01 070 12 29 1999 DE 10 10 0 12 41 1999 OC 10 10 291 266 Total Flight ID 400 Drd 25r Number Flight ID 0400 z 0402 FRA FRANKFURT JFK MEW YORK 11 19 1999 De 10 10 11 22 1999 De 10 10 11 29 1999 De 10 10 12 19 1999 De 10 10 12 21 1999 De 10 10 Total Flight ID 0402 Number Flight ID 0402 z Total Airline LH Total number Airline LH 10 386 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Screen Templates Screen Templates 1 Screen templates allow you to insert texts in your lists To insert descriptive texts in your lists proceed as follows Select the field you want to create a screen template for in the window on the upper right 2 Increase the field s display length in lower left hand window so that the number of characters you want to insert fits into the field J Most of the time it will make sense reserve the field s output length for those values that are to be replaced and to increase the field s output length by the number of characters needed to accommodate the descriptive text 3 Depress your right mouse button 4 Choose Field template from the context menu that appears The line is now ready for input and an underscore has been inserted below The length of the underscore indicates the output length of the field that is the number of characters reserved for field valu
226. i e output lines you want the ranked list to have The proposed value here is always 10 g Entries in ranked lists with the same value for the ranked list criterion are always given the same ranked list number first column The ranked list number is only displayed at the first entry In addition more rankings may be displayed than are defined in the ranked list definition This is the case when entries with the same ranked list criterion values occur at the end of the ranked list Here all entries found to fulfill this same criterion are displayed 192 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Creating Ranked Lists Subsequently you must define which fields are to be output and in what order To do this enter sequence numbers in the first column You select one of these fields as the ranked list criterion In our example it is the field Free seats The ranked list criterion is the sort criterion of the ranked list The default sort sequence for the sort criterion is descending order but ascending order is sometimes necessary This would apply for example to vendor sales figures which are stored as negative amounts In such cases you can specify ascending order for the ranked list criterion by selecting the column Asc You can also specify an output length and a rounding factor As with statistics currency fields and quantity fields require you to specify a reference currency or a reference unit which is used to convert all th
227. ial dataset you must specify a file name The selection button Sequential dataset is shown when you choose the pushbutton Further options With the last two options also enter the name of a structure listed in the ABAP Dictionary This structure must reflect the record structure of the dataset you want to evaluate J The structure must be defined before you can use it For further information about creating structures in the ABAP Dictionary refer to the ABAP Dictionary documentation April 2001 271 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Graphical Table Join Definition Graphical Table Join Definition If several tables are all linked within a SELECT statement this is known as a join The result set is a table each of the lines of which contains all the fields of all the tables used in the join The links between the various tables used in the join are all specified separately These specify the exact combinations of records from the individual tables that become part of the result set J The result of a table join is also a flat table Therefore hierarchical relationships between tables cannot be analyzed using a table join This requires logical databases For more detailed information about table joins you should refer to the online documentation for the ABAP SELECT statement You can also define table joins in a graphic design mode if certain technical software requirements have been fulfilled The system then simulates the join
228. ial values Therefore there is a special test available for queries If a query returns incorrect results and the suspected cause is an incomplete reference list then a query report can be generated without access optimization This is done by calling the Extras Optimization on off function on the Title Format screen of the query maintenance component After this function has been called the first time a check box appears on the screen and is checked This means that access optimization is no longer active for this query All fields of all April 2001 343 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Access Optimization in Queries tables are then read The access optimization can be reactivated either by calling the Extras gt Optimization on off function again or by deselecting the check box The access optimization should be deactivated only for test purposes If the query works correctly when the access optimization is deactivated then the InfoSet must be investigated and corrected so that a complete reference list gets generated see above If the query does not work correctly even with the access optimization deactivated then the problem is being caused by something else Following a test without access optimization and any necessary processing of the InfoSet you should always switch access optimization on again If you do not do this you will see a considerable drop in performance 344 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Inf
229. ible with nodes of type Data type since this is only allowed with Dictionary types Because of this ABAP Query cannot recognize values with units currency sums or quantities nor can it evaluate them accordingly within these nodes April 2001 347 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Interactive Multiple Line Basic Lists Interactive Multiple Line Basic Lists Up to Release 4 6A you may only use SAP Query s interactive functions EXCEL table display display as an interactive list graphics etc with single line basic lists statistics and ranked lists From Release 4 6A almost all multiple line basic lists are interactive This means that the system treats them as single line lists and allows you to use them in conjunction with all of the functions listed above This also allows you to arrange direct interactions that is to directly call one of these interactive functions without having to display the list first In order for multiple line basic lists to be interactive the data presented in the list must be entered into a flat internal table This table s line structure is determined by attaching all fields of all lines from the basic list one to the next one right after the other Each time that a list line is output the fields from that list line are transferred to their corresponding fields in the table line New lines are only ever added to the internal tables when all fields within a table line are filled or when it is apparent in t
230. ich query has been processed since the structure of the name is always as follows Aqmmb bq q client or ZZ in the global area oo usergroup name In terms of our example the name of the report is therefore LIST_ID parameter The LIST _ID parameter contains a three character ID which specifies the data table passed Each list generated by a query can comprise several sub lists a basic list several statistics and April 2001 335 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Enhancement SQUE0001 Private File several ranked lists The data table DATATAB transferred to the function module contains only the data for one sub list respectively The description table LISTDESC however always contains the description for the fields of all sublists The possible parameter values are GOO if DATATAB contains the data of the basic list TXx if DATATAB contains the data of the statistic xx 01 02 Rxx if DATATAB contains the data of the ranked list xx 01 02 The LIST_ID parameter thus has two functions Firstly it allows you to determine the sub list type involved Secondly you can define the relevant entries in the description table In the current example if the data of the basic list is transferred the parameter LIST_ID contains the value GOO If the statistics data is transferred then the value is T01 If the ranked list data is transferred then the parameter contains the value RO1 LISTTEXT paramete
231. identify their purpose according to the SAP standard You can only change the color for a line with the possible entries key This shows you the color palette from which you can choose a new format If you select the column Header the system makes column headers available for this line These headers are displayed in a later screen You can change the headers here too In order to allow for better layout in basic lists using both diagonal and vertical lines the new options Slash before after and Columns with have been added The options Slash before and Slash after can be set for each line and determine where a diagonal line is inserted when it is displayed This function can only be used in conjunction with the Basic list with border frame option on the Basic list line structure screen See Defining the Line Structure Seite 152 This option is activated automatically whenever the options Slash before and Slash after are selected The option Columns with allows you to determine whether or not the various columns of a particular row should be separated by vertical lines This option can only be used in conjunction with the Column separation with option on the Basic list line structure screen If this option is not activated then all Columns with options are set to inactive and cannot be reactivated If this option is activated then all Columns with options are initially active and can be individually deactivated You can also spec
232. ield in the right table control and transfer it to the table control on the left using the arrow key Selection criteria for InfoSets or logical databases are already inserted in the left table control for you 364 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Example Example You want to create a list in basis mode that displays information about airline ticket sales for specific airlines This list should evaluate the data at hand and be displayed in the ABAP List Viewer Proceed as follows 1 First create a QuickView with logical database F1S as its data source Further information can be found under Creating QuickViews Seite 355 2 Choose the following fields for your QuickView Lines wrap automatically and are only relevant in layout mode 3 Sort your list according to the fields Flight connection ID and Total of current bookings To do so choose the tab Sort sequence and transfer these two fields into the table control on the left E E a E A Ce Ce ae E e rr EE 4 Enter ABAP List Viewer in the Display as field located above the tab by using the possible entries pushbutton 5 Choose Execute 6 Enter the name of the airline carrier you want to use in the Airline carrier field on your selection screen A list similar to the following one appears April 2001 365 SAP Query BC SRV QUE Example 366 TTI AN TF No From cty Uest Booking total Curr LHJO400 F
233. ields used are explicitly named You can find an example of this and further information in Access Optimization in Queries Seite 342 g If you want to assign the code to a different logical database table you must delete the code and then redefine it 262 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE TOP OF PAGE Code TOP OF PAGE Code The TOP OF PAGE code is copied into every generated report and appears at TOP OF PAGE just before the instructions for output of the page header If this code includes WRITE statements then the output will appear in the list before the page header that is created by the query If the list is printed with a standard page header then the output appears between the standard page header and the page header created by the query You should note that these additions to the output cannot be displayed by the layout display in the query maintenance component i When outputting using the SAP List Viewer the code at TOP OF PAGE has no significance The TOP OF PAGE code is maintained by selecting the symbol Code Choose TOP OF PAGE using the F4 help Any ABAP statements may be used in the code Any data objects may be accessed However it is better to restrict to the following objects e Parameters from the InfoSet and the logical database e Selection criteria for the InfoSet and the logical database e global data from the DATA code Fields in logical database tables or additional tables and additional fie
234. ify whether you want to output blank lines before or after a line This option and others are described in more detail later In our example the output format List line has been chosen and Header selected If you now continue through the normal sequence of screens you next see a screen where you can define output options for individual fields April 2001 155 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Defining Output Options for Each Field Defining Output Options for Each Field On the Field Output Options screen you can define output options for individual fields This allows you to change the layout of your list radically Length Pos Rnd Unit Format Trip Field Std ev Se lt From city 20 0 Line color LJ Destination 20 20 Line color Lig Airline carrier Id 304 Line color IEL Flight connection Id 4 Line color Departure time 30 Line color IEL Arrival time o 5 Line color L uu Beside each field name SAP Query displays the standard output length of a field If you wish to modify this enter the new output length in the column New Increasing the output length may be particularly important if you are summing over a field and the output length required by the total is greater than that of the individual field In the column Pos you can specify an explicit output position for a field To determine the correct position use the ruler provided below in the part of the screen showing the line structure In the column Unit you can specify
235. ign the relevant fields from a linked structure to a field group These fields can only be viewed by the end user in the InfoSet and be used for defining queries after you have completed this assignment 248 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Deleting the Assignment of Additional Structures Deleting the Assignment of Additional Structures If you want to delete an additional structure you must first call the additional information screen for the corresponding database table In this context deleting an additional structure means removing the assignment to a data source table To do this place the cursor on the structure and choose Delete You can only delete if the fields of the structure are not used in a Query That is always the case where fields of the structure have not yet been included in any field groups of the InfoSet However the system rejects any attempt to delete a structure that has already been used in Queries as long as those Queries still exist You can determine whether and in which queries a table field is used To do this place the cursor on a structure field and choose Environment Directories Queries for field or choose Queries for field in the lower right hand box Change the Queries so that the additional structure fields are no longer used April 2001 249 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Creating Extra Selection Fields Creating Extra Selection Fields All queries have a selection screen
236. in Table joins must be defined before beginning with QuickView construction You define joins using a control containing graphical representations of the tables you are joining and of existing relationships between them Further information is found under Graphical Table Join Definition Seite 272 356 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Executing QuickViews Executing QuickViews To execute a QuickView online select Execute or Execute with variant If you select Execute with variant you see a dialog box where you can enter the variant name g Variants are blocks of selection criteria that have been saved in the system If you specify a variant when starting a QuickView the system uses the values in the variant as the QuickView s selection criteria on the selection screen that appears You enter variants on the selection screen and save them under any name For each QuickView you can create any number of variants To create a variant select Goto gt Maintain variants You can find information about variant maintenance under Help gt Application help The system starts the QuickView and displays the selection screen Here you may enter selection criteria just as if you were starting a report Below is an example of a selection screen Frogram selections Output format SAP List Viewer O ABAF list O Display as table O Graphics O Word processing O ABC analysis O Spreadsheet O Executive Info System Els O Privat
237. in internal processing terms the fixed area of a list is defined for each page Within a page the fixed area cannot vary from line to line SAP Query uses the key column specifications to calculate a maximum character position up to which you can go when scrolling horizontally in the visible area of the screen With multiple line basic lists it is possible that only part of a field belongs to the fixed area of a page 156 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Defining Output Options for Each Field You can define special output templates for individual fields This is demonstrated in a later example The lt gt 0 option allows you to suppress the output of numeric fields containing 0 With non numeric fields character strings leading zeros are not displayed On the next screen you can change the headers April 2001 157 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Changing Headers Changing Headers On the Basic List Header screen you can define the page header and the page footer for the pages of the basic list Page header headers and column headers Display of all possible flight connections Line structure o icon e Page footer a This screen shows the general structure of the basic list It contains the header line page header the line structure and the footer line page footer The header lines include fixed headers and column headers Column headers are generated for lines for which you selected the co
238. in statistics and ranked lists number of records read percentage of total average value position in sequence e Calling from the table display 124 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE ABC Analysis Select the column whose values are to be used as key figures All non numeric values to the left of the key figure are regarded as characteristics This is especially important when the analysis is called from the table display since columns can moved around in this display and it is therefore possible to change the number of values regarded as characteristics When the ABC Analysis is first called a dialog window appears The sort order for the key figure i e ascending or descending and the analysis strategy to be employed have to be specified in this window This window also contains the names of the fields which are to be used for the key figure and the characteristics The analysis strategy is defined in two steps 1 Select the strategy required using a selection button see above 2 Supply the other information required to implement the chosen strategy percentages boundary values or numbers of data records as required in the strategy When specifying percentages or absolute numbers of data records you only need to supply two values since the third value will be calculated from the first two If the key figure is a currency field or quantity field then a check is made in single line basic lists that the currencies
239. including the relationships between its individual tables Ga Check By Inserttable Delete table ff Alias table Ned Reference field B Field documentation Airline carrier l Eh Flight connectio h Flight date FLD Airfare PRICE Local currency Plane type PL ha SPFLI x Airline carrier Eh Flight connection Country key C Airline carrier l E Flight connectio E Flight date FLD E Booking PLATE G4 Customer numb Business orivat enobor Ooh City of departur Airport of depa Country key C See ieod ersa rr IT Table joins must already be defined before you maintain InfoSets and QuickViews With InfoSets you can switch off graphical join definition under Settings gt Settings and create joins using the procedures described in Classical Table Join Definition Seite 274 instead g If certain technical software requirements are fulfilled graphical join definition always appears as the standard setting The following functions are available on the Join Definition screen Note Those functions available in pushbutton form are written in italics 272 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Graphical Table Join Definition Insert table Enter the name of the table you want to insert in the dialog box The table is then displayed in a window that is the table fields and their long texts are displayed Key fields are marked with a relevant icon
240. indicates how many records of background memory file AQDB are occupied by the saved lists of this query Each record contains about 2900 bytes April 2001 205 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Saved Lists Directory Saved Lists Directory After calling the Goto gt List directory function in the initial screen of the InfoSet maintenance component an overview is displayed showing the total number of records per user group that are occupied by saved lists belonging to the queries of this user group Each record contains about 2900 bytes User group Records for saved lists Master data Materials Management Local Personnel planning A user group can be selected for closer examination from this overview You will then see another overview which shows the total number of records containing saved lists for each query in the user group From this overview a specific query can then be selected for closer examination The individual saved lists are displayed together with their creation date and time long text and the number of data records used This is in fact the same screen as that displayed when the Goto Saved lists function is called for a specific query in the Query maintenance component It is also possible to delete a list from this screen You can find further information on working with lists in Saving and Redisplaying Lists Seite 113 206 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Maintaining InfoSets Maintaini
241. ine 2 In this case you must enter 2 in field Display only in connection with line n in the output options for line 1 You can now generate a list containing only those flight connections for which flights exist April 2001 379 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Field Display Options Field Display Options A field s display options are displayed in the lower left hand window whenever you select a particular field These options include a long text and the object s technical name as well as its attributes in the list display line display position etc You can change a field s attributes directly be making entries in this window Choose Apply to adopt new values More information about these and other display possibilities can be found in the following sections Positioning and Sizing Seite 381 Colors Seite 382 Totaling and Counting Fields Seite 383 screen Templates Seite 387 Currency Fields and Quantity Fields Seite 388 Further Options Seite 389 380 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Positioning and Sizing Positioning and Sizing Moving fields To change a field s position proceed as follows 1 Select the field 2 Drag the field to the new position you want it at keeping the left mouse button depressed Insert mode is the standard Query Painter setting this means that whenever you position a field between to others the system automatically makes room for the new field without overwriting any exist
242. ine carrier short code which is stored in all of the logical database tables Table SAIRPORT This table contains additional information about airports particularly a long text The table key is the airport short code These short codes for airports occur in the table SPFLI twice for each record for departure airport and destination airport Table SAPLANE This table contains the technical data of a plane such as number of seats fuel capacity fuel consumption dimensions manufacturer and the like The table key is the plane type short code This short code occurs in the table SFLIGHT for each record It indicates which aircraft is used on particular flight Table SCUSTOM This table contains data about the customer such as name address telephone number and other information The table key is the customer number Each record in SBOOK contains the number of the customer who made the booking 350 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Logical Database F1S April 2001 351 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG QuickViewer QuickViewer Purpose The QuickViewer allows you to define reports without having to program yourself The QuickViewer is especially useful for new users and occasional use Integration QuickViewer is a tool for generating reports SAP Query offers the user a whole range of options for defining reports SAP Query also supports different kinds of reports such as basic lists statistics and ranked lis
243. ine groups 196 April 2001 EF SAP AG April 2001 SAP Query BC SRV QUE Line Groups g The assignment of lines to line groups must be complete This means that you must either assign all lines or to line groups or assign none at all In the latter case however all lines are considered as belonging to a line group 197 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Evaluations According to a Company s Organizational Structure Evaluations According to a Company s Organizational Structure To generate evaluations of HR master data according to a company s organizational structure in the HR Planning area you must use an InfoSet from the database PCH This contains info types from HR master data and HR Planning for example 0001 0007 and 1000 1002 To clarify the structure the HR Planning application area includes additional fields for the info type Object name These fields use periods to show the object levels You want to create a query that gives a list of employee addresses per organizational unit Select the relevant fields and arrange as follows List line output options Line Color Header Ref Slash Blank line Columns Page BEN Mo Gr line Hef To Het Aft with header Page 1 1 Listline Oo E 2 2 Listline m E 3 3 Listline O O 4 3 E CJ List line ee ee eee eee ee ee Pere Ubject ID With Ley Ubject_ Abbreviation W1 Ubject_Name_With_Level Display First Name House Number and Street Postal Cod City AnA
244. information on the objects selected see Output Seite 66 April 2001 61 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Edit Selected Set of Objects Edit Selected Set of Objects Use You can display a hit list which you have generated with InfoSet Query in a list You can delete objects from this list and execute a detail display function for individual objects If you select a set of persons you branch to HR master data If you select different objects you branch to detail maintenance for Personnel Planning If you remove objects from the set they are not included in output The same editing options are available for all other sets of objects that you can use in InfoSet Query such as the reporting set and the set of objects for set operations Prerequisites A set of objects exists Procedure 1 Choose for the set that you want to display This takes you to the list of objects 2 Tobranch to HR master data select a person and choose HR master data this is only possible if you select a person To branch to detail maintenance select an object and choose Detail maintenance only if you selected objects from Personnel Planning 3 To delete an object from the list because you do not want it to be included in the following report for example select the object and choose i 4 To accept changes choose W To cancel changes choose 2 Result You go back to the InfoSet Query screen If you deleted objects the set of objects
245. ing fields Overwrite mode can be switched on at will Edit gt Overwrite Fields overlap in overwrite mode and a corresponding warning is displayed in the window at lower right Use the Order fields left justified command in the context menu right mouse button to display all overlapping fields so that you can see them If you want to move a field within a line select the field and enter a number in the field Output position in the lower left window The line will be displayed at this position Use the ruler to help you position your fields Changing the Output Length of a Field To change a field s output length proceed as follows 1 Select the field 2 Place your cursor on the right edge of the field Change the display length of the field by dragging the edge of the field to the length you desire You may also enter a value in the appropriate field in the lower left window on your screen to determine the output length of a field g Increasing the output length may be particularly important if you are totaling a field and the output length required by the total is greater than that of the individual fields themselves April 2001 381 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Colors Colors Use the Colors toolbar to select a color and drag it to a field you want to highlight Or select the field using your mouse and choose a color from the List field color window in the lower left hand corner of your screen Possible entries help
246. ing the query should be complete or compressed AN If you use this option you specify that you want to enable a compressed display This is then determined by SAP Query itself Select the options Basic list with box and Columns separated by You can now execute the query by selecting Execute You then see the selection screen and get the following list after entering your selection criteria The Back function returns you to the screen where you started the query i When you execute the query from a definition screen as explained above the query definition is not saved This allows you to test the list which will be generated by the specifications you have already entered To save the query definition choose Save April 2001 153 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Defining the Line Structure If you now continue through the normal sequence of screens you next see a screen where you can define output options for the lines of the basic list 154 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Defining Output Options for Each Line Defining Output Options for Each Line On the List Line Output Options screen you can define output options for each line List line output options Line Color Header Ret Slash Blank line Columns Page BEU line Bef Ta Hef Att with header Page 1 List line The column Color allows you to define an output format for each line These output formats colors are described by terms which
247. ing the two symbols Pay attention to the following guidelines e InfoSet names can take the form prefix InfoSet The entire name of the InfoSet including prefix can contain up to 24 characters April 2001 297 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Query Areas e User group names can take the form prefix user_group The entire name of the user group including prefix can contain up to 12 characters e Query names take the form query Query names have no prefix of their own instead they take the prefix of their user group A query name can contain up to 14 characters e Prefixes may only be used with InfoSets and user groups from the global area The Workbench Organizer checks to see if prefixes are used correctly The individual query object maintenance transactions check the name syntax described above You can only work using name prefixes with query objects in the global query area This is significant because it is in this area that query objects from SAP are inserted at PUT if necessary All query objects delivered by SAP have the prefix SAPQUERY which has been reserved for them i When using prefixes in the global area ensure that objects whose names begin with a prefix belong to the development class with the same prefix The Workbench Organizer checks to see if this condition has been fulfilled When creating queries for a user group whose prefix belongs to SAP a business partner or another R 3 customer you mu
248. ion this node type allows you to include a Dictionary structure in a logical database numerous times under different aliases From Release 4 5A you can define complex types meaning nested structures and table types in the Dictionary This node type allows you to use nodes with this kind of complex Dictionary type 3 Type C nodes complex data objects called type Data type from 4 5A These types of nodes refer to an arbitrary number of complex types that are defined in a type pool From Release 4 5A types of this sort can be better represented using complex ABAP Dictionary types It is therefore no longer recommended that you use them in logical databases as this leads to certain disadvantages in ABAP Query When defining InfoSets in Releases 4 0A and 4 0B you may only use those logical databases containing type Database table type T nodes From Release 4 5A logical databases containing both other types of nodes can also be used There are however some restrictions to be taken into account When using nodes with complex types Dictionary type or Data type ABAP Query only allows you to evaluate those fields that can be addressed directly from the highest level of the type If the complex type in question contains a table the individual components that the table is made up of cannot be addressed This is demonstrated in the following example Given The following kind of complex type ABAP Notation is chosen This kind of type could also
249. ion errors since quantities are not easy to convert from one to the other At the end of the query list there is an overview of all the conversions which have been performed In the case of conversion errors the table also indicates in which statistic and in which field the error occurred Other possible causes of error are no exchange rate found with currency amounts unknown unit with quantities dimension with quantities no conversion possible In the statistic itself values which cause a conversion error are highlighted April 2001 189 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Defining Ranked Lists Defining Ranked Lists This section describes how ranked lists are used and how the can be created 190 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE What are Ranked Lists What are Ranked Lists In the last section you familiarized yourself with statistics With statistics numerical values for example sales belonging to particular key terms for example an airline carrier or a charter flight are summed The result is displayed in a table and thus returns an overview of the distribution of numeric values across the individual key terms Ranked lists are special types of statistics Here numeric values are also summed for key terms and displayed in a table Sorting always takes place using a numerical value This value is described as a ranked list criterion Additionally only a certain number of items are output
250. ion systems either goes straight to the assigned InfoSet in the initial screen of InfoSet Query or can choose between several assigned InfoSets In this context InfoSet Query is known in this type of call up as Ad Hoc Query Procedure Starting from SAP Query You are assigned to a minimum of one user group to which in turn a minimum of one InfoSet is assigned 1 Inthe SAP Easy Access menu choose Tools ABAP Workbench gt Utilities gt SAP Query Queries You get to the initial screen of the maintenance transaction for maintaining queries in SAP Query 2 Tostart InfoSet Query with a query select a query 3 Choose InfoSet Query InfoSet Query is called If you are starting InfoSet Query for the first time since logging on the system the dialog box for selecting InfoSets is displayed Here select a user group and an InfoSet If you have already used InfoSet Query after logging on the user group and the InfoSet that were used last are displayed If you have selected a query this is used as a template If you have called InfoSet Query from the standard area you have the opportunity to use Ad hoc Reporting If you have called InfoSet Query from the global area you can develop queries If you require further information see Type of Reporting Seite 48 16 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE See also Starting InfoSet Query g Please note that the selected query is not locked when you use t
251. is executed If you started it by choosing i the results list is displayed in the lower part of the screen If you started it by choosing E Output the results list is displayed in full screen April 2001 31 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Creating New Queries g The default output works as follows no selection screen is displayed and the specified selections are taken into account when outputting You can however change these standard settings You can find more information under Settings Seite 39 You can save the query if you are authorized to do so You can find more information under Saving Queries Seite 35 Type of Reporting Seite 48 and Rights to Access InfoSet Query Seite 47 32 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Loading Queries Loading Queries Use InfoSet Query enables you to access saved queries Procedure 1 Choose E This takes you to the Open Query dialog box It contains a list of all queries and variants that are assigned to the current user group 2 Ifyou want to load a query that was created under a different user group change the user group 3 Select the required query 4 Choose Result The query is opened You can now execute the query You can also change and save the query as required If you want to overwrite the original version choose Query gt Save or cl If you want to assign a new name to the changed version choose Query gt Save as J
252. is mode with standard layout or may be edited using drag and drop and the other toolbox functions available in WYSIWYG mode Reports created using the QuickViewer may also be passed to external programs Excel for example 352 April 2001 mF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Functions for Managing QuickViews Functions for Managing QuickViews Call the QuickViewer using the menu path System gt Services gt QuickViewer Before you can execute one of the following functions you must choose a QuickView by either selecting it from the table control on your initial screen or entering its name in the appropriate input field Function Descriptors SSS S Display E Description TE Copy QuickView gt More functions gt Adjust April 2001 Displays the QuickView definition details All screens are displayed in the same manner as if the QuickView were being changed however no new entries can be made You receive an overview containing general information about a QuickView and options This includes QuickView title Author and last person to make changes Remarks specific to that QuickView Origin of the selected data Saved lists Additional selections Choose a name for the QuickView in the dialog box and confirm your entry Choose another name for the QuickView in the dialog box and confirm your entry Deletes the QuickView after asking you to confirm that this is what you want to do Adjusts differences
253. is reduced by the corresponding number 62 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Restrict the Reporting Set Restrict the Reporting Set Use Restrict the reporting set if you only want to report on a specific set of objects such as a specific group of persons g In addition to the options described here your system can include other customer defined restriction options If you require further information on the restriction options for the reporting set access Customizing for the Human Resources Information System and see Selection IDs Extern Define Selection IDs Extern and Define Groupings Extern Procedure Restriction Using Organizational Structure You use an InfoSet from Personnel Administration that is an InfoSet based on logical database PNP 1 Under Restrict reporting set by choose the Organizational structure entry 2 To access the organizational structure click on the Organizational structure entry 3 Select the required organizational unit s You can select one or more organizational units entire branches of an organizational structure or a complete organizational structure 4 Confirm by choosing ve The persons who belong to the selected organizational units are transferred as the reporting set The number of persons is displayed in the Reporting set field g If you make your selection by using the organizational structure the system selects the persons who belong to the selected
254. isplay first when calling a screen Normally the screen containing the line structure is always displayed first There are two additional options for improving the layout of basic lists e Basic list with box Here the basic list appears in a box When defining the line width you must remember that each line requires two extra characters for the box When you leave the Frame width input field blank the system only frames the part of the basic list actually used Otherwise you may input the width of frame you desire here If the width you enter is too big or too small the system automatically corrects your entry to reflect the next acceptable value e Columns separated by With this option a vertical bar is output after each field It ensures that indented lines for example for sub totals are framed and that no lines are left open With multiple line basic lists different lines usually have a different structure so that no straight vertical lines are created when the Column separation with option is selected You can deselect the Columns with option on the List Line Output Options screen Further information can be found under List Line Output Options Seite 155 The section Interactive List Display Functions Seite 109 describes how you can switch between a complete display and a compressed display with multiple line basic lists The Compressed display option allows you to define whether the first list to be displayed when start
255. it is possible for inconsistencies to crop up in the target system s Query datasets A typical inconsistency of this sort would be transporting a Query whose corresponding InfoSet does not exist in the target system Therefore when transporting Query objects in the global area it is important to check and see if all current dependent objects already exist in the target system If this is not the case then these objects must be transported as well g Use the menu option Goto gt More functions gt Consistency Check in the InfoSet maintenance component to check Query datasets in the target system for consistency after transport You can choose which objects to check and a log is generated containing a list of any inconsistencies discovered If inconsistencies are discovered the action you take to eliminate them depends on the type of inconsistency Some inconsistencies must be eliminated in the system for example if users appear in a user group that no longer has a user master record Other inconsistencies can only be eliminated by completely re transporting the objects from the source system A good example of this kind of inconsistency is the Query transport without its corresponding InfoSet mentioned at the beginning of this section If no catalog entry is found during a consistency check or there are objects in the catalogs that no longer exist you can use the Goto More functions gt Reconstruct catalogs function to reconstru
256. ithmetic as the InfoSet It is not however intended that the model report itself be executed The structure of this model report and the sequence of its parts are regular The main structure of a model report is given below Tables tab Definition of Dictionary structure used to set up the Infoset This structure must contain the records you want to evaluate Parameters Definition of parameters selection criteria and Frelds DATA BEGIN OF itab OCCURS xxx Definition of an internal INCLUDE STRUCTURE tab table lt itab gt with structure DATA END of itab lt tab gt which provides the records you want to evaluate lt Query head gt This comment must always appear after your data declarations Code to define the table itab if such a table is used Beginning of a loop to retrieve each record and place it in the structure tab SELECI DO LOOP ses Code for formatting data if necessary lt Query body gt This comment must always be the last statement in the loop The data must be available in structure tab April 2001 279 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Retrieving Data with Programs End of data retrieval loop for individual records ENDSELECT ENDDO ENDGOOP ssa If the model report components are in the wrong sequence SAP Query may generate meaningless reports The character strings of the two comment lines lt QUERY_HEAD gt and lt QUERY_BODY gt are fixed to start imme
257. l currency E SBOOK LUGGWEIGHT Weight af luggage SBOOK ORDER_DATE Booking date E SBOOK SMOKER smoker SFLIGHT FLDATE Flight date E SFLIGHT PAYMENTSUM Total of current bookings SFLIGHT PLANETYPE Plane type M SFLIGHT PRICE Ticket price E SFLIGHT SEATSMAX Maximum capacity M SFLIGHT SEATSOCC Occupied seats E SPFLI AIRPFROM Departure airport M SPFLI AIRPTO Destination airport E SPFLI ARRTIME Arrival time Subsequent procedure is exactly the same as described in the previous section Here the list contains only the different sub objects which can occur with InfoSets which texts are assigned to the sub objects and what if anything needs to be noted for the sub objects The sub objects include e InfoSet name e Field group name e Database tables e Database fields Texts of database fields exist in two forms the description or long text and the column header April 2001 325 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Language Comparison of an InfoSet Modify Sub object Database field SPFLI CITYFROM Description EN From city DE Startort Header EN From city DE Startort AH ne KIT w Close i a e Table fields Table fields in this context are fields of linked additional tables included in a field group As with database fields the texts of table fields exist in two forms the description and the header e Additional fields Additional field texts exist in two forms descriptions and headers e
258. l queries that use this InfoSet should also be adjusted so that all new properties can be changed within each query s definition April 2001 217 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Creating and Changing InfoSets Creating and Changing InfoSets The following sections explain how to create and change InfoSets The information is intended primarily for system administrators Creating InfoSets Seite 219 Assign Data Source Seite 220 InfoSet Display Seite 223 Definition of Field Groups Seite 226 Obtaining Additional Information Seite 231 Creating Selections Seite 250 Further Codes Seite 257 Application specific Enhancements Seite 264 218 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Creating InfoSets Creating InfoSets If you want to create an InfoSet you should first discuss the requirements for the InfoSet with the appropriate application department You must clarify the following points e Which data source corresponds to the requirements Example Material evaluations in materials management or document evaluation in financial accounting e Which fields do you need to include in the InfoSet e Do you need additional information which is not available in the data source This calls for the linking of additional tables and the definition of additional fields e Do you need parameters and selection criteria parameters and selection criteria appear appear on the selection screen of queries which
259. l sequence of query screens you go to the List Line Output Options screen In the column Ref you can specify in connection with which line you want to output the data Since the flight connections line 1 are only meant to be displayed in connection with the flights line 2 you must enter a 2 for line 1 in the column Ref List line output options Line Color Header Fef Slash Blank line Columns Page BENI line Hef To Hef Att With header Page i List line 2 E E El LI LI 2 List line E o L L With these options you can generate a list containing only those flight connections for which flights exist in the selected period g To output the price of a flight in the relevant currency you must set the appropriate radio button for the field Price in the column Unit on the Field Output Options screen On the List Line Output Options screen there are further list layout options which have not so far been discussed For each line you can specify whether you want to output blank lines before and after outputting this line To do this you enter the number of blank lines in the relevant columns If you select the column New page for a line SAP Query starts a new page before outputting this line In this way you can ensure in the above example that information about a flight connection always begins on a new page However when displaying lists with a dynamic page size on the screen starting a new page can be more of a hindrance f
260. l sub totals lines and overall totals lines are not taken into account If you pass a statistic the totals line is not taken into account 120 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Graphics Graphics This function allows you to display the information from your list using SAP Business Graphics li SAP Business Graphics i ES In contrast to the other functions described in this section the Graphics function can only handle an extract from one column of your sub list and the column must contain numeric values You can choose which values you want to display by placing the cursor on them when activating the function Position the cursor on the column of the partial list whose values you want to display in graphic format You should note here that SAP Business Graphics can handle only a limited number of values between 6 and 32 Since the cursor position determines the first value to be processed place the cursor directly on that value The function then processes the value together with all the subsequent values in the same column You can define the type of graphic in the query definition but you can only modify the display type on the graphics screen g If you do not position the cursor as described above when activating the function the system itself determines a start value somewhere near the cursor position For this reason you should always place the cursor so that you make clear which values you want to display in
261. la DISDIay ODUN S oaase a o Ria Aaa aaa a aa a aiaia 380 8 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE POSIVONING ANG SIZING syxcusioicsca ios aia A eee ee eee 381 COIORS wince taut a Rie cael ds A gth aed eae eee E 382 Totaling and Counting viceitsiet iene a i Ne S 383 Screen A o gt ener eer re ee ee een eee ee 387 Currency Fields and Quantity Fields cccccscccccsssceeceeeeeeceeseeeceseeeseageeeseenseeseeeeeeees 388 Further OPHONS sete ceteris dnssees eens acepeal eaceweed acted nce ae ade ee eee ek 389 O tp t Options Tor Control ECV GIS i socceee eenh en ceo sceeen a a a a a 390 SONG een eee et ere net ee Pe ee ere ee etree cere eee 391 Slolgiivel el Beh hil oy a nee ree tetera rt tenmeent an eee tte Rene eon et aren ane ie net te tre E ie ee nen eee ee 392 S1016 1 E2 1 a ee ees HS er SS oc ee ee 393 Sie 8 Tai ale Mig 2 6 ioe erm nee eee ae eee eee rece ert erent ent te are ate re sent oe er tire nr are eect Me T tet 394 met Lg dg ODIO e a E E D Pee ne eee eeSeT 396 TOODI hc eee meri eee ere eee reat rey eee aR ne nie ee ee ree eerie ner eer ene eee op es 397 April 2001 9 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE SAP Query BC SRV QUE The InfoSet Query the SAP Query and the QuickViewer allow you to define reports without having to program them yourself InfoSet Query The InfoSet Query is a useful tool for maintaining queries within the SAP Query that is suitable for developi
262. lays a list of all of the fields you can work with in this particular list Further information can be found under Selecting List Fields Seite 369 List layout is simulated in the upper right hand part of the screen Individual fields are represented by field values Sample data records are read from the data source If this is not possible dummy field values are inserted This layout simulation corresponds to the structure of the list that will be created later It contains the same fields headers colors totals lines etc in the same order they will be displayed In order to simulate the structure of a multiple line hierarchical list numerous sample data records are read from the database and inserted in the list In addition the layout window contains several Toolbars Seite 397 for changing list layout and attributes Many of the elements that appear in the layout window can be moved and changed using drag and drop functionality Your cursor changes from a pointer to an index finger when positioned on one of these elements A simple left mouse click frames all moveable objects in blue and you cursor assumes a new shape move cursor Now you can move the element in question within the layout window by depressing your left mouse button and dragging the object to a new position When you release the mouse button your element assumes its new position if the new position is allowed Moveable elements include e All fields in the list lay
263. lbar allows you to switch between a field s technical name and long text whenever you want to 362 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Determining the Sort Sequence Determining the Sort Sequence Choose the tab Sort sequence Here you can determine list sorting and output criteria koi TA C Ce E l D C A lt L EIEE E a _ Select sort fields in the table control located on the right You can sort and find fields in the Available fields table control with the appropriate pushbuttons When you have found the fields you want to sort according to use the 4 pushbutton Column left to transfer these fields to the table control on the left Radio buttons allow you to determine if you want to sort ascending or descending April 2001 363 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Selecting Selection Fields Selecting Selection Fields Use the tab Selection fields to choose selection criteria in basis mode Selection fields are displayed as input fields on selection screens before your report is executed Users can reduce the amount of data output in the report by entering values in these fields If for example you select Flight connection code you can specify in the program selection area that you only want to display flights with certain flight numbers P niaaa p im TE s Co a _ KDN E e x aCe E ie KD KI If you want to add a selection for a field select that f
264. lculation formula consists of a single formula All formulae conform to the usual mathematical rules and contain operands and operators Valid operands include the short names of fields as well as numeric constants 10 or 1 5 for example and character strings ABC for example Certain special fields are also available These are NAME the name of the user processing the query DATE the current date when the query is being processed TIME the current time when the query is being processed lf an operand is a text field you can use the notation textfield n m to access part of this field Here n is the position of the first character and m is the position of the last character E If you were accessing the 2nd character to the 5th character of the field the notation would be text 2 5 If an operand is a date or time field you can use the following notation to access the individual components of this field date field YEAR vear date field MONTH month date field DAY reeeeeeecece day April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Defining Local Fields time field HOUR eeeeeeeeseeese hours time field MINUTE minutes time field SECOND seconds Valid operators include the basic arithmetic operations plus DIV and MOD DIV is the operator for whole number division and MOD is the operator for
265. ld ccccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeseeeeees 156 Changing Headers sreicciiss sctanednnseevezanictdevinin sodvissan ou ita an towdlnd andietaiadlanainncsteiinonseyansts 158 MGMT Sparc es ees oe iets cesses ace ue temas das gee stan baa ne E TE 161 S 1S cee ote aac orca cin i os el E deport on ae cine encase aad hat ea E E 162 Output Options for Control Levels cccccccccseececeeeeeceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseesesseeeeseeeessaeeeeas 164 Defining Multiple Line Basic Lists cccccccseeeeecseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeesaeeeeeeeneeeeeas 168 Sorting and Subtotals eee cccseeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeesseeeeesseess 170 Changing Control Level Texts cccccsseccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseesseaeeessaeeessaeeeeessaaes 174 Totals LISIS eee eee ee eee ee ee eee re 176 Output Positions Of FieldS 20 0 0 cece cccccceececeeeeeceeeeeseeceeseeeeeeeeesseeeesseeeeseeeeeseeeenes 178 Defining Statistics ccc cecccccsseccceeseeeccesececceuseeeseaeeeceaeeecseuseeessueeecsaseeessuseesssageeessaass 180 Generating Statistics 2 0 0 ccccecccecseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseeeeeesaeeeeeeseeseeesaaueeessaeeessgees 181 Sorting Statistics vies iciicenaactaccsrenaiiessvmns sais tuss ee esinanddieuasawi sie Senaaateaienee bdeudbanidedeoasddedasnasiasecal 183 Defining Headers in Statistics 2 0 0 0 ccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeseeeeeesaeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeas 188 Error Analysis with Conversion Errors
266. ld in the lower right hand box ABAP Query then displays all the user groups and queries that process the selected field If you still want to delete either a field from a field group or an entire field group you must first delete or change all the queries affected by this Otherwise the system responds with an error message and refers you to the queries concerned April 2001 229 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Displaying a List of Assigned Fields Displaying a List of Assigned Fields You can get an overview of the fields that are assigned to an InfoSet in the InfoSet maintenance screen by choosing the function Expand All in the right side of the screen If you choose nfoSet Description on the InfoSet maintenance initial screen you get a complete overview of the InfoSet including a list of all field groups with assigned fields You can also print this overview You can also display a list of all field groups and assigned fields by choosing Environment Directories Fields field groups If you are not sure whether to assign a field to a field group you can request documentation To do this place the cursor on the field and choose Extras Field description You then see the field documentation This also contains a technical description type length and so on g This function is also contained in the lower right dialog box used for changing field texts Currency amounts are stored in the logical database as pairs of
267. lds do not have a defined value at this point The HEAD variable can be used to specify which page header should be output This variable is available in the standard settings and takes one of the following values Output at END OF SELECTION before the list is output GGG Output the basic list Output the statistics xx xx 01 99 Output the ranked list xx xx 01 99 Output the conversion table ZZZ Output at END OF SELECTION after the list is output The value of the HEAD variable may be queried but may not be changed since it is an internal runtime system variable The use of TOP OF PAGE code allows the standard page header to be extended However it is important to note that if this is done then the changes will take effect on all queries that work with this functional area April 2001 263 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Application specific Enhancements Application specific Enhancements SAP Query is a generic tool that can be used with all applications within SAP systems for reporting tasks This generic approach has until now prevented SAP Query from utilizing specific application knowledge specific application logic The application HR is however an exception There is a range of specific HR solutions integrated into SAP Query InfoSet generation query target groups and so on These solutions are strictly coded meaning that changes or enhancements are only possible if you modify SAP Query From th
268. lection criteria defined in the InfoSet used e Parameters used to define the values of local fields see Defining Local Fields Seite 145 e Additional selection criteria specified when defining the query e A parameter for the currency conversion date if required by the query e Several radio buttons allowing you to send the list for further processing see Interactive Functions for Further List Processing Seite 117 AN The radio button SAP List Viewer is set in the selection screen under Output type Many of the query specific output functions mentioned in the following sections are available to you if you choose ABAP List as an output form When you have entered the selections choose Execute to display your list 104 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Executing Queries Online Overview of flights by airlines AGia 0462 26 01 2000 06 30 00 Y Z_ Toronto Pearson inf YUL_ Montreal Doral 400 30 01 2000 _ Or0000 vyz Toronto Pearson Inf YUL Montreal Dorval 137 01 02 2000 16 00 00 YUL Montreal Dorval YYZ Toronto Pearson Intl 140 03 02 2000 16 30 00 YC Calgary YYZ Toronto Pearson Intl 3 EEE 502 70 01 2000 081000 FRA Frankui ORD _ Chicago Ohare int g93 7501 2000 142500 _ CPH Copenhayen FRA Frontot KEL on L D om J m Dd 3 DJ 2 DJ 375 02 10 2000 13 0000 Whenever a query is started and no entries are made on the selection screen a dialog box ap
269. lumn Header on the List Line Output Options screen Fixed Headers Fixed header lines depend on the structure of the query You can define any number of header lines On the maintenance screen the header lines are ready for input and can accept any entries you make The Edit menu contains functions which allow you to insert or delete lines Blank header lines are not output in the list You can define fixed header lines and footer lines so that when you generate the query list they can receive current values of certain fields When defining a header line or footer line this means that you must specify a character string of the type amp field where field is the short name of a field This functionality allows you for example to place a sort criterion in the header line You can use the following fields directly as variables NAME Name of the user processing the query DATE Current date PAGE Current page number 6 characters P Current page number 3 characters wOATE PAGE w They can be used in the short forms N D T and P If these letters also occur as short names for query fields the field values from the query is used as a replacement 158 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Changing Headers Column Headers SAP Query proposes standard column headers for all lines Here the column header for one line of the basic list can consist of one or two lines since the column header for a field can cov
270. lysis The ABC Analysis function can be used for any interactive basic list all statistics and any ranked list that contains at least one numeric field For the ABC analysis the data records of a dataset are divided into three groups A segment B segment C segment Each of the data records must include a key figure a numeric field and an arbitrary number of other characteristics non numeric fields The dataset is initially sorted on the key figure in either descending or ascending order The data records can then be divided into groups according to one of four strategies e Key figure percentage The data records are divided into groups according to the size of the partial sum of the key figures considered as a percentage of the sum of all the key figures For example if the following distribution is chosen A 50 B 30 and C 20 then the data records are allocated to segment A as long as the sum of the key figures does not exceed 50 of the total The data records will then be allocated to segment B until the partial sum of the key figures reaches 80 50 30 of the sum of all the key figures All other data records will be allocated to segment C e Key figure absolute The data records are divided into groups on the basis of the absolute values of the key figures Two boundary values have to be specified one to mark the boundary between the A and B segments and one to mark the boundary between the B and C segments These boundar
271. mation can be found under Totaling and Counting Fields Seite 383 and in the section on Control Level Texts Seite 392 April 2001 391 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Control Level Text Control Level Text Once the Sorting Seite 391 of a particular field has been determined a control level text is created that appears above the fields in your list in layout mode This control level text is highlighted in purple lilac You cannot change this lovely color No ID Depart city Arrival city Depart Arrive City of departure NEW YORK D400 AA NEW YORK SAN FRANCISCO 13 30 00 16 51 00 Ek sort fieras City of departur amp If you select a sort field as in the example above and want if to appear as the control level text if makes sense to delete the field from the actual body of the list If you do not want the sort field to be elevated to the control level text delete the control level text using the trash can icon To delete the control level text click on the sort field in the Sort fields toolbox and deselect the option Control level text in the lower left window on your screen This checkbox is selected in the standard Click on control level texts to edit them The whole line minus the sort field display length can be filled with text Texts for subtotals and counting fields can be edited in the same manner 392 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Subtotals Subtotals Once the sorting of a parti
272. mn in the list FGTYPE identifies the field s contents as S asymbol anicon contains the value X if the field has been output with the option NO ZERO in the list FSUM contains the value X if the field has been totaled in the list FSONLY contains the value X if the list has been sorted according to this field but the field itself was not output FSORT contains the sorting number if the list has been sorted according to the field contains the value X if the list has been sorted in descending order according to the field FSUBT contains the value X if the list has been sorted according to the field and sub totals were generated during sorting FLPOS like FPOS FNUMB field group of the field whose name is stored in FNAMENEW FNUMBT Long text of the field group April 2001 339 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Example Example In our example the table LISTDESC would have the following structure the values of the FDESC fields are also listed FDESC FNAME FNAMENEW FCOL G00 01 0 000 X Cj 010 00 010 1 KNA1 KUNNR Number G00 02 0 000 X C 035 00 035 2 KNA1 NAME 1 Name _ G00 03 0 000 X N 004 00 004 3 KNC1 GYEAR Year G00 04 0 053 P 008 02 021 F 4 KNC1 UM01U Sales G00 05 0 000 X C 005 00 005 W 5 T001 WAERS Currency T01 01 0 000 X C 003 00 003 6 TO1 KNA1 LAND1 Land T01 02 0 005 P 016 02 021 F 7 T01 KNC1 UM01U Sales_ T01 03 0 027 I 004 00 008 C 8
273. mparison is necessary at all If you want to return to the full overview screen containing all sub objects select All texts To compare the texts of a sub object place the cursor on the sub object and select Choose You then see a window with all the texts of the selected sub object 322 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE General Language Comparison Procedure Modif Sub object Title and notes Title EN Flight connections 1st example DE Fluqverbindungen Notes EN Oyvyerviem of all existing flight bookings DE Bereitstellung aller m glichen Fluqverbindungen The window contains details about the sub object and also the individual texts Each text exists in two versions the source language version and the target language version Since the text fields are ready for input you can make any changes you like If the text version in one language is missing the input field is blank If two texts have not been compared one of the texts is flagged This is either the text which is still missing or the older text It is thus easy to tell which text needs to be changed within the context of the language comparison Now you can either change the texts found in the system or create totally new ones You can change or expand the either one or both existing text versions g The component Language Comparison does not allow deletion of texts If you attempt to do this by overwriting a text with blanks the sy
274. n InfoSet When you create a query for an InfoSet the system places these sections of code in the query report according to fixed rules for example depending on the hierarchy level of a logical database table The global syntax check determines whether all the InfoSet components contain syntax errors in any of the query reports A successful InfoSet syntax check is an absolute prerequisite for running query reports Although SAP Query automatically performs a syntax check when you maintain an InfoSet which contains a section of ABAP code for example in the case of an additional field this check can only verify the syntax of the code for this InfoSet component within its environment at the time of maintenance J If the global syntax check detects errors you can use the generation log to determine which InfoSet components contain ABAP code that could result in syntactically incorrect query reports You must eliminate these errors if the generation is to run successfully g You can use the function Goto gt More functions Check and generate to check and generate more than one InfoSet at a time Initially this function calls a selection screen where you can enter the InfoSets you want to check and generate In addition you must designate whether these InfoSets are simply to be checked or if they should be generated as well The function generates a log as part of its results April 2001 213 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG
275. n screen as a default for your file name This default value will always be as the file name whenever you call the Download to file function regardless of whether the Download to file radio button is set on the selection screen or not g Be aware that by entering a suggested file name you ARE NOT suppressing the dialog that is run through when the Download to file function is called The ability to suggest names for Download to file files on the selection screen is especially useful when variants have been defined for your query or QuickView April 2001 119 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Table Calculation Table Calculation This function exports data via the XXL interface If you activate it you see a dialog box where you can decide how you want to proceed further with the data You can pass the data to a table calculation program Excel for example and start the program using this data or store the data as a file for a table calculation program or store the data as a SAPoffice document The connection to table calculation programs described here requires these programs to be installed according to the XXL interface guidelines For further information on how to perform this installation refer to the relevant documentation The option to start the table calculation program is not available if the start itself is not possible g If you pass a basic list the lines at the beginning of the control level and al
276. n to your reporting concept Appropriately adjusted InfoSets are user friendly which makes working with InfoSet Query much simpler The InfoSet determines the objects that you can select with InfoSet Query The following scenarios are possible e The InfoSet is based on logical database PNP InfoSets based on this logical database enable you to use InfoSet Query to select employees You can use data from Personnel Administration and Time Management and payroll infotypes as selection criteria From a technical perspective this means you can use fields from infotypes 0000 to 0999 and 2000 to 2999 and payroll infotypes as selection criteria For example you can use the InfoSet to run a report that determines which employees have a particular place of residence Furthermore you can create InfoSets on the basis of this logical database that enable you to report on the infotypes of related objects using InfoSet Query For example you can select persons who participated in a particular business event and output the qualifications of the persons selected To do this you must select infotypes from Personnel Planning as well as infotypes from Personnel Administration when you create the InfoSet e The InfoSet is based on logical database PAP InfoSets based on this database enable you to use InfoSet Query to select applicants You can use data from Recruitment as selection criteria and for output From a technical perspective this means you can use
277. n under SAP Query Authorizations Seite 81 April 2001 47 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Type of Reporting Type of Reporting The following types of reporting are available in the InfoSet Query Development The reporting type Development is used for creating queries that are going to be used on a long term basis This means that queries can be saved as executable programs incorporated into menus or distributed Technically speaking this means that the global area is always used and a connection to the Workbench Organizer exists whenever you call up the InfoSet Query for the Development reporting type Ad hoc Reporting The reporting type Ad hoc reporting is used primarily as a quick and simple way of creating specific reports that as a rule are not needed more than once Ad hoc reporting is possible in both query areas global and standard and you can also save your queries In the global area they are always saved in a temporary development class and there is no dialog with the Workbench Organizer In the standard area queries can only be transported with the tools intended for the task You can find further information on creating and transporting queries in the SAP Query documentation under the section Transporting Query Objects Seite 303 and its subsections J Calling up the InfoSet Query has been set up in Human Resources HR so that the InfoSet Query has default values in the specified query area and user
278. name and its alias Check The system checks to see if the links between tables make sense or if tables have been inserted but not joined Reference field Placing your cursor on a quantity or currency field and choosing Reference field causes the system to display the reference table containing that field s corresponding unit of measure or currency Field documentation Place your cursor on a field for which you wish to display documentation Information about the field s technical definition is displayed Two fields can be linked only if both fields have the same data type in the Dictionary including the length attribute This means that two fields can be linked if they have the same domain You can find out about further restrictions and rules on how to use joins in the section on Classical Table Join Definition Seite 274 When you are done defining a table join for a QuickView choose Back from the Join Definition screen to continue maintaining QuickViews Your join definition is then saved together with your QuickView If you are using the graphical join definition while maintaining an InfoSet choose Back to return to InfoSet maintenance and save manually April 2001 273 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Definition of a Table Join without Graphics Definition of a Table Join without Graphics If several tables are all linked within a SELECT statement this is known as a join The result set is a table each of the lines of w
279. nd its header and footer are set off from the body of the list with underscores You can decide if you want to display slashes before and after lines and if column separators make sense These options are available as List Line Output Options Seite 375 You can also drag the separator icon from the toolbox to a specific line to insert column separators Drag the Undo icon to that line to undo your choice Use this technique to undo the automatic selections mentioned above if you do not want your list s columns and lines to be separated You can also delete the frame around your list on the List Line Output Options Seite 371 screen However be aware that separators can only be used between individual column fields and lines if the list itself is framed 378 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Further Options Further Options The following List Line Output Options Seite 375 are available e Line color You can assign a line a color in the following way e Call the possible values help for Line color from list line output options in the left lower window and choose Apply e Selecta color from the toolbar for additional functions toolbox and drag it to the line you want The colors available are described by terms which identify their use in SAP standard displays g You can also assign specific colors to the individual fields in a line independent of the line color e Blank space before after this line You can de
280. nd the definition of the basic list You also specify which field you want to sum Since you want to sum the Booking price in foreign currency field you select the column Total for this field In order to count the number of bookings select the checkbox for this entry in the Counter column Basic list with box Frame width Columns separated by Compressed display Define basic list Field Line Sequence Sort Total Counter From city 1 1 1 Destination z Airline carrier Id Flight connection Id Departure time Arrival time Flight date Ticket price Occupied seats Free seats Booking number Customer name Flight class Smoker E n N n N a N n N a a a a 1 1 1 1 1 Z 2 2 2 J J J d J Booking price in foreign currency If you continue with the normal sequence of screens you now branch to the screen where you can specify output options for each control level Since you want to display a sub total and the number of bookings for each flight you select the columns Total and Counter for the field Flight date g On this screen you cannot determine the field you want to sum or count but only at which level you want to display a sub total or number of bookings for the fields you 170 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Sorting and Subtotals have defined on the Basic List Line Structure screen for summing or counting respectively In addition you have chosen the Box option for the field Flight date
281. ne at the start of the field list and the fact that they have been successfully linked is indicated by an equals sign The relationship can be canceled by placing the cursor on one of two fields and calling the Remove relationship function which is to be found on a pushbutton immediately above the equals sign When you have finished defining the link conditions for a table pair you can return to the Tables in the join screen by using the Back function When you have finished specifying all the link conditions that you have defined you can use the Field groups function to enter the field group maintenance Here you have access to all the functionality that you can use for InfoSets via logical databases e g inclusion of additional tables definition of additional fields and definition of parameters and selection criteria Please take note of the remarks made at the end of the Sequential Datasets Seite 278 section On the field group maintenance screen all tables in the second sub tree are arranged next to each other at the same level It is important to note an important difference to the logical databases The table join results in a flat table and therefore does not permit an analysis of hierarchical relationships For this reason additional tables additional structures and additional fields are always connected to the first table of a join and the only code that exists is for record processing However all fields contained in the tables
282. ng InfoSets This section describes the functions for maintaining InfoSets April 2001 207 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Displaying InfoSets Displaying InfoSets To display information about the structure of an InfoSet first select the name of the InfoSet you are interested in Now you can either choose Description or Display If you want to see all of the details for the InfoSet definition choose Display All screens are displayed in the same manner as if the InfoSet were being changed however no new entries can be made By selecting Description on the initial screen you can display all the relevant information about an existing InfoSet The resulting list consists of a header common to all InfoSets and one or two sections containing information about each version of the InfoSet which exists at any one time There may be two versions a generated version and a corrected version For each of these versions the list contains information about the InfoSets and the fields assigned to them as well as about other components For further information refer to Creating and Changing InfoSets Seite 218 208 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Copying InfoSets Copying InfoSets If you want to copy an InfoSet choose the Copy function on the initial screen In the dialog box enter the name of the InfoSet you want to copy The InfoSet currently being processed is the InfoSet that the system proposes You can overwrite t
283. ng queries and for ad hoc reporting All query information meaning the selection criteria and output are available on a single screen The clear and concise arrangement of screen areas means that even the novice user can soon generate queries with confidence Graphical interface elements and drag amp drop make the tool easy to use InfoSet Query is suitable for reporting in all areas of the SAP R 3 system A special feature is the Human Resources HR component When InfoSet Query is used in HR for ad hoc reporting the name Ad hoc Query is used instead of InfoSet Query Due to the data model in HR the InfoSet Query also contains the Object Selection function with which you should work in order to evaluate HR data SAP Query and Quick Viewer To define a report with the SAP query you first have to enter individual texts such as titles and select the fields and options which determine the report layout You then assign a particular sequence by numbering the fields Then you can edit list display in WYSIWYG mode whenever you want using drag and drop and the other toolbox functions available SAP Query is a comprehensive tool for defining reports in different forms such as basic lists Statistics or ranked lists In contrast the QuickViewer is a simplified tool for generating basic lists The QuickViewer is especially useful for beginning users and occasional use QuickView definitions are user dependent You can transfer a QuickView into SAP
284. note that headers are only taken into account for the output length of the field The header can be divided over two rows Field group The local field is included in the field group Attributes When defining the technical attributes of the local field you can use any of the following options Refer to an existing field i e use it as a reference field The advantage of this option is that the local field can accept the same values as the reference field If the reference field is a currency amount field or a quantity field the local field inherits the currency or unit assignment of the reference field In our example the field Distance with the short name DISTANCE is a quantity field since it contains a distance specification and a measurement unit Therefore the local field SPEED is also a quantity field and has the same measurement unit as the field DISTANCE Define the field as a text calculation date or time field With text and calculation fields you must specify the field size number of characters digits and number of decimal places Define the field as a symbol or icon With these fields the contents are interpreted as a symbol or icon and output is consequently in graphical format You could do this if you wanted to emphasize particular values or lines in the list Calculation formula You can determine the value of a field in either of the following ways By using a calculation formula In the simplest case a ca
285. note that the column header may be no wider than the output length of the field If substitution of the field value results in this length being exceeded the end of the value will be truncated In queries fields may only have one header This header is always used if a column header is to be provided in the query for this field Footer Lines The same rules apply for footer lines as for fixed header lines These lines are ready for input and can be changed by making entries You can insert and delete lines using the functions in the Edit menu Blank lines are not output in the list April 2001 159 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Changing Headers AN For technical reasons it is not possible to define a different number of footer lines in the different sublists If you have defined four footer lines for a basic list and one footer line for a statistic the statistic is output with five footer lines The first line of the page footer is always an underscore Even within a footer line you can access the values of fields from the query g Please note that although the number of header lines in the page header and footer is unrestricted the total number of these lines must be smaller than the number of lines per page You can only check this partially in the query definition since the number of lines per page may change at processing time for example when printing or when processing in the background If this condition is violated a
286. nt e Sort field selection e Selection criteria selection fields for the selection screen e List execution List display in standard format or list export to Word Excel etc Activities If you want to create a QuickView in basis mode follow the steps described in the section on Creating QuickViews Seite 355 For further information about specific procedures refer to the following sections selecting List Fields Seite 362 Determining the Sort Sequencer Seite 363 Selecting Selection Fields Seite 364 April 2001 361 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Selecting List Fields Selecting List Fields You choose what fields you want to appear on your list on the following screen Fai Select Available fields that you need for your list from the table control on the right The pushbutton 4 Column left allows you to transfer fields into the table control on the left If you want to accept all available fields in your list use the Page left pushbutton double arrow Page right allows you to reset this selection Determine in which order you want your fields to be output If you want to move a field forward in the sequence select it and choose the Previous value pushbutton Arrow pointing upwards Use the downward arrow to pass fields down the list Insert line allows you to determine where a line should wrap in multiple line basic lists g The Technical name lt gt Long text pushbutton in the application too
287. nt selection fields and if necessary remove the selection fields you do not need by clicking the relevant check box The system transfers the selected fields to the selection field list The selection fields that you have removed are no longer in the list 2 Inthe column Output select the relevant output fields and if necessary remove the output fields you do not need by clicking the relevant check box The system transfers the selected fields to the output preview The output fields that you have removed are no longer in the output preview g You can also add the fields to the relevant area selection or output area using drag amp drop If you use drag and drop you can insert the fields directly into the correct position in the output preview Depending on the default settings fields with texts have only their text or their value transferred when you select them by ticking the check boxes or by using drag amp drop However you can also select fields by using the context menu of the relevant field Here you can choose whether you want to use the value the text or both 3 Enter the relevant selection values for the selection fields in the column Value The value types numeric alphanumeric date that you can enter for the selection fields depend on the type of selection field 4 Inthe Options column choose selection options such as lt or 5 To execute the query choose al or E Output Result The query
288. ntage of object selection is that it ensures good selection performance Furthermore the following functions can only be used in InfoSet Query if you choose to work with object selection e Hitlist determination e Hitlist editing e Set operations e Restriction of the reporting set In basis mode you can make selections according to all of an InfoSet s fields These options are restricted when object selection is used g The Object selection switched on setting is saved as a user setting so that you do not have to enter it time and time again The next time you use InfoSet Query this setting is loaded Switch Object Selection On You have started InfoSet Query The object selection is switched off 1 Choose Extras Switch on object selection The object selection is switched on The additional Reporting set group box and the 1 Hit list amp and T pushbuttons are added to the InfoSet Query screen Switch Object Selection Off You have started InfoSet Query The object selection is switched on 1 Choose Extras Switch off object selection The object selection is switched off The Reporting set group box and the i Hit list and ii pushbuttons are removed from the InfoSet Query screen 54 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Overview of Functions Overview of Functions Use Unlike SAP Query with its broader range of functions InfoSet Query is also suitable for end users with little experience of
289. o and that you will subsequently want to assign your query to If the QuickView you want to convert is based on an InfoSet then this InfoSet must be assigned to your user group Procedure To convert a QuickView to a query proceed as follows 1 Choose Utilities SAP Query gt Queries in the ABAP Workbench 2 Choose Change user group Select the user group you want 3 Choose Query gt Convert QuickView The following dialog box appears QUICK Y TEWDEMO LANFERMANK 4 Enter a name for the query 5 Enter a name of your choice for the InfoSet if the QuickView you want to convert has been created using a logical database a table or a table join The InfoSet will then be generated automatically Query functionality is based on InfoSets In order to be able to proceed in SAP Query an InfoSet must be defined for your query 360 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Basis Mode Basis Mode Use Use basis mode if you want to display or export your list in a standard format after field selection and sort sequence selection if applicable Integration You can choose between two modes in the QuickViewer 1 Further processing in layout mode or 2 List display in basis mode Layout mode allows you to influence the graphical structure of your list whereas basis mode immediately executes or passes your list to other tools Features Basis mode offers you the following features e Field selection and sequence assignme
290. o create a new query proceed as follows 6 Call the component Maintain Queries 7 Choose the user group to which you want to assign the new query 8 Enter the desired query name Query names can be up to 14 characters long and should not already exist in the user group 9 Choose Create You then see a list of the InfoSets assigned to your current user group 10 To select the InfoSet you require place the cursor on the InfoSet and choose Select For further information about creating InfoSets refer to Creating and Changing InfoSets Seite 218 J If many InfoSets with multiple fields are assigned to one user group you can use the search function to find the right InfoSet Within the specified InfoSets it is possible to perform any number of searches The result is a displayed list of all InfoSets and fields which satisfy the search criterion All the examples in this chapter are based on a flight reservation system and evaluate flight bookings You should therefore choose the InfoSet FLBU You may now begin to define your report The system takes you through several screens Four different screen sequences are possible e Field selection including assignment of title and list format e Basic list define layout of basic list e Statistics define layout of statistics e Ranked list define layout of ranked lists Within each of these screen sequences you have the following navigation options e Use the Next screen and
291. oSets and Structural Changes in a Logical Database InfoSets and Structural Changes in a Logical Database There should be as few changes as possible made to a logical database Those that are made should be upwards compatible This means that tables may be extended to include new fields and that new tables may be incorporated into the tree in such a way that the existing structure does not get changed but forms a subset of the new structure When a new InfoSet is created over a logical database the structure of the logical database the arrangement of its tables in the tree is read from the relevant system tables once and is stored in the InfoSet Whenever relationships between tables have to be evaluated for example when query reports are being generated this structure is accessed Each time that an InfoSet is generated or the InfoSet maintenance is called the structure of the logical database is read again and is compared with the structure stored in the InfoSet This means that an InfoSet can be adapted to changes in the structure at this point Changes to individual tables for example new fields deleted fields changes to the technical properties of fields are usually straightforward to handle since they are easily recognized and evaluated If necessary the appropriate warnings and error messages are shown when the generation is taking place There are however rather more restrictions when it comes to adapting an InfoSet to a change
292. obal area is a new Query whose assigned InfoSet or user group has a temporary development class then the Query will automatically be assigned to development class TMP Whenever this happens no dialog box asking you to assign a development class will appear April 2001 319 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Language Comparison Language Comparison Previous sections have described how to generate queries as well as how to create InfoSets and user groups These operations involve dealing with a number of different text elements For example you have to specify descriptions for a field group when setting up an InfoSet The system proposes descriptions for fields but you can modify these if you wish When defining a query you must specify a title and you can also enter notes as well as your own headers for the different sub lists and selection texts You enter all these text elements in your own language i e the logon language If however another user logs on in a different language and wants to use the queries and InfoSets you have defined all the text elements should preferably be displayed in that language SAP Query provides a language comparison for this reason The language comparison allows you to enter all relevant texts in one or more languages for a query or InfoSet You can then use that query or InfoSet in various logon languages SAP Query notes the language variants that exist for each text and checks that the individual v
293. of free seats on a flight from the fields SFLIGHT SEATSMAX maximum occupancy and SFLIGHT SEATSOCC occupied seats when processing the data of the table SPFLI because these fields only contain values at the level of processing for table SFLIGHT e You must specify the ABAP code for the field e You must assign the field to a field group Pay attention to the following when defining additional structures e Assign the structure to a node of the data source You can find all individual fields from the additional structure in this node of the data source Additional fields offer a simple way of calculating more than one additional field at the same time e Enter a calculation formula e You must assign the fields to a field group The following topics provide information on linking additional tables and the definition of additional structures and fields If you wish to provide an InfoSet with extras that was not created using a logical database then please take note of the actions in the following topics Definition of a Table Joins Seite 274 Reading Directly Seite 277 Sequential Dataset Seite 2 8 and Data Retrieval by a Program Seite 279 232 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Obtaining Additional Information April 2001 233 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Assigning Additional Tables Assigning Additional Tables To define an additional table for a data source table proceed as follows Double click on a tabl
294. of your screen Here you may also determine a sort direction for each sort field and select options for the beginning and end of the control level For more information see Sorting Seite 391 Control Level Text Seite 392 Subtotals Seite 393 Counting Fields Seite 394 Further Options Seite 396 390 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Sorting Sorting To sort proceed as follows 1 Select the field you want to sort according to in the upper right hand window 2 Drag this field to the Sorting fields toolbox If multiple fields have been dropped into the toolbox their order determines in which order sorting will take place The system sorts according to the first field then according to the second and so on If you want to change the order in which fields are sorted you can do so by selecting and moving fields within the toolbox An icon appears after each field indicating the direction in which the field is sorted ascending descending You can change the sort direction simply by clicking on the icon Sorting can be undone by selecting the field in the toolbox and dragging it to the trash Whenever a field is identified as a sort field a control level text is displayed the field in the Query Painter Subtotals are displayed for numeric fields at the end of each control level If a counter has been attached to the field a partial counter value subtotal is recorded at the end of each control level Further infor
295. ommended to declare all such variables in the DATA section rather than hiding them in any other sections Otherwise resolving syntax check errors becomes an unnecessarily complicated procedure The DATA section is transparent to the end user To create or maintain DATA code from the InfoSet maintenance screen choose the symbol Code With the aid of F4 help you can then choose the code type An editor is called where you see an existing DATA section or you can create a new one DATA NUMBER_SPFLI_RECORDS TYPE I NUMBER _SFLIGHT RECORDS TYPE I MAx_SPFLI_RECORDS TYPE 1 MAX SFLIGHT_RECORDS TYPE I You can choose Check to check your code for syntax errors When declaring data you can use LIKE to refer to any objects defined in the ABAP Dictionary You cannot refer to additional fields If you want to delete DATA code you can do this from within the editor for DATA definition April 2001 259 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG START Code START Code The code for the START OF SELECTION event in a report is executed before starting any database accesses meaning before the first data record of the highest table in the logical database hierarchy is read The code s purpose is to initialize all the variables used when reading data from the database Particularly additional fields or help variables that are used for filling key fields from connected additional tables can also be initialized here Selection screen entries can also be ch
296. on Wanting EI Aine carier m Famy Dectintion I Flight connection EI Depatwetime WI Distans a Fitime 144 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Defining Local Fields Defining Local Fields The definition of local fields allows you to generate new information from the fields in an InfoSet without having to include an additional field Lo The InfoSet FLBU contains a field for the distance and a field for the flight time A local field is used to calculate the speed To define a local field choose Edit gt Local field gt Create on the Select Field screen The local field for the speed can be used as an example Change Query G1 Select Field Short name SPEED Field description speed Heading speed per hour Functional group Flight connections amp Same attributes as field DISTANCE ca CO Text fleld Mo of characters O Calculation field Mumber of digits Decimal places Date field Time field O Symbol icons Calculation formula Distances TIME 3600 Condition C Input on selection screen Mandatory When making this definition the following information is needed e Short name e Field name Here you enter a text which describes the field contents On all subsequent screens the local field is identified via this name e Header April 2001 145 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Defining Local Fields 146 This is used when calculating column headers Please
297. on for example PNP or PCH you should be aware of certain special features on the List Line Output Options screen The following sections explain these features April 2001 195 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Line Groups Line Groups On the List Line Output Options screen you can group different lines together to form line groups Lines which belong to a common line group are always output together as a block Suppose a person has several addresses Usually the name of the person is output on the first line The second line contains the house number and street and the third line displays the postal code and the city By grouping lines two and three together to form a line group you ensure that that they are always treated as a block and output at the same time Otherwise for a person with more than one address you would get a list with all the streets and then all the cities The example below shows the formatting of an address list in the application HR List line output options Line Color Header Ret slash Blank line Columns Page pew Mo Gr line Hef To Hef Aft with header Page 1 1 Listline LU J E E 2 2 Listline E E E E J 3 2 Listline E E E E First Name Last Name House Number and Street Postal Cod City With HR queries you must also remember that the output in the column Ref on this screen always refers to line groups Thus if you want to output lines only under certain conditions you must define l
298. on as you exit the list display If you want to redisplay the same list later you have to execute the query again with the same selections And the system has to re evaluate the database This is unsatisfactory especially if you are dealing with lists such as year end closings which do not change but you need to display them often SAP Query allows you to save any lists you have generated and to redisplay them later When you display a list which has already been saved no more database accesses are necessary For this reason the response time is considerably faster than recreating a list by executing the query again Saving Lists Execute a query of your choice For example suppose you want to start the query G1 from the user group FB for information about how to create this query see the next chapter After you have entered your selections and selected ABAP List for the list output a list similar to the one below is displayed NEW YORK FRANCISCO FRANKFURT YORK SAN FRANCISCO YORK NEW YORK FRANCISCO SAN FRANCISCO YORE FRANKFURT YORE FRANKFURT YORE FRANKFURT FRANCISCO SAN FRANCISCO FRANKFURT BERLIN BERLIN FRANKFURT FRANKFURT BERLIN ROM NEW YORK FRANKFURT SAN FRANCISCO FRANKFURT BERLIN FRANKFURT FRANKFURT BERLIN BERLIN FRANKFURT FRANKFURT SAN FRANCISCO SAN FRANCISCO FRANKFURT To save this list choose Save You then see an overview of all the lists already saved for this query April 2001 113 SA
299. on required in the context menu There are two columns for every InfoSet field in the tree which each has one selection field Selecting a field in the first column copies that field to the selection field list Selecting a field in the second column turns that field into an output field 20 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Editing the InfoSet Display Editing the InfoSet Display Use This general procedure describes the different ways of displaying InfoSets and the editing options for these display options Prerequisites You are in the initial screen of the InfoSet Query An InfoSet Query is displayed in the top left hand corner of the screen Procedure Function Procedure Icon What you need to know Expand subtree Select a field group or a node of the You cannot use this function for a g logical database and choose the display option Field Catalog Compress subtree Select a field group or a node of the You cannot use this function for logical database and choose the display option Field Catalog Find You can search for fields within the If you are looking for parts of a InfoSet field name just enter that part in Choose rl the in Search dialog box Do not use a masked entry such as Enter all or part of the name of the flight field in the dialog box p Choose in the dialog box LJ Sa The cursor stays on the first field Ne entry flight will give you that contains the term you are
300. on scalar type of data This data type must always be a flat structure from the ABAP Dictionary An additional structure must be assigned to a node of the data source in the same way as an additional field However you can find all individual fields from the additional structure in this node of the data source So additional structures offer a simple way of calculating more than one additional field at the same time April 2001 247 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Assigning Structure Fields to Field Groups Assigning Structure Fields to Field Groups The fields for the inserted structure are displayed at the end of the fields list ay aap fh 3 Bev Data fields Log database F15 _ Flight schedule SPFLI A Flight schedule a SPFLI ee Extras Selections r Code t Enhancements Technical name Field Additional information an node SFLIGHT Pe a TT 1 PERSDATSA Add structure Personnel data 1 SEATSFREE Addit field Seats free D GRA Flight demo table SFLIGHT v E Additional fields Seats free SEATSFREE e E Personnel dat PERSDATA Flight ID PERSDATA ID Departure PERSDATA DAT E Name of p PERSDATA PIL COPILOT PERSDATA CO Flight atten PERSDATA AT Flight atten PERSDATA AT Flight atten PERSDATA AT Flight atten PERSDATA AT _ Flight booking SBOOK They can be assigned to a field group using the method already described Do not forget to ass
301. on temporary development class to a temporary development class only makes sense if all of the InfoSet s queries are assigned to a temporary development class e Changing queries from a temporary development class to a transportable development class only makes sense if the InfoSet areas and user groups they are assigned to are ina transportable development class themselves The function Change development class checks to see if you are allowed to change an object s development class and displays a warning if this is not possible You may then change the development class g For technical reasons it is possible to make changes that conflict with the restrictions listed above Therefore the system checks automatically to see if all changes made are acceptable If a conflicting change has been made a warning is displayed asking you to reconsider the change If this were not the case you would run the risk of having inconsistent datasets in all receiving systems after transport You can no longer change a development class when an object belongs to a transportable development class and has already been transported This means that all development class changes described above must be made prior to transporting the object A development class change may also be necessary after a query object has been renamed You must also ensure that the development classes of user groups and InfoSets that have been April 2001 299 SAP Query BC SRV QUE
302. optional Query optional A user group from either the global or standard area has to be assigned to the role If you specify an InfoSet then it has to be assigned to the user group If you specify a query then it has to be assigned to the user group e SAP_QUERY_DEVELOPMENT Access using user group development Parameters all optional User group InfoSet Query The user group has to come from the global area If you specify more than one parameter then they must match meaning that the InfoSet has to be assigned to the user group and the query must be based on the specified InfoSet Input help can support you with the entries e SAP _QUERY_AD_ HOC Access using user group ad hoc reporting Parameters all optional Query area standard setting Standard area User group InfoSet Query First decide which query area you want to work in with the InfoSet Query standard setting Standard area To enable you to work in the global area select the Global Area indicator Enter the remaining parameters If you specify more than one parameter then they must match meaning that the InfoSet has to be assigned to the user group and the query must be based on the specified InfoSet Input help can support you with the entries April 2001 49 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Modules for Calling the InfoSet Query i Calling up the InfoSet Query has been set up in Human Resources HR so that the InfoSe
303. or When you choose this pushbutton individual hierarchy levels are automatically displayed in different colors depending on their position in the logical database or functional area This allows you to discern which fields belong to which level of the hierarchy and more easily order different lines these fields when creating multiple line basic lists This highlighting is temporary and does not affect the colors you ve selected for list display in any way Choose Node assignment once again to switch off these colors An example can be found in the section Totaling and Counting Fields Seite 383 CI SPFU an b gt FH Flight schedule Mo STO Airp From city Apt Dest 3 CI SFLIGHT Figt date Plane Capacity Occupied Booking total v FH Flight demo table Airline carrier ID Flight connection Flight date Ticket price Local currency ol Plane type Maximum capaci 0017 AA JFK NEW YORK SAN FRANCISCO 11 19 1999 747 400 660 E 0 00 USD 11 22 1999 747 400 660 96 0 00 USD 11 29 1999 747 400 660 48 0 00 USD Total Flight connection 0402 0 00 USD j Total Airline LH E NLE E Sh Many examples found in this documentation the one above as well are based upon logical database F1S This database contains the tables SPFLI SFLIGHT and SBOOK For each record flight connection in SPFLI there are several records flights for each flight connection in SFLIGHT For each record in SFLIGHT the table SBOOK contains one record for each booking made
304. or more about page size please refer to Assigning Title Format and Notes Seite 139 The Page header option is only of significance if you are defining your query with a fixed page size or want to print your query lists This option allows you to repeat certain lines in every page header In the above example query G5 each flight connection line 1 is followed by several flights line2 This means that if you are working with a fixed page size which is always the case when printing one page may contain only lines with flights However if you select the column Page header for line 1 flight connection information the line containing the flight connection will be output on each new page Therefore it is always easy to see to which flight connection the flights on each page belong April 2001 169 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Sorting and Subtotals Sorting and Subtotals In this example Suppose you want to generate a list which contains booking information for each flight You want to display a subtotal giving the amounts paid per booking in each case and an overall total at the end of the list In addition you want to determine how many bookings per flight and the total number of bookings made You can use G5 as the basis for this Copy it and call it G6 Then change the title and note You must now extend the field selection by a few fields from the InfoSet Bookings On the Basic List Line Structure screen you exte
305. ord in the first table for which a record in the second table exists satisfying the link conditions see below 274 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Definition of a Table Join without Graphics e left outer join Each record of the first table is included in the result set If there is no record in the second table satisfying the link conditions for a record in the first table then a record containing fields with initial values is used for the second table i If you want to include a table in a join more than once you have to use an alias table Define an alias name for the appropriate table as described in Assigning Additional Tables You can then include the table in your join under both its original name and its alias Link conditions must be defined between each pair of tables in the join Two steps are needed to do this If just two tables are being linked in a join then the first step is simply to call the Define condition function The two tables will then appear on the right hand side of the screen in a list of table pairs If more than two tables are being linked together in a join then two tables should be selected before the Define condition function is called Then when the function is called these two selected tables will appear on the right hand side of the screen in the list of table pairs The Define condition function simply determines the tables between which link conditions are to be defined The second s
306. organizational unit or one of the underlying organizational units However if you use the Organizational unit as a selection field you must enter the upper level and underlying organizational units as values to select the same hit list Procedure Restriction Using Current Hit List You use an InfoSet as required 1 Make your selection as described in Make Selection Seite 60 2 Under Restrict reporting set by choose the Hit list entry 3 To transfer the current hit list as a reporting set click on the Hit list entry The current hit list is transferred as a reporting set and can be used for further selections The number of objects is displayed in the Reporting set field April 2001 63 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Set Operations Set Operations Use You can use set operations to relate two sets of objects to each other You can use the resulting set for output as a reporting set for further selections or for further set operations Prerequisites You are working with object selection Features You can show the Set operations tab page for the set operations The set operations process the sets from the Object set A and Object set B fields and write the result to the Resulting set field You can perform one of the following set operations e Create intersection e Create union e Set A minus set B e Set B minus set A If you want to use the resulting set for output you must copy it to the Hit list If you
307. orms of the SELECT instructions Enter in the entry field the first table in the join The additional tables can be entered after choosing the Continue pushbutton You can find more information in Table Join Definition Procedures Seite 272 The data is read directly from an SAP table The table must be entered in the ABAP Dictionary and must exist in the database Further information can be found under Reading Directly Seite 277 Enter the name of the logical database The input help allows you to get a list of all logical databases From this list you can request detailed information about individual logical databases The logical database structure that is the hierarchical relationship of logical database tables to each other is particularly important for creating InfoSets g Pay attention to the remarks contained in the appendix Logical Databases with Different Node Types Seite 346 If you have already entered a logical database you can request function In the Selection screen version field you can enter an ID for the version of the selection screen you want to use for queries in this InfoSet If you leave the field blank the system calls the standard selection screen when the query is executed The version consists of a three character ID The chosen selection screen version must be supported by the logical database You can use the Possible values help to find which selection screen versions are available
308. ory defined in either environment variable TMP or environment TEMP If neither TMP nor TEMP has been defined then the folder is created in your main directory InfoZoom is then subsequently started with the folder that has been created 3 Display Chart This function allows you to create two dimensional representations of sublist data The Display chart function allows you to interactively choose the fields you want to represent In the first dimension you can include any sublist field desired in the second dimension only numeric fields You can also enter as many new functions of your own to the Additional function pool as you like See Maintaining the Additional Function Pool Seite 301 If the Additional function pool contains at least one function the List gt Additional function pool function and its corresponding pushbutton is are activated on all single line sublists If the Additional function pool contains exactly one function then this function is automatically executed whenever the Additional function pool is called If the Additional function pool contains more than one function a dialog box appears listing all of the functions at your disposal with their corresponding long texts From this list you can both choose and execute functions AN All Additional function pool functions delivered by SAP can be found in the list of additional functions but are not yet active You must activate these functions during Additional fun
309. oses SY LANGU as the language key However such default values often serve no useful purpose and you must specify values for the key field yourself The following shows a SELECT statement using a default value 234 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Assigning Additional Tables oPFLI CARRID Decide whether or not you want to use the Buffer internally option for the additional table This option can be used to improve the performance of your query If you choose this option then all queries that use this additional table will save the records they read from it in an internal table If a record from the table is needed the system first checks to see if the record already exists in the internal table If the record does not exist in the internal table then a SELECT SINGLE statement is used to reads the record from the database and insert it into the internal table Internal buffering prevents additional table records from being read more than once each time a query is executed Buffer internally should only be used when you expect an additional table record to be read numerous times during query processing Otherwise you should avoid using this option because the internal table takes up memory space In addition with very large tables with numerous fields you should check to see if the time saved by using the internal table justifies the amount of memory space needed to store it mf In logical database F1S which is used for ex
310. ou see the example dates in the output list again You need to update the data again so that the query is executed again An additional column for currencies or units is not output in statistics or ranked lists Choose Edit Settings on the tabstrip Statistics Ranked List if you want to enter a reference currency to which all currency fields are converted April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Formatting the Output Enhance Statistics You can enhance statistics These enhancements are only with the following columns possible for numerical columns e Mean values e Percentage based distributions Number of processed data records Choose Output mean value Output share in or Output total number in the context menu of the value column The various output lists include further options to enable you to edit output For more information on how to edit output lists see Interactive List Display Functions Seite 109 and Interactive Functions for Further List Processing Seite 117 For more information on how to output data in the SAP List Viewer see SAP List Viewer ALV Grid Control Extern April 2001 29 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Reusing Queries Reusing Queries Use You can save queries that you need frequently You can then open and execute them again in InfoSet Query e f you frequently use a query with the same selection fields but different values you should save it without value
311. ou can also place the cursor on a query name and call one of the functions offered in the bottom part of the dialog window for the chosen query You can use the Delete function only if you have change authorization for queries Directory of All Queries If you want a list of queries for all user groups choose Environment Directories All queries However you should be aware that the system displays only the queries which your current user group is allowed to copy and execute In this directory there is one page for each user group 90 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Directory of Queries General specifications Author ABAP 31 00 1999 Last changed hy ABAP 31 06 1999 Notes Overviem af all existing flight bookings with subtotals per flight Functional area FLBU Flight bookings Origin of data Logical database F15 Generated lists Additional selections Mone Standard wariant None You can also scroll through this display You can position the cursor on a query and call one of the functions Choose Description Execute and so on for the chosen query You can use the Copy function only if you have a change authorization for queries g The list of all queries is often very long If therefore you are interested in the queries of one particular user group you can use the user groups function to choose a user group and display the associated queries April 2001 91 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF S
312. ouble click on it to branch to the additional information maintenance screen When connecting additional tables additional fields and additional structures to logical databases you must bear in mind the following points e Queries read linked additional tables using the ABAP statement SELECT SINGLE FROM lt table gt WHERE e You have to specify when to read the additional table You determine this by assigning the additional table to a particular logical database table For example it makes no sense to assign the table SCUSTOM customer data to the table SPFLI flight connections of the logical database F1S since no meaningful values can be assigned to the key field SCUSTOM ID customer number during the event that processes SPFLI data Only when processing data from the database table SBOOK bookings can you use the customer number and then for example retrieve the customer name e You must fill all key fields e Finally you must assign all additional table fields used in queries to a field group in the same way as table fields for a data source of a field group You can link any tables as additional tables provided they are defined in the ABAP Dictionary and can be read with ABAP Open SQL Pay attention to the following when defining additional fields e You must specify when the calculation is to be performed You do this by assigning the calculation to a logical database table It makes no sense to calculate the number
313. out e Toolbars e Fields appearing in toolbars e Icons in toolbars You may also change the width of certain selected elements windows in the list layout toolbars by placing your cursor on the right edge of the element and increasing or decreasing its width with the left mouse button If an element is selected in the layout window information about that element is displayed in the lower left window as soon as the blue frame appears around it in the layout window With fields long texts technical names and list attributes display line position display length sort number etc are displayed You may change these attributes directly in this window Any entry you make in this window must be confirmed using the Apply pushbutton You may also call a context menu for an element using your right mouse button once that element has been selected in the layout window This context menu allows you to display general list attributes or the attributes of specific list lines in the lower left window that cannot otherwise be simulated graphically As with the other attributes any entries or changes you make in this window must be confirmed using the Apply pushbutton For more information see Selecting List Fields Seite 369 Selecting Selection Fields Seite 370 List Display Options Seite 371 List Line Output Options Seite 375 Field Display Options Seite 380 Output Options for Control Levels Seite 390 Toolbars Seite 397 368 A
314. output for each selected object However if you want to output all of the records that exist for each selected object choose Edit gt Settings select the Output tab page and deselect the Use selection conditions indicator p LJ In the first step you select all persons whose permanent residence is New York The result is the set of all persons whose permanent residence is New York If the Use selection conditions indicator has been set all records are output whose permanent residence is New York If the indicator has not been set all other places of residence are also output for the selected persons for example Tokyo and Munich as well as New York 68 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Process Selection Result in General Reporting Process Selection Result in General Reporting Use You can continue to process the selected set of objects with standard reports that are in the same logical database as the InfoSet used in InfoSet Query and which process the same object type that you selected in InfoSet Query Procedure 1 Make a selection see Make Selection Seite 60 2 Choose Goto gt Start report This takes you to a dialog box in which you can enter a report name or choose a report using input help You can only process the set of objects in reports that are based on the same logical database as the InfoSet used Furthermore you can only use reports that can process the same object type as the on
315. parated by Compressed display Define basic list Field Line Seguente Sot Total Counter City of departure 1 Arrival city 1 Z Airline carrier ID 1 Flight connection Id 1 Departure time 1 Arrival time 1 Flight date 2 Alare 2 2 2 Maximum capacity E n A a a a a a a m m e Occupied seats g In this basic list two different lines are defined This means that the list is a two line basic list With a two line basic list you should cancel the Columns separated by option You also want to include every individual flight connection For this select the column Frame in the following screen for the group level Departure time You can now execute your query When you have entered your selections on the selection screen you generate the following list Depart city Arrival city ID No Depart Arrive Flat date FlatPrice Capacity Occupied FRANKFURT NEW YORE SQ 0026 06 30 00 09 50 00 40 02 1995 049 00 DEM J00 d FRANKFURT NEW YORK LH 0400 10 10 00 11 35 00 0 0A 1995 099 00 DEM J350 J FRANKFURT NEW YORK LH 0402 13 30 00 15 05 00 FRANKFURT SAN FRANCISCO LH 0454 10 10 00 12 30 00 17 11 1995 1 499 00 DEM 350 Zi 168 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Defining Multiple Line Basic Lists This list is still insufficient Because you only want to output a flight connection if flights exist for the selected period The Back function returns you to the query definition Then following the norma
316. pears asking you to limit the number of database accesses Here you can either enter a number of your choice or confirm the default value 100 This dialog box prevents you from starting queries and mistakenly reading the entire dataset contained within an InfoSet All selection criteria and parameters from you selection screen are checked to see if the number of database accesses should be limited The following parameters are NOT checked DI Oo oo DJ e all parameters automatically added to the selection screen by the query date of currency conversion direct interaction specifications and so on e all invisible parameters and e all parameters that appear as either radio buttons or checkboxes on the selection screen The query is executed without further testing as soon as the system comes across a single parameter or selection criteria in any of the other fields If this is not the case the dialog box asking you to restrict the number of database accesses appears much the same as the dialog box that appears during the Test function Exception this does not occur if you are executing the query with variants or in the background If you want to output the list to a printer instead of the screen choose Program Execute and Print from your selection screen You then see a screen where you can specify the print options For a description of the different options refer to the ABAP User Manual and the online documentation Getting
317. per flight choose Tools Counting fields on off The Counting fields toolbar appears If the option Control level end Display counter is selected in the Output Options for Control Levels Seite 390 this is the setting in the standard the number of bookings is displayed for each control level and the total number of bookings is displayed at the end of the list 394 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Counting Fields From city Dest Air Nro Depart Arrival Fl date Ticket price Occupied Free Booking Customer name C 5 Amount f Tor currncy HOOEGO41 Ruthenberg K 4 0 36 ogpgpgggd4 Martin 1 455 56 HOOGOEAS SAP Italy SPA 469 12 Total Fl Date 10 05 1998 Er 456 30 16 548 776 g 898 66 Number F1 Date As opgooi Becker L HOOBEEES Mueller A HOOBEEES Ratlos Rudi HOGBEEE4 Starr HOEEEEOS Jackson M HOOBEEEG SAP Danmark WHEE SAP Oesterreich HOGBEEGE Brucher F J20 97 Total Fl Uate JE Ts ese lee Eee lis 2 d2 2 Ue 1 465 56 Number Fl Date g 2an 1 50 2 395 05 2 ddd e02 2 419 74 1 455 56 2o Esm 75 2o cea Hs 2 J a D SE E N April 2001 395 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Further Options Further Options Other options available in conjunction with control levels include e Newline An empty line is displayed before the control level e New page A page break is inserted after every control level change for example after a change of sort string e Frame control level Individual
318. plays the following list 166 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Output Options for Control Levels FRANKFURT LH 40 0 10 00 0e 15 00 FRANKFURT LH 415 09 25 00 10 30 O0 FRANKFURT LH 463 21 25 00 22 30 00 LH UF 35 00 462 06 30 Go 2402 10 30 Go 2436 17 30 00 0026 09 30 O0 BO OL 0400110 10 00 34 G0 LA 0402 13 30 001 H 5 05 GG SAN FRANCISCO LH H454 70 10 00 12 30 00 SAN FRANCISCO UA 0941 14 30 00 21 06 0U SAN FRANCISCO AA 0017 13 30 00 16 31 00 The advantage of this variant is that the sort criterion From city remains visible when you scroll in the generated list April 2001 167 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Defining Multiple Line Basic Lists Defining Multiple Line Basic Lists Suppose you want to generate a list showing for each flight connection the actual flights together with the date price and information about occupied and free seats To do this you can copy the query G2 and call it G5 Then change the title of G5 and enter a new note On the Select Field Group screen which is displayed next choose the field group Flights This is followed by the Select Field screen where you select the field that contains the required flight information You can see these fields in the screen shown below Now determine the output lines To do this branch to the screen for defining the basic list Basic list with box Frame width oo Columns se
319. ple linking of a table may be useful l mf In logical database F1S which is used for examples in this handbook two fields exist in the table SPFLI for departure and arrival airport Both fields contain a key for the table SAIRPORT which contains the long texts for airports If table SAIRPORT could only be linked to SPFLI as an additional table once then only the long texts for one of these two types of airport entries could be accessed The long text for the other airport entry would have to be determined in another manner using an additional field A similar problem occurs when a table that you want to link as an additional table belongs to a logical database Here you once again receive an error message stating that this table may only be used once You can however use alias tables to allow you to link your table more than once You can use several different alias names for a table The table can be referred to more then once using the different names To define an alias name for a table proceed as follows 1 Choose Alias Tables A window appears displaying all existing alias names including the Dictionary table definitions to which the alias names refer Alias names may not be repeated within an InfoSet They must always refer directly to a Dictionary table definition and may not be identical to the name of any Dictionary definition g The Alias Tables function also appears as a pushbutton in many dialog boxes 2 Inthe lower l
320. port Only these fields are read from the logical database The connection between the GET and SELECT statements is that in a database program the GET statement is ultimately implemented using the SELECT statement However it is possible to specify a field list in a GET statement only if the logical database being used supports these The term access optimization refers to the way that Query supports full usage of field lists in SELECT and GET statements The procedure is as follows When an InfoSet is generated a list is created containing all the fields that are needed when the InfoSet is used in a query the reference list Additional tables and sections of code additional fields code that is called at GET GET LATE and record processing are particularly significant here since other fields are accessed at these points The purpose of the reference list is to ensure that the report generator of the query can determine all the fields that are implicitly required as a result of the use of an additional table or code from the directly needed fields contained in the list Given this information the report generator is then able to specify field lists for all SELECT and GET statements that are generated If an InfoSet has no additional fields and no sections of coding the reference list can be created completely and without errors when the InfoSet is generated Problems could arise if you use ABAP code It is then possible that the InfoSet does not
321. pplies when you specify the output of the currency amount field without a unit Then several currencies without a currency appear in the totals lines For this reason you should always output currency amounts with a currency The same applies to quantity fields If you specify summation for a quantity field this is performed according to the units involved and results in a distribution in the totals lines Finally the options Total and Counter should be compared one more time The Total option causes the grand total of a specified numeric field to be calculated This means that each time the field is read in a dataset the field s value is added to the sum total The grand total is displayed at the end of the basic list With control levels you can also display subtotals A subtotal contains all values of a field that are assigned to a particular control level that is a particular sort string The Counter option causes the counter number for a particular field to be increased by 1 every time that this field is found within the data set currently being read The resulting counter total is displayed in much the same manner as a grand total at the end of the basic list Just as with sum totals counter subtotals can be displayed for individual control levels These counter subtotals show how many values have been assigned to a particular control level a If the both the Total and Counter checkboxes have been selected for a numeric field t
322. pril 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Selecting List Fields Selecting List Fields You can select list fields in the upper left window of the Query Painter The fields are displayed in a tree whose structure is derived from that of the data source If your data source is a logical database then the nodes of this tree are the same as the logical database nodes With joins each table s individual nodes make up the node of the tree All fields are found under their corresponding node Two radio buttons are assigned to each field When you select the first radio button its field is selected and transferred to the layout window and as a result of this to the list as well You can also make this selection simply by double clicking on the field name Selecting the second radio button makes the field into an additional selection criterion Selected fields are highlighted in color Depending on how many fields you select the are either inserted one after the other in a single line or in multiple lines If you do not want to fill every line but instead want to move to the next line and resume filling there you can insert new lines using the nsert line symbol in the toolbox Those lines you have selected are then placed in the new line inserted To delete selected fields undo the field s selection or drag the trash can icon from the appropriate toolbar to the field you want to delete Deleted fields are stored in the trash and can be re ins
323. ptions List Line Output Options There are two ways to define output options for a line e Place your cursor on the line in question and depress the right mouse button The following context menu appears IL No Depart city Arrival city AA H40G HEW YORK E GANCI SCO Delete field Sum of Airline carr et options List line options ara ayes Format fields justified lett Field template Choose Line options and maintain your line options in the lower left window or e Double click on an empty segment of the line next to the list field Those options that can be changed are now displayed in the lower left window on your screen For further information on line options refer to the following sections Color Seite 376 Column Headers Seite 377 Separators Seite 378 Further Options Seite 379 April 2001 375 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Colors Colors You can use colors in lists to highlight specific information Select a color from the appropriate toolbox and drag it to the line you want not to a list field This line is now displayed in that color In addition you may also choose colors from the line options in the window in the lower left hand corner using the possible values help Selecting Apply then assigns the color to a line The Hierarchy Display You may use the pushbutton Node assignment in the application toolbar of the Query Painter to highlight parts of your hierarchy display in col
324. ptions 3 Choose Result The entries are transferred for the current query When you have set up the Crystal Reports Export the path for the Crystal Report template is saved with the query Whereas the template itself is not saved with the query J It you want the query and the Crystal Reports template to be available for other users save the template in a directory that can also be accessed by these users Otherwise other users are not able to use the query and the template because the template is not saved with the query April 2001 41 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Logging Logging Use You can log the execution of queries with InfoSet Query This enables you to determine which InfoSet Query users have analyzed system data when and with which selection criteria Prerequisites The log is activated and the query is started in InfoSet Query This means you use one of the following functions in InfoSet Query e Refresh Data in the output preview e Output e Select only with HR queries The log is not used in other cases that is if you start the query as an executable program over a menu entry or via the maintenance transaction for queries in SAP Query Features The following information is logged when you execute an InfoSet e the query area e the InfoSet used e the user e the date e thetime e all selection fields including the selection values and selection options e all output fields The output i
325. query an appropriate user group and an appropriate InfoSet must exist in the target client and the InfoSet must be assigned to the user group April 2001 The query has the name G1 and belongs to the source client for the user group FB During an import the import option REPLACE overwrites the query G1 of the user group FB in the target client if this user group exists During an import the import option GROUP FX overwrites the query G1 of the user group FX in the target client if this user group exists Through this import option the query is explicitly assigned to a user group in the target client The user group can be different from the user group in the source client In both cases you must ensure that a suitable InfoSet exists in the target system and that this InfoSet is assigned to the user group FB or FX g When transporting a query the system does not transport the generated report at the same time After the transport it ensures that the report is regenerated in the target system as soon as the query is executed the first time This means that variants can be transported although the associated report is not transported 315 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Reading Transport Datasets d p A ArT gg e d e T AC ATO rat es gt pm es ALGAYVGLO en D ka f a ake a f pa ip a a Al ee k Ca To read in a transport dataset select one of the tr
326. r The following example shows such a query directory FB G Flight connections 1st example be Flight connections 2nd example G3 Flight connections 3rd example G4 Flight connections 4th example G5 Flights sorted by flight connection G6 Flight bookings Gf Totals sales per airline connection Go Flight connections falternate display R Descending list of free seats 5 Sales per airline ae sales per airline and flight connection Sd Quarterly sales per airline for one year FR OG Contents of F175 without additional tables 01 Contents of Fif s fwith additional tables Ue Contents of Fifs with local fields O35 Quarterly sales with local fields U4 Flight connections You can see from the above list that there is a checkbox for each query Select the checkboxes of the queries you want to delete and then choose Delete sel queries Before deleting a query the system always requests confirmation Afterwards it refreshes the query list You proceed in exactly the same way if you reset the change locks of queries or want to force the generation of query reports J It can be useful to generate query reports after making changes in an InfoSet if you want to ensure that the changes have really been adopted in the queries A The Generate sel queries function does not regenerate query reports but sets a flag to indicate that the report is to be regenerated before the query is next executed For each query the list also
327. r The LISTTEXT parameter contains a text which is assigned to the relevant list when you define the query DATATAB parameter The DATATAB table contains the data of the sub list passed The sequence and type of the fields correspond to the sequence of the fields output in the sub list One table line corresponds to one list line respectively Any existing line breaks in basic lists are ignored here that is they always form one table line Since the structure of the data table depends on how you define the sub list to be passed you have to define this structure beforehand in the function module For this purpose you can use the description table LISTDESC To access individual fields in the data table you use field symbols and the ASSIGN COMPONENT statement If you pass the basic list in our example one line of the data table consists of 5 fields with the following types lengths and number of decimal places 1 Field Type C Length 10 E e o bb 3 Field Type N Length 04 O Field Type P Length 08 Dec 02 a If you pass the statistic one line of the data table consists of 5 fields with the following types length and decimal places ee oe 3 Field Type I Length 04 If you pass the ranked list one line of the data table consists of 4 fields with the following types lengths and decimal places 336 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Enhancement SQUE0001 Private File To define the type length and n
328. r the HR application proceed as follows 1 On the initial screen for maintaining InfoSets enter a name for the InfoSet and choose O Create 2 On the next screen enter a name for the InfoSet and select one of the HR logical databases in accordance with your reporting requirements g Customer infotypes can be created on all HR logical databases In each individual case therefore you must decide which database to select so that you can report on customer infotypes This screen enables you to enter an authorization group Extern All of the queries that are subsequently created using this InfoSet can only be executed by persons who have this authorization group 3 Choose This takes you to the nfotype Selection for InfoSet lt infoSet name gt dialog box It contains all of the infotypes that you can access using the selected logical database e If you use logical database PCH to create an InfoSet with which to select objects in InfoSet Query select the object type first Once you have selected the object type you can select the object type s infotypes Furthermore all of the object types that can be related to the selected object type are listed below Infotypes of related objects The next level in this tree outputs all of the April 2001 267 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG InfoSets in the HR Application relationships that can exist between the object type in question and the object type that can be selected All of t
329. r of tables and in a logical database see Logical Database F1S Evaluating Flight Bookings in the appendix 87 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Displaying Directories Displaying Directories The following sections explain how to display information about user groups queries and InfoSets 88 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE User Group Directory User Group Directory To display a directory of the user groups to which you are assigned select Other user group You then see a list of two character user group names together with their long text descriptions The long text is intended to help you choose a user group Asset manager SAPQUERY AU Audit FI Document Analysis SAPQUERY FO Er Customer Analysis FI General Ledger Evaluations SAPQUERY FS FI General Ledger Analysis You can scroll through this display and choose a user group The system subsequently returns to the initial screen and displays the chosen user group in the lower part of the screen You can then choose a query you want to execute or edit April 2001 89 SAP Query BC SRV QUE mF SAP AG Directory of Queries Directory of Queries When you have chosen a user group you see the names and titles of any queries already defined there in the lower part of the screen Directory of Queries for a User Group If you need more information before selecting a query you can display a list of queries for your current user group To do
330. racters in names for example when a user group contains less than 12 characters are replaced by equals signs AN Using queries as a foundation for your own developments is not recommended Every query has a runtime system assigned to it whose interfaces can change from release to release Therefore it is in no way guaranteed that queries developed by hand can still be run after a new release has been implemented April 2001 333 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Enhancement SQUE0001 Private File Enhancement SQUE0001 Private File SAP Query has several options which allow you to pass on data generated in queries to other software products for further processing These options include e Table calculation program for example EXCEL via the XXL interface e SAP Business Graphics e Executive Information System EIS e Download to file In each case the procedure is the same The generated data is placed in an internal table the data table where the field sequence and type corresponds to that in the query list Another internal table the description table contains a description of the individual fields in the data table Apart from the type and position in the list the table also contains information about the field names Both these tables are passed to the above mentioned software products for further processing Through enhancement SQUE0001 SAP Query also allows you to use the same interface to access other softw
331. ready defined a query to the extent that you can generate a report For further information about working with variants refer to Executing Queries Online Seite 103 e Executing queries only with a variant Besides the standard variant there is also the attribute Execute only with variant You use the standard variant only if you execute the query in the component Maintain Queries However the attribute Execute only with variant applies to the generated report and is therefore also effective when you start this report directly e Change lock If you want to set a change lock for your query to protect it against changes by other users you can achieve this by selecting the appropriate field Then only the person who set the attribute can make further changes By choosing Goto gt Query directory in the component Maintain InfoSets the system administrator can cancel the lock for selected queries e Printing lists with or without a standard title This option allows you to decide whether you want to output a standard title which does not appear in the screen display for each page when printing a list The standard title contains the date the query title and the page numbering J A standard title is also generated if you execute the query in the background If you do not want the standard title but need the date or the page numbering you must maintain your headers accordingly see Changing Headers Seite 158 e Left Margin This option
332. rental locations SAPQUERY FITY PTRVP fel CAR_PROVIDER Business volume with car rental companies P SAPQUERY FITV PTRVP RECEIPT_INFO Display additional receipt information SAPQUERY FITY PTRVP el Business volume with service providers from expense re SAPQUERY FITY PTRVP 7l Le 200 1 e025 REG _HOTEL_PROW 2 pwar205 OVR A If you are not authorized to change queries the Change and Create functions do not appear on this screen You can however display a query at any time When you start the component the system takes a user group to which you are assigned and displays the names and titles of any queries already defined for this user group in the lower part of the screen By selecting Other user group you can display the user groups to which you are assigned and choose one for further processing A range of display and maintenance functions is available to you for manipulating these queries To select a query for processing by one of these functions proceed in either of the following ways e Enter the name of the query in the appropriate input field or 86 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Choosing a Query for Execution or Maintenance e Select the list entry for the query on the lower part of the screen You can now execute the function April 2001 g All the examples in this manual are based on a flight reservation system The data for this system is stored in a numbe
333. ric column and sub totals for all selected and sorted columns So to obtain sub totals for a particular sort criterion you must first sort by selecting the relevant column and if necessary other columns and calling one of the sort functions You then select the column again and call the Sum function 110 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Interactive List Display Functions All totals lines are highlighted By using the Display totals only function you can restrict the display to sub totals and the overall total To remove all totals lines select Switch off totals e Find The Find and Continue search functions allow to scan selected columns It is not possible to search in numeric columns Neither is a search carried out in the totals columns The Find function first requires you to enter a search criterion and then begins the search in the first visible line or in the first line in the table If a match is found the cursor is placed on the found term The table is then scrolled so that the found term is displayed in the first visible line The Continue search function always searches for a previously entered search criterion If the cursor is somewhere in the table the search always starts from the cursor position Otherwise it starts from the first visible line of the table By using the Find function and then repeatedly pressing Continue search you can scan a table for each occurrence of a particular term If th
334. ries pushbutton on the selection screen A dialog box appears with all the available functions You can then choose a function from this list This function name is then automatically transferred to the selection screen e The checkbox for Save with ID is always available There is also a text field where you can enter a description of the list to be saved Direct further processing of the list by saving always refers to the whole list e With all other functions apart from Save the further processing always applies to the first sub list When generating graphics the text value pairs are determined from the first line of the sub list where the values used are those in the first numeric column In the ABC analysis the values of the first numeric column are used as key figures e You can preset radio buttons with the exception of the Additional function pool when defining a query In the QuickViewer use the dropdown box available in basis mode This means that a radio button is already selected when you execute a query You can however cancel the selection e Direct interactions are possible only if you execute the query as if the list is displayed on the screen If you use Execute and print or start the report in the background no direct interactions are allowed The Save EIS and Private file functions are exceptions to this rule since you can use them when executing the query in the background e Using one of the functions Download
335. rts transactions Report Writer reports EIS drill down reports and report portfolio reports The query is integrated into this interface This means that query reports can both be called via this interface as recipient and can themselves call other reports as sender Before a query can be used as a sender or a recipient it has to be made known to the interface You should refer to the remarks on using the Report Report Interface in Assigning Title Format and Notes Seite 139 For query lists there are two interactive functions in the Goto menu which allow access to the Report Report Interface e Call report Reports are called using the interface either over the menu path Goto Call report or by double clicking F2 on the appropriate line Before a further report can be called successfully the query or query report has to be entered in the interface as sender together with the recipient reports assigned to it If only one report has been entered as recipient in the interface for this query then this report will be called automatically If more than one report has been entered a pop up window will appear in which one of the reports has to be selected The data which is to be passed to the recipient report is prepared in the Call report function This data includes all the selection criteria and parameters which were entered in the selection screen of the query Other data is determined from the position of the cursor in the que
336. ry list The cursor must always be positioned on a field In the case of a single line list single line basic list statistics ranking list all the fields in the line on which the cursor is positioned are passed together with their values If the list is a multiple line basic list then only the field on which the cursor is positioned is passed together with its field value g Data is passed only if the corresponding field has a Dictionary reference so that either a data element or a domain can be allocated to the data The data determined as above is passed across the interface as selection data to the report which was called The data is allocated to the selection criteria of the report according to the data elements and domains The recipient report is then executed with these selection criteria e Calling sequence The function Goto Calling sequence allows the user to navigate through a sequence of reports that have been called via the interface A window appears containing a list of all reports in the calling sequence A report can be chosen out of this list and marked as a return point The Report Report Interface also implements a quite different type of drill down technique to that described in Interactive List Display Functions Seite 109 Since this interface sees every query as a report it is possible to combine several queries with each other quite simply via the interface 116 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC S
337. s All queries or Queries user group g If you select Layout display the system displays the basic layout of the generated list This function is of particular interest if you are maintaining queries You can call this function anywhere within the component Maintain Queries 96 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Displaying Queries April 2001 97 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Copying Queries Copying Queries You can copy queries only if you have the authorization to make changes Within your current user group you can copy all queries However queries of other user groups can only be copied if the InfoSet used to define the query is assigned to both user groups To copy a query proceed as follows 1 Choose the name of the query you want to copy on the initial screen If you do not Know the name use the directory functions to display the query directories and then choose a query to copy from there 2 Choose Copy 3 Enter the name and the user group of the query that you want to copy in the dialog box Furthermore you must enter a name for the copied query The system proposes values for this 4 Choose Continue This takes you to the initial screen The query is added and appears in the query directory You can now continue g You can also copy queries from the query directory by selecting Environment gt Directories All queries To do this place the cursor on the desired query and select
338. s e f you frequently use a query with the same selection fields and values you should save it with a variant that is with values and selection options You can also use saved queries as templates for new queries To do this start InfoSet Query with a query or open an existing query edit it and save it with a new name You can find more information on the functions Save and Save as in InfoSet Query under Saving Queries Seite 35 Integration SAP Query enables you to access and process queries defined in InfoSet Query 30 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Creating New Queries Creating New Queries Use You can use InfoSet Query for flexible data analysis that you cannot carry out with standard reports By simply choosing selection and output fields you can define the report you need and display a results list You can repeat this process as often as you like You do not require programming skills to create reports using InfoSet Query You can also save queries make queries you have saved available for other users to use and transport queries providing you have the relevant authorization Prerequisites You are in the initial screen of InfoSet Query Depending on how you have started InfoSet Query e an InfoSet is available e aquery with selections and output fields is available e you first have to select a user group and an InfoSet from a popup Procedure 1 Inthe column Selection select the releva
339. s a 282 Code Tor Record PROCESSING acct an toed ities ain Saad es eaceam a Seti ae in ai a 284 Functions for Managing User Grou ccccseeeceeeeeeeeeceeeeeesaeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeessaeeesseeeeeesaeeeeeeas 285 Displaying User Group Directories ccccceccccsesseecceeseeeceesseceeaseecceageeecsegseesseuseeessagees 286 Managing User GO Sra deen ceiss cna cccuteice re edie drsartnncoeisseeassedracee sateen aiieesaee sagamaun eeewememcuemenneee 28 Displaying User Gi OU DS ar secs nr na Sodan a a a a a a Rani a Sadek 288 Creating US Groups r E N 289 Assigning Users and InfoSet cccccccceseecccesseeeceseeeceeuseecsaseeseaseeessageeessanseessaaes 290 Assigning Users to User Groups ccccsssceccceseeeceesseecceseeseeseeeceeueeessegseeessaeeeseas 291 PSSIG IAC INOS CUS aeia i a a a ae a e 292 COPYING USer GOUDSE id vgneiedal nesvaluccararas 293 Renaming User GrP Sisate ae a vied a a N 294 Deleting User Group S sisanne a a a ean 295 Changing User GIOUDS ariera a a E A E 296 QUe AredS oiea e a a a a IN th au hee el sie 297 Maintaining the Additional FUNCtION Poolen a aA 301 Transporing Query ODJECA 303 Transporting Global Area Objects cccccccssececceeseeeceesscecseseecsaeeecsegseeessseeesseneeessegs 304 April 2001 7 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Transporting Standard Area Objects ccccccceecceceeeeeeeseeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeesaaeeesseeeeeesaess 306 General Transport Description
340. s defined as a text field with 15 characters To specify the calculation formula you use the Complex calculation function to branch to the appropriate editor for such calculations Define Field Complex Calculation Condition GLASS C Formula BUSINESS Class condition GLASS Formula Economy Class Conditioan Class F Formula First Class otherw1se Fe sr ee D MOD i w een NAME DATE TIME lt lt gt lt AND OR NOT YM_ ICON A Gb Eh ahl Fiels Symbols E 38 To change or delete a local field on the Select Field screen place the cursor on the local field and choose the relevant function from the Edit menu Local fields are only known within the query where they are defined 148 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Extending the Selection Criteria Extending the Selection Criteria On the Selections screen you can choose the selection criteria you require when executing the query If for example you select the field Flight connection code you can specify in the program selections area that you only want to display flights with certain flight numbers If you want to make an additional selection for a field you must select it on this screen As a result the selection screen is extended by one selection criterion for this field You can also change the text for this selection criterion if you do not like the text proposed by the query Texts for sele
341. s not included in the log With the help of the Badi AQ QUERY_PROT you can attach your own log where you can create a filter or another folder for the log You can find further information on logging and on the Badi in the Basis IMG under Basis Components SAP Query gt Logging Activities You can activate the log by choosing the relevant function in Customizing of the SAP Query or via the maintenance transaction for InfoSets of the SAP Query see Activating Logging Seite 43 When you execute an InfoSet Query the specified data from the system is logged You can analyze the logs using a Query or by using the Data Browser see Analyzing Logs Seite 44 You can delete log data no longer required by choosing the relevant function in Customizing of the SAP Query or via the maintenance transaction for InfoSets of the SAP Query see Deleting Logs Seite 45 42 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Activating Logging Activating Logging Use Logging serves to log the execution of queries with InfoSet Query You can determine for which query areas of the query and for which InfoSets a log should be carried out Prerequisites You are in SAP Query in the initial screen of the maintenance transaction for InfoSets Procedure 1 Choose Extras Set Log You get to the screen Change Query Log Control Overview You can maintain entries for the database table AQPROTCUST in this screen 2 Choose New entries 3
342. s on off April 2001 397
343. s that are to be made available to the role user for reporting to this user group AN If you want the role to support the development of queries no ad hoc reporting then you have to use a user group assigned to a non temporary development class from the global area The InfoSets assigned to the user group must also have non temporary development classes This way you ensure that it is possible to develop queries that can be transported iL You can change the assignment of InfoSets to user groups at any time It is not necessary to assign users 2 Depending on the reporting type you want to use create a variant for the report SAP_QUERY_ DEVELOPMENT ROLE or SAP_QUERY_AD_HOC_ROLE by entering the name of the relevant role in the field Role You can use the other parameters as and when you need them 3 Assign the relevant user group to the role To do this call role maintenance transaction PFCG and select Change Select the key SAP_QUERY USER GROUP by double clicking on the tabstrip Personalization You get to a dialog box where you enter the user group 4 Include the report SAP QUERY DEVELOPMENT ROLE or SAP QUERY AD HOC ROLE along with the variant you created previously in the role menu To do this call role maintenance transaction PFCG select the relevant role and choose Change Select Ei Report from the Menu tabstrip Insert the relevant report into the role menu as an ABAP report with the variant you created earlier You s
344. s why InfoSets are useful and shows how to gain an overview of existing InfoSets and how to manage them SAP Query allows you to evaluate data in the R 3 System But since the R 3 System contains several hundred thousand fields in logical databases tables and sequential datasets it is simply not practical to offer all these fields for selection when creating queries Therefore before starting to create queries using the component Maintain Queries you create InfoSets using the component Maintain InfoSets Functional areas provide the user with a framework for defining a query quickly and without difficulty When you create an InfoSet you select a logical database from an application system However since one logical database can still contain a very large number of fields you combine fields together in logical units Known as field groups An InfoSet not only allows you to restrict the number of fields and group them together in meaningful units but also to define auxiliary fields and then process them like database fields You can also read the long texts in additional tables for example the long text of an airline carrier in the table SCARR and perform any necessary preliminary work This means that you can evaluate sequential datasets just as easily as SAP databases For further information refer to Creating and Changing InfoSets Seite 218 The initial screen of the component Maintain InfoSets offers you a range of functions for m
345. same data source table In this case you must ensure that the additional fields are processed in the correct sequence e Fields of a linked additional table assigned to the same data source table Here you must ensure that the additional table is accessed before the additional field is processed Whenever you are on the screen for editing additional fields you can change the following e the sequence of the ABAP code within the processing of data from the logical database table e description and header texts e format specifications and e Check box field Generate text field using like reference An attempt is made here to generate a text used for reports using the like reference for the field However you cannot change the assignment to a logical database table To assign the additional table to a different data source table you must delete the field and recreate it The example below shows the meaning of sequence numbers 242 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Creating Additional Fields Free seats in percentages Type P Ligth 003 Qutputlength lb Decimals O0 LIKE Reference o Text identification Determine LIKE reference using text field Text field sequenveoteode AB vx The value of the additional field SEATSFREE PERCENTAGE is calculated with the predefined additional field SEATSFREE This is why SEATSFREE_PERCENTAGE must have a higher number 2 than SEATSFREE 1 so that the correc
346. se You can start InfoSet Query from role menus from the SAP menu or via the maintenance transaction for queries in SAP Query Procedure Starting from SAP Easy Access Role Menu You are working with a role menu or the Standard Easy Access Menu You have already decided in which context you want to start InfoSet Query this is necessary because InfoSet Query can be used in the role menus as well as in the standard menu in several info systems 1 Start InfoSet Query from the Easy Access menu with a double click If you are assigned to a role that supports Reporting with InfoSet Query and you have started InfoSet Query from the role menu InfoSet Query starts with an InfoSet and possibly a query This means you can start directly to create or edit a query If you are not assigned to a role and have started InfoSet Query from a menu you get to a dialog box first where you have to select the query area a user group and an InfoSet This brings you to the InfoSet Query screen in which the InfoSet Query is displayed but no selections have been made However it is possible for InfoSet Query to start directly with an InfoSet or a query If this is the case you can start working on it straight away i Calling InfoSet Query has been set up in HR so that InfoSet Query starts with fixed values for the parameters Query Area and User Group and only Ad hoc Reporting can take place This means that a user who starts InfoSet Query over HR s informat
347. se fields can only be viewed by the end user in the InfoSet and be used for defining queries after you have completed this assignment 238 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Displaying a List of Assigned Additional Tables Displaying a List of Assigned Additional Tables Otherwise the system responds with an error message and refers you to the queries concerned For each assigned additional table the display lists the data source table assignment and the processing sequence for the table data The subsequent lines contain the key field setting April 2001 239 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Deleting the Assignment of Additional Tables Deleting the Assignment of Additional Tables If you want to delete an additional table you must first call the additional information screen for the corresponding database table In this context deleting an additional table means removing the assignment to a data source table To do this place the cursor on the additional table and choose the appropriate function You can delete only if the fields of the table are not used in a query That is always the case where fields of the table have not yet been included in any field groups of the InfoSet However the system rejects any attempt to delete an additional table which has already been used in queries as long as those queries still exist You can determine whether and in which queries a table field is used To do this place the cursor on a
348. ses are displayed in InfoSet maintenance in the Application specific Enhancements tabstrip 3 April 2001 265 SAP Query BC SRV QUE mF SAP AG InfoSets in the HR Application InfoSets in the HR Application You can use SAP Query in HR to report on HR data Queries are maintained as described in Creating Queries Seite 136 The special features of queries created for HR are described in Maintaining Queries in the Human Resources Application Seite 195 The maintenance procedure for HR InfoSets differs from the described procedure inasmuch as HR data fields are grouped together in infotypes InfoSet management in SAP Query is also used for InfoSet Query For further information see Functions for Managing InfoSets Seite 201 If you want to create InfoSets for HR you can use logical databases PNP PAP and PCH see HR Logical Databases Seite 270 The database you must use to create your InfoSet depends on the component in which the data you want to report on is stored The reports you can execute using InfoSets based on logical databases PNP or PCH are similar but differ in that they can select different objects The following table describes the connection between the logical database and the infotypes you can include in an InfoSet It also provides you with one or two examples of reports that you can execute using the appropriate InfoSets Logical PCH PAP database Selection Persons Objects from Applicants of Personnel Planning
349. set is stored under a key which matches the name of the transport request e If you are transporting within one R 3 System that is only from one client to another you can also import the transport dataset from the target client In this case you use the name of the transport request which is specified during the export and matches the key of the transport dataset in the table AQTDB During this import the system reads the transport dataset from the transport table AQTDB into the table AQLDB At the same time it performs numerous checks which ensure that no inconsistencies occur in the table AQLDB g Both export and import are functions of the SAP Query transport tool e f you are transporting from one R 3 System to another you must use the transport system to release and export the transport request created by the export This procedure transfers the transport dataset from the transport table AQTDB of the source system to the transport table AQTDB of the target system Then you can perform an import from the target client of the target system as described above g The transport datasets created in the transport table AQTDB by exports are not deleted after successful imports unless you specify this explicitly beforehand For this reason you cannot import a transport dataset several times for example to transport an InfoSet to several clients The second transport option involves transferring files via the R 3 download upload
350. slation 67 Users who have authorization for the authorization object S QUERY with both the values Change and Maintain can access all queries of all user groups without being explicitly entered in each user group 82 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Release Notes Changes to SAP Query Release Notes Changes to SAP Query All changes and enhancements to SAP Query are detailed in the Release Notes documentation Choose Help Release notes from any screen April 2001 83 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Application Application The following sections are directed towards the end user This chapter explains how to administer run create and change queries 84 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Functions for Managing Queries Functions for Managing Queries To manage queries you use the component Maintain Queries For further information refer to the following sections April 2001 85 SAP Query BC SRV QUE mF SAP AG Choosing a Query for Execution or Maintenance Choosing a Query for Execution or Maintenance The initial screen of the component Maintain Queries looks similar to the one below G e818 6680 5258 348 a Query from User Group SAPQUERY F T initial Screen Ci BD EIS varant O n vackground p Saved Lists Trash Quer A change qe GuickViewer qs InfoSetQuery amp e Display E Description ee ee ee T CAR_LOCATIONS Business volume by
351. st define the code to check whether a table line is to be evaluated or not As far as linking to logical database tables is concerned ABAP code for the GET and GET LATE events is treated in each case like an additional field The code becomes part of every query report generated for an InfoSet Since that code is not assigned to any InfoSet it is transparent to the end user To create or maintain GET GET LATE code for a logical database table from the InfoSet maintenance screen choose the symbol Code and GET or GET LATE with the F4 help If you chose one of these functions then first enter in an entry field at the top right of the screen a number for the sequence Humber spftli_ records number _sptli_records 1 check airptrom sptli airptrom and airpto sptli airpta The sequence is only relevant for the code for the GET event This code appears together with the code for additional fields and SELECT statements for linked additional tables in the GET event for the logical database table concerned Usually the GET event code is used for initialization and precedes additional fields and additional tables in the sequence To ensure that query reports can be generated without problems it is important that it is clear which fields are accessed in every piece of code If some code contains ABAP statements that access certain fields implicitly then an ABAP FIELDS statement must also be used in the code to ensure that all f
352. st pay special attention to the fact that queries inherit their prefixes from their user groups These kinds of user groups can in turn be transported into your system using a PUT or other transport method These queries then belong to the objects found in the namespace determined by the user group s prefix If for example a query is created in the user group SAPQUERY xx then this query inherits the prefix SAPQUERY It seems therefore that the query belongs to those objects delivered by SAP This in turn could lead to the query being overwritten during the next transport Therefore it is recommended that no new queries be created in these user groups and that you use your own user groups when creating new queries Changing Query Areas You can change query areas from each query object maintenance component by choosing Environment gt Query areas A window appears containing both query areas and their long texts Use Choose to choose the query area that you want If you choose to work in the global area this is displayed on the initial screen of the maintenance component In the standard area no such text is displayed The same maintenance component functions are available in both query areas You can display technical information about a query area by choosing Information on the screen where you chose which query area you wanted to work in A dialog box appears where a long text is displayed along with information about whe
353. stem re inserts the text you have just overwritten To return to the overview screen select Close If you have compared all the texts of the sub object it is now flagged as compared However you can still call the preceding or following sub object in the list by using the functions Previous sub object and Next sub object Before returning to the initial screen you must save any changes with the Save function You do receive a warning from the system however if you have forgotten to save You can then carry out a save April 2001 323 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG General Language Comparison Procedure 324 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Language Comparison of an InfoSet Language Comparison of an InfoSet To compare the language texts of an InfoSet specify the source and target languages on the initial screen select the radio button for InfoSets and enter the InfoSet name in the appropriate field As an example we can use the InfoSet FLBU flight bookings Choose Change to start the language comparison You then see the following overview screen e Pie E Flight connections E Flights E Bookings C E E aS ee ee eee eee M SBOOK BOOKID Booking number E SBOOK CLASS Flight class E SBOOK CUSTOMID Customer number M SBOOK CUSTTYPE Business private customer E SBOOK FORCURAM Booking price in foreign currency SBOOK INVOICE Invoice flag fyes no SBOOK LOCCURAM Price of booking in loca
354. sublist is no more than is actually required The number of columns determines when a line break occurs in basic lists With statistics and ranked lists the number of columns must be large enough to avoid line breaks April 2001 139 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Assigning Title Format and Notes g If you define statistics or ranked lists at a later stage the number of columns may increase automatically In this case you get a warning message The advantage of dynamic page size is that the system adapts the dimensions of your list to the size of the window You should therefore usually use the dynamic page size Each of the different sublists basic list statistics and ranked lists always begins on a new page If you want to display a list as a table you can define the size of the table view control with the table format specifications Special attributes allow you to define some other properties for the query or the report that it generates e Assigning a standard variant You can create one standard variant per query This variant is always used when you start the query with the help of the function Execute The name of this standard variant is also the default value for the Execute with variant function Any query with a standard variant is thus always executed with a variant g Remember that you can only maintain query variants on the initial screen For this reason defining a standard variant is possible only when you have al
355. sults list is output to SAP List Viewer If you want to output data to a full screen you can choose between different types of output Features You can choose a type of output list for output This determines if and how data is aggregated when output You can select one of the following options e Basic list e Statistics e Ranked list You can also choose the type of output This determines how data is displayed when output e SAP List Viewer e Standard list e Table control e Word processing e Spreadsheet e Private folder e Graphic e Crystal Reports e Info Zoom You can also format output in the preview of output This enables you to determine how data is arranged when output for example the sequence of columns and output list sorting and whether numerical columns are totaled Activities 1 You determine the settings see Settings Seite 39 Which type of output list is used Which type of output is used for outputting data to a full screen Whether a selection screen is displayed before output Whether the selection conditions are taken into account when data is output How many ranks are output to a ranked list How data is exported to Crystal Reports Whether the value or text is used when output fields are selected using drag amp drop or checkboxes 2 You select output fields from the overview tree by selecting the appropriate checkboxes in the Output column by using drag amp drop or by
356. t from the dialog box a user group to which you want to assign the query At this point you can switch between user groups to which you are assigned and which have access to the current InfoSet AN If you select an existing query from the list it is overwritten when you confirm The query is locked when you save it This means that other users who may be working on the query at the same time can continue to use the old version as a template in the current session with InfoSet Query but they can no longer save the query under its original name This also means that you can only save a query under a certain name if this query is not locked by another user If you have locked a query by saving it and then select a new template for InfoSet Query InfoSet or query the lock on the query used before is removed and another user can save the query in a changed version If you are not authorized to change queries you can start the InfoSet with templates change and execute queries but you cannot save the changes See also April 2001 35 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Saving Queries saving a Query Seite 37 36 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Saving a Query Saving a Query Use You can use InfoSet Query to save queries that you want to use again Prerequisites You have defined a new query You are authorized to save queries Procedure 1 Choose H 2 Ifyou are saving the query for the first time
357. t the import option GROUP bg first deletes the assignment of that InfoSet to user groups in the target client It then transfers the InfoSet to the target client and assigns it to the user group ug of the target client if such a user group exists During an InfoSet import the import option MERGE makes sure the assignment of that InfoSet to user groups in the target client is maintained It then transfers the InfoSet to the target client and copies the assignment of the InfoSet to user groups from the source client if corresponding user groups exist in the target client During an import the import option UNASSIGN first deletes the assignment of that InfoSet to user groups in the target client The InfoSet is then copied to the target client The InfoSet is not assigned to user groups As described above the import options REPLACE GROUP ug and UNASSIGN delete the assignment of that InfoSet to user groups in the target client first If however a user group in the target client still has queries that refer to the InfoSet the assignment remains 314 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Transporting a Query Transporting a Query When transporting a query only the query itself is transported If the checkbox Transport query variants is selected when you perform the transport action Export all the query variants i e all the variants of the associated query report are also transported to the transport dataset To import a
358. t Query has default values in the specified query area and user group parameters and only ad hoc reporting can take place This means that a user who starts InfoSet Query using HR s information systems either goes straight to the initial screen of the InfoSet Query where the assigned InfoSet is displayed or can choose between several assigned InfoSets In this type of call in HR the InfoSet Query is called Ad hoc Query The optional parameters are used to prepare an InfoSet or a query when calling the InfoSet Query These templates can be processed directly If no parameters are used for the call then the system tries to come up with a suitable proposal for starting the InfoSet Query from those objects role user group InfoSet last used by the user The reports call the function modules with the same name directly When calling the InfoSet Query it does not matter if the reports or the function modules are used To implement the call using menu entries however you have to use the reports 50 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Including InfoSet Query in Roles Including InfoSet Query in Roles Purpose By including the InfoSet Query in a role you ensure that the InfoSet Query is started with an InfoSet and a query and can therefore be easily used for appropriate reporting within the role Process Flow 1 Select a user group that is to be connected to the role or create a new user group Assign all InfoSet
359. t processing time the program is terminated On the last screen in the sequence for defining a basic list you can set the graphics parameters 160 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Graphics Graphics As mentioned in Executing Queries Seite 102 one line basic lists statistics and ranked lists can be displayed in graphical format On the Graphics you can define this graphical output depending on the values you choose to display and the graphic type you use LJ 1 at F ony E nai O J O ha nat J O ai By specifying the Graphic type you can determine in which format the graphic is to be displayed i Remember that some graphic types for example pie charts cannot display negative number values To generate a graphic text value pairs are passed to SAP Business Graphics When calling the graphic you choose the values by placing the cursor accordingly see Executing Queries Seite 102 The relevant texts are generated automatically The text for a particular value derives from the contents of the non numeric fields in the line of the list where this value occurs Under No of displayed values you specify how many number values you want to display in the graphic SAP Business Graphics can display up to 32 text value pairs All the specifications you make on this screen are initial values for the graphic display You can change these values using the functions in the SAP Business Grap
360. t value is in SEATSFREE when calculation takes place In the ABAP Editor the calculation looks like this seatsfree percentage seatsfree sflight seatsmax 100 If you were to access fields of a linked additional table when performing calculations the procedure would be similar To ensure that query reports can be generated without problems it is important that it is clear which fields are accessed in every piece of code If some code contains ABAP statements that access certain fields implicitly then an ABAP FIELDS statement must also be used in the code to ensure that all fields used are explicitly named You can find an example of this and further information in Access Optimization in Queries Seite 342 April 2001 243 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Assigning Additional Fields to a Field Group Assigning Additional Fields to a Field Group The defined additional fields are displayed on the screen for maintaining InfoSets at the end of the field list and can be assigned to a field group AN Do not forget to assign the defined additional fields to a field group These fields can only be viewed by the end user in the InfoSet and be used for defining queries after you have completed this assignment 244 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Displaying a List of Existing Additional Fields Displaying a List of Existing Additional Fields To request a list of defined additional fields select Environment Dir
361. table field and choose Environment Directories Queries for field or choose Queries for field in the lower right hand box Change the queries such that the additional table fields are no longer used 240 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Creating Additional Fields Creating Additional Fields To create an additional field proceed as follows 1 Double click on a data source and choose the function Extras 2 Choose Create Another dialog box appears where you must first choose to define either an additional table an additional field an additional structure or code 3 Choose Additional field and enter a field name The field name must begin with a letter The field name HEADER is reserved Free seats Type L Ligth 004 Qutputlength 010 Decimals LIKE Reference SFLIGHT SEATSOCC Text identification Determine LIKE reference using text field Textfield Sequence ofeode 1 E KAE You can enter field definitions in the additional field maintenance screen If required you can also change the proposed sequence of the ABAP code for the additional field within the section of code for GET of the logical database table in the generated query report This sequence could be important for example if you need the value of another additional field of the same logical database table for a calculation Finally you must specify how you want to determine the value of the additional field To m
362. te for e assigning user groups to the InfoSet e creating queries for the InfoSet e copying the InfoSet and e transporting the InfoSet The generated version is derived from the corrected version If the generation is successful the system deletes the corrected version from the query database When generating an InfoSet the system produces a log From this you can check whether there are any errors or warning messages The generation process involves the following steps e Comparison with the ABAP Dictionary lf for example you include a field from a logical database table in an InfoSet field group when you are processing the InfoSet or you establish a link to an additional table the system transfers the field or table field properties from the ABAP Dictionary to the InfoSet at the point is created When you save for the first time these properties become an integral part of the corrected InfoSet version During the generation process the system performs a comparison with the ABAP Dictionary and reports any differences detected If there are differences such as changes in the structure of a table defined in the ABAP Dictionary the system does not automatically modify the InfoSet since it is not always possible and meaningful to do this Deviations are reported in detail in the log list For more information see the section on Adjusting InfoSets Seite 217 e Global Syntax Check Several sections of ABAP code can belong to a
363. template ensure that the line length defined on the Title Format screen is not exceeded If a field is too long for the line it is displayed on a new line When calculating the line length do not forget the blank characters between the fields assigned by the program The query defined in this way generates the above list April 2001 179 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Defining Statistics Defining Statistics SAP Query also allows you to define statistics In contrast to basic lists the data in statistics and ranked lists is always output in compressed form For further information refer to the following sections 180 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Generating Statistics Generating Statistics Below is a Statistic showing the sales figures for each airline carrier Flq Total of curr booking Total Proportion Average DEM Number in Value 1 652 505 34 66 054 39 1 103 254 57 68 953 41 3 609 064 26 75 100 04 Exchange rate conversion factor USO gt DEM P1 62604 1 1 01 08 1999 For this purpose you can create a query S1 for the InfoSet FLBU flight bookings After assigning a title format and note you then choose the field groups Flight connections and Flights The only fields you need are Airline carrier ID and die Total of current bookings You select these on the following screen Then you call the Statistics function to branch to the definition of statistics Each statistic must
364. tep is to specify each individual condition A link condition is specified by calling the Specify condition function This function can be called for each table pair using the pushbutton on the screen to the right of the table pair When the function is called another screen appears in which the link conditions for this table pair are specified Although any conditions are possible in a table join the query supports only the case that two fields from the two tables each have the same value equality relationship The first time that the Specify condition function is called for a table pair defaults can be defined for the condition A suggested default is derived based on the foreign key dependencies stored in the Dictionary or on the key fields of the tables used in the join SPFLI aa SFLIGHT AISEA Airline carrier ID CARRIL Do 00 CARRIL Airline carrier ID Flight connection Id CONNID 01 01 CONNID Flight connection Id Country key COUNTRYFR FLOATE Flight date From city CITY FROM PRICE Ticket price Departure airport AIRPFROM CURRENCY Local currency of airline Country key COUNTRY TO PLANET YPE Plane type Destination CITYTO SEAT SMAA Wlaximum capacity Destination airport AIRPTO SEATSOCE Occupied seats Flight time FLTIME PAYMENT SUM Total of current bookings Departure time DEPT IME Arrival time ARRT IME Distance DISTANCE Mass unit of distance k DISTID Flight type charter or sc FLTYPE April 2001 Eske 45 35 275 SAP Query BC SRV QUE
365. termine if you want a blank line to be inserted in front of or after a line To do so proceed as follows e Enter the number of empty lines you want to have before or after the line under List Line Output Options Seite 375 in the lower left hand window on the screen Confirm your entries using the Apply pushbutton e Select the nsert line icon from the toolbar for additional functions toolbox and drag it to the line you want An empty line is inserted after each current line e Redisplay line in header This option allows you to repeat certain lines in every page header Ly For example a query contains a flight connection line 1 for multiple flights line 2 This means that if you are working with a fixed page size which is always the case when printing one page may contain only lines with flights However if you select the option Redisplay line in header for line 1 flight connection information the line containing the flight connection will be output on each new page Therefore it is always easy to see to which flight connection the flights on each page belong e New page If you select the option New page for a line the system inserts a page break a new page before outputting this line e Display only in connection with line n This option allows you to specify in connection with which line you want to output specific data For example flight connections line 1 should only be displayed in connection with flights l
366. that is called when a query is run With the entries he or she makes on this selection screen the user determines which data should be read from the dataset As described in Executing Queries Online Seite 103 selection screens are divided into several parts In the case of InfoSets associated with logical databases part of the selection possibilities on the screen are determined by the logical database Another portion of what appears on the selection screen can be determined when defining the query see Extending the Selection Criteria Seite 149 or is automatically retrieved for you In addition to these two possibilities you can also define additional selection fields parameters and selection criteria in an InfoSet These selection fields appear on the selection screens of all queries created using the InfoSet and form a set of standard selection fields for these queries When using InfoSets associated with logical databases you should check to see if the logical database s dynamic selections can be used for selections of this sort seeing as they are a much more efficient way of selecting data When using InfoSets without an underlying database see Creating and Changing InfoSets without an Underlying Database selection fields defined for a InfoSets are the only way to provide standard selections To define or change selection fields for a particular InfoSet call up Selections on the functional group creation screen A window is displaye
367. the client field is not part of the selection offered 228 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Deleting Field Groups Fields from Field Groups Deleting Field Groups Fields from Field Groups Deleting fields from a field group or an entire field group is easy if you have just created the InfoSet or at least not yet used it to define queries To delete a field group place the cursor on the field group in the tree and call Delete field group Deleting this field group means that the field assignments for this field group are lost To delete a single field from a field group click on the field and choose Delete field In the left hand tree you can select more then one field with the control or shift button and remove fields from the field group over the context menu lf you want to change an InfoSet for which queries have already been defined you must avoid inconsistencies between the InfoSet and existing queries Adding individual fields or even entire field groups to the InfoSet of no significance for existing queries Deleting individual fields or entire field groups means that queries requiring access to them can no longer be processed correctly Therefore you can only delete those fields and field groups that are not used in queries You can also determine in which queries a field is used To do this double click on the field and choose the function Environment Directories Queries for field or choose Queries for fie
368. the dialog box Save Query is displayed A new name is proposed for the query if you started the InfoSet Query with an InfoSet The name of the query is proposed if you started the InfoSet Query with a query You can change the names as required 3 If necessary change the name or title of the query 4 If necessary choose the User Group to which the new query is to be assigned At this point you can switch between user groups to which you are assigned and which have access to the current InfoSet Result The query is saved and locked for other users J You can save a changed query under the same name by choosing Query gt Save or under a new name by choosing Query gt Save as If you require further information see Saving Queries Seite 35 April 2001 37 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Change InfoSet Change InfoSet Use While working with InfoSet Query you can access a different InfoSet as a template for queries provided that you have the appropriate authorizations Prerequisites You are on the InfoSet Query screen You have access to more than one InfoSet Procedure 1 Choose O This takes you possibly via a confirmation prompt to the Create New Query InfoSet Selection dialog box The User Groups selection list contains all of the user groups to which you are assigned 2 Select the user group that has access to the required InfoSet The InfoSets area lists all of the InfoSets that can be accessed by t
369. the fields of this table are in use in queries then it is neither possible to generate nor to change the functional area The InfoSet can no longer be used in its current form The Goto Query directory function on the initial screen of the InfoSet maintenance component should be called to determine which queries use the table that has been removed note this function has been extended to output the tables that are referenced by each query These queries need either to be deleted or to be changed so that the table that has been removed is no longer referenced The InfoSet can then be generated or changed again April 2001 345 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Logical Databases with Different Node Types Logical Databases with Different Node Types From Release 4 0A you have the option of defining logical database nodes in various different ways 1 Type T nodes ABAP Dictionary tables called type Database tables from 4 5A This type of node corresponds to the only type of node that existed prior to Release 4 0A a flat Dictionary structure 2 Type S nodes structure from the ABAP Dictionary called Dictionary Type from 4 5A In Releases 4 0A and 4 0B this node type makes it possible for a flat Dictionary structure to be provided with an alias name that can be chosen at will within the logical database This is needed if the name of one of these structures is longer than the maximum length of 14 characters allowed for node names In addit
370. the language comparison facility i e there should be one long text for each user group To compare the language texts of user groups specify the source and target languages on the initial screen and select the radio button for user groups Choose Change to start the language comparison 330 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Appendix Appendix April 2001 331 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Overview of SAP Query Functions Overview of SAP Query Functions The SAP Query components contain a number of important and similar functions In the list below you can see the assignment of these functions to function keys This is the same for all scl and conforms to SAP standards For a detailed explanation of the individual functions refer to the online documentation if the meaning is not immediately clear from the function name There are of course other component specific functions assigned to the function keys in the various SAP Query components You can display the actual key setting on each screen 332 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Queries Queries A query definition generates an ABAP report with the name Aqmmb oq q where e MM stands for the client in the standard area For the clients 0 to 99 mm 00 99 For clients gt 99 mm a two character key determined by the system In the global area mm ZZ e b stands for your user group e q q stands for the query name e Blank cha
371. the same manner as you copy objects within the standard area Only those users in possession of the necessary transport authorization InfoSet and user group maintenance authorization can copy query objects from one query area to another Global Area Query Variants If you want to transport query variants within the global area these variants must be created as system variants System variant names begin with either SAP amp or CUS amp Other kinds of variants cannot be transported Please see also the variant documentation available on the initial variant maintenance screen 300 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Maintaining the Additional Function Pool Maintaining the Additional Function Pool All interactive functions for adjusting query lists Display as table Download to file ABC analysis and do on work according to the same principles Data from a sublist together with a description of this data is passed to another program function module using an interface Enhancement SQUE0001 which is intended for customer use also works according to this principle see Enhancement SQUE0001 Private File Seite 334 The number of functions that can be attached to query lists in this way is not limited The Additional function pool acts as a container for these functions The Additional function pool function bundles an arbitrary number of interactive functions for single line sublists that work according to the principl
372. ther or not the objects are client specific or linked to the Workbench Organizer Assigning Development Classes in the Global Area Due to the fact that query areas are linked to the Workbench Organizer a development class must be designated when query objects are created Query objects are entered into a correction request whenever they are created or changed In the global area you can classify query objects as local objects using a temporary development class usually TMP This is the same as creating a query object in the standard area There are several conditions that you should pay attention to when designating or changing development classes e All query objects in the global area have to be assigned to a development class temporary development classes included If the development class is not temporary that is to say 298 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Query Areas transportable then the object must be entered in a correction request when it is being created or changed e User groups and InfoSets can be assigned to any development class you want e Queries can only be assigned to non temporary development classes if their corresponding user groups and InfoSets are also assigned to non temporary development classes If when you are creating a query it is determined that either the InfoSet or user group assigned to that query is part of a temporary development class then your query will automatically be
373. this proceed as follows e Select Environment Directories Queries user group e Place the cursor on the input field for the query name and display a list of possible entries For each query the resulting list contains the name the title and up to three lines of notes The title and notes are intended to help you find the query your require Queries of User Group Fe Query Title and notes G Flight connections 1st example Overview of all existing flight bookings Ge Flight connections 2nd example Display of all possible flight connections sorted by point of departure destination and departure time GJ Flight connections 3rd example Display of all possible flight connections sort criterion at the beginning of the control level id Flight connections f4th example Display of all possible flight connections sort criterion in the header line G5 Flights sorted by flight connection Overview of all available flights GE Flight bookings Overview of all existing flight bookings with subtotals per flight Gr Totals sales per airline connection Bookings by airline and connection GA Flight connections alternate display Display of all possible flight connections mith field positioning and texts R1 Descending list of free seats Ranked list the 10 flights with the most free seats al sales per airline 4 gt dT v Choose amp OO ABM Rx You can scroll through this display Y
374. ting Fields for Processing April 2001 143 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Assigning Short Names Assigning Short Names Each field made available through an InfoSet can have a short name You need these short names if you want to place the value of a field in a header see Changing Headers Seite 158 or calculate a local field see Defining Local Fields Seite 145 Only in these cases do you need to assign a short name You assign a short name to a field from an InfoSet by entering the short name in the appropriate input field If you do not see such a field on the Select Field screen choose Edit 4 Short names Switch on off A short name can consist of up to 10 characters It must always begin with a letter and can contain only letters digits and the underscore character __ If you want to know whether a short name is needed place the cursor on the field concerned or on the short name and select Edit gt Short names gt References You then see a list of all the places in the query definition where the short name is used This function only returns a where used list for the short names It does not indicate which sublists of the query use the associated field Since the next section describes how to define a local field which uses the fields Distance and Flight time short names are assigned for both these fields DISTANCE IME Flight connections D Ainere O Depsnure spon Destination sp
375. tion group allows you to enter an authorization group up to eight characters long If you specify an authorization group it is inherited as an attribute by every report generated for a query via this InfoSet This means that only users authorized in their user master records to execute programs from this authorization group can execute these queries Authorization groups thus provide a way of protecting reports generated by the query from unauthorized execution g Please do not confuse authorization groups with user groups Authorization groups can be assigned for any reports and determine a user s right to execute a program Authorization groups can be entered in user master records using the authorization object S PROGRAM You can find more detailed information on this authorization object in transaction AUTH DISPLAY OBJECTS Choose here the authorization class Basis Development Environment and then the documentation for the authorization object S PROGRAM User groups help you to control access and change authorizations for queries in the SAP Query environment The following five options are open to you when selecting the data source 220 April 2001 mF SAP AG Table join using Basis table Read table directly Logical database Retrieving data with programs Sequential Datasets SAP Query BC SRV QUE Assigning Data Sources A table join always takes in several tables that are read with the aid of special f
376. tions using the authorization object S_ QUERY This authorization object contains a field ACTVT which can accept the values Change 02 Maintain 23 and Translate 67 You can assign authorizations for this authorization object Authorizations for this object always refer to both work areas If a user has authorization to change queries this means that he or she can initially create and change queries in all user groups within the standard and global areas for which he or she has been entered Action Authorization Maintaining Queries To be able to create new queries or modify existing ones in the component Maintain Queries users must have an authorization for the authorization object S_ QUERY with the value Change 02 This authorization must also be confirmed for the corresponding user group that is not revoked Authorization to change objects can however in addition be explicitly restricted to individual user groups see Assigning Users and InfoSets Seite 290 Executing Queries If a query accesses a certain table when it is run the user needs display authorization for authorization object S_TABU_ DIS Field DICBERCLS must contain the table s authorization groups This authorization object protects all tables from unauthorized access If you are accessing tables that are part of a logical database authorization for data access can be set up using the logical database Further information can be found under Logical Data
377. tiple line definition of a basic list is still not sufficient on its own to permit April 2001 109 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Interactive List Display Functions compressed display that is there are also multiple line basic lists which cannot be displayed in compressed format Displaying Totals in Basic Lists If you are summing fields in a basic list the overall total is always output Sub totals are also output for the different sort levels if defined You can suppress the individual values used to generate the totals with the Display totals only function To return to the original list select Back This is also valid for the counter See Sorting and Sub totals Seite 170 Compressing Statistics By selecting Compress statistic you can reduce the output of a statistic to the overall totals line which is always the last line plus any sub total lines you may have defined Depending on how many sort levels with sub totals exist you can gradually suppress the sub total lines of the lowest sort level i e the sort level with the greatest sort number by repeatedly activating the Compress Statistic function Conversely by activating the Expand statistic function in the same way you can redisplay the complete statistic g The function always manipulates the statistic which is either indicated by the cursor or appears first on the screen Display as Table The Display as table function allows you to display Interactive
378. to file Table calculation Word processing EIS Additional function pool or Private file to pass a list on to one of the software products mentioned above is a means of data retrieval If you execute the query in the background when using the E S function only transaction data can be transferred e Direct saving of a list when executing the query in the background allows you to perform extensive analyses in the background and to display the result later online When saving the list directly in the background the generated list is not written to the spool file and consequently cannot be printed out 132 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Creating and Changing Queries Creating and Changing Queries This chapter explains how to create and change queries There are two ways to define queries 1 The Query Painter allows you to define lists in WYSIWYG mode What You See Is What You Get The Query Painter can be used to construct basic lists Further information can be found under Creating Basic Lists with the Query Painter Seite 134 2 The system takes you through several screens Here you can define the structure of basic lists statistics and basic lists by making entries in the appropriate fields Further information can be found under Creating Queries Seite 136 g The graphical Query Painter uses various controls It can only be used when certain hardware and software requirements have been fulfilled The function
379. together in a table and then passes it to a function module written in the course of the enhancement What actually happens to the data is up the customer AN The Private file function has largely been made obsolete with the introduction of the Additional function pool see Additional Function Pool Seite 130 SAP will continue to support the Private file function for reasons of compatibility It is however recommended that you gradually re define those functions that you have in the Private file so that you can add them to the Additional function pool Be aware that additional function pool functions can only be processed online in the foreground and thus CANNOT be called during background processing In contrast contents of the private file CAN be called during background processing April 2001 129 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Additional Function Pool Additional Function Pool All interactive functions for adjusting query lists Display as table Download to file ABC analysis etc work according to the same principles Data from a sublist together with a description of this data is passed to another program function module using an interface The number of functions that can be attached to query lists in this way is not limited The Additional function pool acts as a container for these functions The Additional function pool function bundles an arbitrary number of interactive functions for single line sublists together Eac
380. tput fields If InfoSet Query was started with an InfoSet you will only see the InfoSet displayed in the top left hand corner of the screen If InfoSet Query was started with a query all areas of the screen are filled according to the query definition and the defined query settings apply for example output as a Statistic lf no parameters were used when InfoSet Query was called the steps so far via the SET GET parameters determine which InfoSet or query was last used and InfoSet Query will be started with the relevant values If InfoSet Query is started for the first time without parameters a dialog box appears in which you can select the user group and an InfoSet Reading a query as a template does not lock the query So there is no restriction as to the number of users using the query as a template at the same time Choose Goto gt Variant maintenance to maintain a query variant The Goto Report assignment function can be used to maintain entries in the Report Report Interface AN The query loaded as a template and not saved or the last one used is always the one to be maintained This means that you can make the entries straight after loading a query See also Editing the InfoSet Display Seite 21 Output List Display Seite 25 Creating New Queries Seite 31 Settings Seite 39 Calling Other Reports Seite 116 April 2001 15 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Starting InfoSet Query Starting InfoSet Query U
381. ts QuickViewer on the other hand is a tool that allows even relatively inexperienced users to create basic lists QuickView definitions are user dependent You can transfer a QuickView into SAP Query in order to make reports for example accessible to additional users or to use the other functions available in SAP Query The following is a comparison of QuickViews and queries e QuickViews possess the same functional attributes as queries However only basic lists may be defined with QuickViews e n contrast to queries no user group assignment is necessary with QuickViews Each user has his her own personal list of QuickViews QuickViews cannot be exchanged between users QuickViews may however be converted to queries and then be made available to other users in a specific user group e InfoSets are not required for QuickView definition Whenever you define a QuickView you can specify its data source explicitly Tables database views table joins logical databases and even InfoSets can all serve as data sources for a QuickView You can only use additional tables and additional fields if you use an InfoSet as a data source e The QuickViewer uses various controls Certain hardware and software requirements must also be fulfilled before you can use the QuickViewer Features To define a QuickView you select certain fields according to your data source that determine the structure of your report The report can be executed in bas
382. ts of the different SAP Query objects The queries and the InfoSets and also the user groups count as these objects Texts are contained in all of these objects In principle the language comparison runs in the same way for all objects This section thus describes the general principles When you call the Utilities Translation SAP Query component you see the following initial screen You must first specify the source and target languages The source language will normally be the language in which the object was created or last changed In this way you ensure that the texts in the source language are always the latest versions You specify the source and target languages with identifiers for example DE for German and EN for English These identifiers must be different and supported by the system For a list of supported languages display the possible entries for the language fields You then specify whether you want to compare the texts of a query an InfoSet or a user group To do this select the appropriate radio button on the initial screen With queries and InfoSets you must also specify which query or InfoSet area you want to process You can display a list of queries or InfoSets using the input help for the individual input fields It is possible to select a query or an InfoSet from this list As an example for this section we can use the query G6 of the user group FB You can start the language comparison by
383. u can now change which user groups your users and InfoSets are assigned to by using the functions Assign users and InfoSets Assign Users or Assign InfoSet 296 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Query Areas Query Areas Query areas were created to allow you to fulfill varying requirements with SAP Query A query area contains a set of query objects queries InfoSets and user groups that are discrete and consistent You can differentiate between two different query areas the standard area and the global area Both query areas provide you with a full range of SAP Query functions e Standard Area In the standard query area all query objects queries InfoSets user groups are created and managed specifically for each client Query objects are not attached to the Workbench Organizer this means that they cannot be created and transported according to standard correction and transport procedures This is a big advantage for end users that want to develop queries ad hoc reports in their own client that are not meant for use in the rest of the system Query objects can still be transported however the transport process requires manual preparation and is not automatically initiated export and import takes place using Query transport tools For further information see Transporting Standard Area Objects Seite 306 e Global Area Query objects in the global area are cross client that is they are available throughout the
384. uage Comparses aiaa REA iE EENE 80 SAP Query Authorizations mcsssinsnsaiarensaarriencsasapnesncaneainsadoadannnnsaienannanpeimansadensenimsenveateiennnaannensranens 81 Release Notes Changes to SAP Query cccccsesseeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeseasseeseesneeseeeneessoeneessenenees 83 ACOE E 84 Functions for Managing Queries cccccseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeesseeeeessaeeeeesaneeesaaeeeeesaes 85 Choosing a Query for Execution or Maintenance cccccecccecseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeenaaes 86 Displaying Directories sessiresisisisininrei enea edia tern da adai Karda diadha 88 User Group DireCtory ccccccccccssscecceeseeeceeseeecceeeeeceaueeecsauseeseaseeessaeeesseaseesssageesssageees 89 Directory Of QUETICS cccccscccccseseeeceesseecceseeecsaaeecseueeecsaaseeeseaseeessageeeesageeessageeessaaeeeees 90 ITO SEL Directory a sitisrscs cases ones tenes dneiisiowed iaticd cnsisnicv aus daudeinnas ss dbines added aps sdbe lana stleedeaenulonceeuleaiameets 92 Managing QUETICS ccccscccccseeeeceeseeecceuseeccsuseeecsedeeecseuseesssaeeecsaaeeeseseeessgeeessageesessasenenes 93 Displaying QUETICS ccccccceeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeessaeeesseeeeeeseeeesaeseeesaaeeees 94 COPYING Queries ccccccccccseseeeceeseecceeseeeceaeeeceesseeeseuseeecsaueeessageeesseeesssageeessenseesseageneess 98 FR ANIM OTS ssa ecssct ence sehacyn SN E 99 Deleting QU CSS arinek iene n
385. uence you specify is important because it allows you to control the flow The code lines for an additional field should appear in the section of a generated query report used to process each data record table entry read e Additional tables Additional tables are not assigned to a particular table either The sequence is just as important as it is with additional fields e GET and GET LATE code Since the events GET and GET LATE are closely associated with logical database tables they do not occur at all in query reports for InfoSets without an underlying database Instead there is record processing code This is inserted in generated query reports at the point event where loop processing of data records table entries usually takes place The position it occupies depends on the sequence you specify There is no equivalent to the GET LATE code since no data hierarchy exists in this case The diagram below shows the sequence of sections of code you can modify in a query report for an InfoSet without an underlying database 282 April 2001 mF SAP AG START OF SELECTION SELECT FROM or READ DATASET LOOP ENDSELECT END OF SELECTION April 2001 SAP Query BC SRV QUE Special Features Parameter Coding Hilfsfelder fur DATA Coding Berechnungen z B Prufungen START Coding der Parameter Coding zur Satz verarbeitung z B Check Zusatzfelder fur Parameter Zusatztabellen END Coding eigene
386. uery by adding features that are only supported by SAP Query If you require further information see InfoSet Query Seite 11 Features If object selection is switched on working with InfoSet Query consists of two steps 52 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE HR in InfoSet Query e Inthe first step you select a set of objects hit list in accordance with selection criteria that you can specify as required You can then process the hit list You can also use InfoSet Query to create two hit lists You can add them together subtract one from the other or use them to create intersections e Inthe second step you output data as required for the objects selected in the first step You can display and forward reporting results using the following options you can choose a type of output list basic list statistics or ranked list and you can determine how data is output to the full screen for example SAP List Viewer standard list soreadsheet word processing On the InfoSet Query screen data is always output to SAP List Viewer Furthermore the preview of output includes formatting options such as summation and sorting See also HR Logical Databases Seite 270 InfoSets in the HR Application Seite 266 April 2001 53 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Switch Object Selection On Off Switch Object Selection On Off Use You are advised to use object selection in InfoSet Query when working with HR InfoSets The adva
387. umber of decimal places you use either the ABAP statement DESCRIBE FIELD or the description table LISTDESC see below LISTDESC parameter The LISTDESC description table contains a description of the fields in the data table DATATAB This includes not only the type length and number of decimal places but also any information you cannot define with the DESCRIBE FIELD statement If a query comprises several sub lists as in our example the description table always contains a description of the fields in all data tables that is all sub lists which can be passed by this query You can use the LIST ID parameter to retrieve the appropriate entries from the description table In our example then the description table always contains the descriptions of fields of the data tables for the basic list the statistics and the ranked list The description table has the structure RSAQLDESC This structure is made up of the following fields NAMENEW type C length 70 field name source field Rel 4 0 type C length 30 field name data table type C length 1 flag for lead column F F F flag for lead column F ype C length 1 flag for graphic type F F L FNAMENT pkey FOTYPE type FNZERO hype length 1 fiag for zoro display psum ypeC length 1 bummationteg FSONLY hype length Borting ag FSODS type length sorting direction type C length 2 Field group ID type C length 24 Field group text ype N length 03 list position of
388. umeric fields When you scroll horizontally these fields always remain in the visible part of the screen When defining statistics you can change the output length of fields This may be necessary for example when overflows occur as a result of Summing numeric fields To do this specify the desired output length in the column Len on the Statistic Structure screen 182 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Sorting Statistics Sorting Statistics You can sort statistics both independently of each other and independently of a basic list defined in the same query You can also generate sub totals for sort criteria The following example defines a statistic showing sales figures for each airline carrier and flight connection It outputs a sub total for each airline carrier Title sales per airline and flight connection Field Mo St De su NS Mo Av Len Rnd Unit Text Airline carrier Id 1 11 BL el Flight connection Id 2 2 RUSLE Total of current bookings J J DEM This generates the following list Fig i Total of curr booking Total Proportion Average DEM Number nM Value f5 221 90 HE 601 775 22 i 0026 BOL 682 64 r5 085 4 AA OQE4 450 047 46 D 56 455 da 1 652 505 34 657 505 34 6 0 p68 854 39 oog 39 1699 601 775 22 5 221 90 ee tes 479 35 62 604 92 L 1 103 254 57 103 254 57 na a o 68 953 41 a ot Mm oo oo oOo hoo hoo ig oa 3 609 064 46 JW BE 5 106 54 As alr
389. umerical columns 02 10 1999 17 5719 Airline carrier IDS Furthermore you can select a Type of Output List by choosing Edit gt Settings This determines if and how data is aggregated when output You can select one of the following options e Basic list e Statistics e Ranked list The settings and formatting are visualized in the output preview and apply to the data output in the InfoSet Query screen as well as to the data output in full screen You can display the real data in this area of the screen by choosing the Refresh function You can then use the SAP List Viewer functions For more information see SAP List Viewer ALV Grid Control Extern April 2001 25 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Output List Display 8 F315 alae D I 20 11 2000 19 00 00 Alitalia You can display the output list in full screen by using the HE Output function In full screen you can use other output formats in addition to those of the SAP List Viewer for example the default list 218 6 GHB an Flat date Airline carrier ID 19 11 2000 19 00 00 Alitalia 2 05 19 11 2000 19 00 00 Alitalia 19 11 2000 19 00 0 0 4litalia 19 11 2000 19 00 0 0 4litalia ZAHO 19 00 00 4litalia 26 April 2001 mF SAP AG Formatting the Output You can format the output preview in the InfoSet Query screen When you execute the query the formatting applies to the output list display in the InfoSet Query screen and
390. used in the join can be accessed in the WHERE conditions of connected additional tables or the code for additional fields even through the connection is always made to the first table of the join The field group screen contains a Join function This function can be used to call the table join maintenance again so that changes may be made at any time to the definition of a join or of the link conditions The only restrictions are that the first table of the join cannot be removed and that other tables can be removed from the join only if none of the fields of these tables are allocated to field groups 276 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Direct Read Direct Read If you want to allow the end user to generate reports by performing a direct reading on the contents of a table without having to worry about data retrieval proceed as you would for creating an InfoSet On the Title and Database specify the table name in the field Table and select Direct read The table must be entered in the ABAP Dictionary and must exist in the database Here you can also choose any of the options available when maintaining InfoSets that use logical databases for example linking additional tables as well as defining additional fields parameters and selection criteria Please take note of the remarks made at the end of the Sequential Datasets Seite 278 section i To read an additional table directly use an ABAP Open SQL loop of the form
391. user group If you want to assign new created InfoSets to several user groups without having to edit each user group manually you can use the Assign InfoSet function on the initial screen of the component Maintain User Groups i There is a similar function in the component Maintain InfoSets To assign an InfoSet to several user groups proceed as follows 1 Enter the InfoSet name in the field InfoSet on the initial screen 2 Choose Assign InfoSet 3 Inthe list of user groups mark the groups to which you want to assign the InfoSet g You can also use the Assign InfoSet function if the InfoSet has already been assigned to some user groups but you now want to change the assignment The user groups to which the InfoSet has already been assigned are flagged 292 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Copying User Groups Copying User Groups To copy a user group proceed as follows 1 Enter the name of the user group in the field User group on the initial screen 2 Choose Copy 3 Enter the name of the new user group 4 By selecting the relevant field specify whether you want to copy the queries of the user group to be copied The copied user group contains the same users as the original It is assigned to the same InfoSet If you opted to copy the queries it also contains all the queries from the original user group Otherwise it contains no queries April 2001 293 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Renaming Us
392. ut For example you can display the list of objects display details on individual objects use the set of objects as a new reporting set or relate two sets to each other This method of working has the advantage of good system performance because objects are selected using a selection routine that is particularly suitable for Human Resources e In basic mode object selection is switched off In basic mode the report s list of results is output immediately without a hit list being generated first This method of working has the advantage of enabling you to use all InfoSet fields for selection purposes Working with object selection restricts these options The following sections describe how to work with object selection Always use object selection to create reports for HR If you require further information on how to work with InfoSet Query in basic mode see the documentation on maintaining queries Seite 13 Integration e You can use InfoSet Query to continue processing and report on sets of persons selected using Manager s Desktop or HIS You can start InfoSet Query directly from these applications The selected set of persons is transferred to InfoSet Query as a reporting set e You can branch from InfoSet Query to general reporting In this case you only use the first InfoSet Query level that is you select an object set To report on this hit list you use a standard report e You can enhance queries created using InfoSet Q
393. value If you only need one value when using selection options or you can enter that value here Is there for entering multiple selections for example several single values or intervals a You can also use the functions and You can use m to delete selected selection fields You can use to check the entries you made for selection values Selection screen April 2001 23 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Selection Display SAN FRANCISCO 2 01 11 1999 5 alie If you use the selection screen instead of the ALV Grid Control the selection fields are displayed in the grouping determined by the logical database Radio buttons and pushbuttons can be displayed only on a selection screen The selection screen has the advantage that a check is run as soon as the values are entered 24 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Output List Display Output List Display The output list is displayed in the lower area of the InfoSet Query screen in the SAP List Viewer or in full screen If you have selected an output field you will first see an output preview that contains example data EEE EAE Flat date Depart Airline carrier ID Duration 12 09 1900 17 5219 Arine camieriDs 00s a i You can format the output preview This enables you to determine how data is arranged when output for example the sequence of columns and output list sorting and whether data is also aggregated for example summation of n
394. verflows like this when outputting totals you can simply increase the output length of the field If you total fields containing values in different currencies the totals are created according to currency Currency specific summation also applies when you specify the output of the currency amount field without a unit Then several currencies without a currency appear in the totals lines For this reason you should always output currency amounts with a currency The same applies to quantity fields If you specify summation for a quantity field this is performed according to the units involved and results in a distribution in the totals lines Counting In contrast to totals counting fields are not automatically displayed To count a field proceed as follows 1 Choose Tools gt Counting fields on off The Counting fields toolbar is not switched on in the standard 2 Drag the field you want to count to the Counting fields toolbar The number of times this field appears is displayed at the end of the list If sort fields have been defined for your list preliminary counts are automatically displayed at the end of each control level To suppress these preliminary counts deselect the field Display count in the Output Options for Control Levels Seite 390 Finally the options Total and Counter should be compared one more time The Total option causes the grand total of a specified numeric field to be calculated This means th
395. version of currency fields as well as the reference unit for converting units of measurement Also in this tabstrip you can determine how many ranks are displayed in a ranked list April 2001 39 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Settings Output Statsiranked list Crystalreports p Default Valitext Add counter Reference currency USD Currency translation date 29 02 2000 Type Feference unit Number of rankings The tabstrip Crystal Reports allows you to determine how the Crystal Reports Export runs if Crystal Reports start directly from InfoSet Query You can create a new Crystal Report every time you export or export the data to an existing Crystal Report on the local PC J If you export the results list of the query over the output list ALV to Crystal Reports these settings are overridden and those settings that were made in the ALV apply Output y Statsiranked list Crystalreports Default Valitext Regenerate report automatically O Template The tabstrip Default Value Text allows you to determine whether the value or the text is used when you select a field using either drag amp drop or the check boxes You can override these proposals by choosing the context menu when you select a field 40 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Settings Output Statsiranked list y Crystal reports Default Valitext Default for selection Detault for output Value 2 Enter the required o
396. vironment option on the menu bar Any of the other components can be accessed via this option April 2001 73 SAP Query BC SRV QUE MF SAP AG Groups of Query Users Groups of Query Users SAP Query is used by three different groups of people Each of these groups works with different SAP Query components e Departmental users These are end users who create new queries and generate lists by executing queries e System administrators System administrators set up the necessary environment for end users and carry out transports e Translators Translators perform a language comparison for the different texts 74 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Maintaining Queries Maintaining Queries The component Maintain Queries is aimed at end users who want to define and modify queries as well as generate lists by executing queries April 2001 75 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Maintaining User Groups Maintaining User Groups System administrators use the component Maintain User Groups to set up the appropriate environment for end users Users working within the same application are thus assigned to the same user group Within a user group it is irrelevant who has defined a certain query since anyone who belonging to that group can execute it However only users with the appropriate authorization can change queries or define new ones Users are not allowed to modify queries from other user groups although they may
397. want to use the resulting set as a reporting set for further selections you must copy it to the Reporting set If you want to use the resulting set for further set operations you must copy it to set A or set B If you require further information see Execute Set Operations Seite 65 Example You want to run a report to determine which employees at your enterprise do not have a temporary residence You cannot select non existent data records so you implement the report according to the following logic e First you select all of the employees at your enterprise and copy this set to Object set A e You select all of the employees with a temporary residence and copy them to Object set B e Set operation Set A minus set B enables you to subtract all of the persons with a temporary residence from the set of all employees The resulting set contains all of the persons who do not have a temporary residence 64 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Execute Set Operations Execute Set Operations Use You can use set operations to relate two selection results create intersection create union subtract sets Prerequisites You are working with object selection You have made a selection and the system has displayed a hit list g The Set operations shown setting is saved as a user setting so that you do not have to enter it time and time again The next time you use InfoSet Query this setting is loaded Procedure 1
398. want to use a function module with the additional function pool you should proceed as follows 1 Enter the function module as an additional function pool function in InfoSet maintenance using the Additional function pool pushbutton Create pushbutton 2 Activate the function for the additional function pool g All Additional function pool functions delivered by SAP can also be found in the list of additional functions but are not yet active You must first activate these functions in order to be able to use them Each function contained in the additional function pool is characterized by the following entries e Sequence number e Name e Activation checkbox e Long text April 2001 301 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Maintaining the Additional Function Pool e Name of function module The sequence number you select for the activated functions in this list determines the order in which they are listed in the dialog box see above Each function is identified by a language independent name and a language dependent long text Both the name and the long text description appear in the aforementioned dialog box The function module found in the list is called each time you call its corresponding function No changes can initially be made when you call the additional function pool maintenance component In order to make changes you must first call the Additional function pool gt Display lt gt Change function In chan
399. whole system and in all clients Query objects in the global area are connected to the Workbench Organizer They can be created and transported using the normal correction and transport procedures Transport is initiated automatically and no manual preparation is required The global query area is therefore well suited for centrally developing queries meant for use and distribution throughout the system All query objects delivered by SAP from Release 4 0 are located in the global query area Both the global and the standard query areas contain discrete and consistent numbers of query objects No relationships of any sort can exist between objects from different query areas For example you cannot create a query in the standard area using an InfoSet from the global area g Each query area can be viewed as a discrete namespace for query objects This means that objects can exist in different query areas that have the same name but different meanings Global Area Naming Conventions How to name queries user groups and InfoSets has already been discussed in the previous sections When naming global area query objects certain prefixes can be used g You may only use a particular prefix after first having purchased its corresponding license A prefix is composed of prefix and precedes the actual object name The symbols before and after the prefix name are actually part of the prefix A prefix can contain up to 10 characters includ
400. width are taken into account e Display list in its original form The Initial display function allows you to display the table in its initial form that is exactly as when it was first called Any subsequent steps such as sorting summing hiding of lines and columns etc are reversed or discarded April 2001 111 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Interactive List Display Functions Display in SAP List Viewer An interactive function called SAP List Viewer is now available for all sublists in a query list Interactive Basic Lists Seite 348 statistics and ranked lists This function transfers data to the SAP List Viewer from the sublist you have selected The SAP List Viewer function works in the same manner as other interactive functions that pass data The system passes either the sublist the user has selected with the cursor or if this is not the case the first sublist visible on the screen Whenever passing the initial sublist is allowed an additional radio button for this function exists on the selection screen allowing you to branch directly to the SAP List Viewer Further information about the List Viewer can be found in the documentation under ntroduction to the R 3 System 112 April 2001 MF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Saving and Redisplaying Lists Saving and Redisplaying Lists When you execute a query SAP Query evaluates the data from a database and outputs the results in a list This list disappears as so
401. xist for that InfoSet If queries do exist then the system asks you if you want to delete them If you confirm this you go to the list of queries to be deleted The InfoSet itself cannot be deleted until no more queries are attached to it J If you delete an InfoSet you also delete it from the user groups to which it is assigned Since you cannot lock user groups for this purpose InfoSets can be deleted only if the user groups are not being edited by another user See Functions for Managing User Groups Seite 285 April 2001 211 SAP Query BC SRV QUE EF SAP AG Saving InfoSets Saving InfoSets When you save an InfoSet all the information and properties for the InfoSet are written to the query database These are stored in the query database as a corrected version of the InfoSet If a corrected version already exists it is overwritten If you want to change an InfoSet the system always offers you the corrected version if one exists in query database If no corrected version is available it retrieves the generated version You can use the Save function on most screens for processing InfoSets It is not available on the initial screen in dialog boxes or in lists 212 April 2001 EF SAP AG SAP Query BC SRV QUE Generating InfoSets Generating InfoSets If you want to store a generated version of an InfoSet in the query database use the Generate function The existence of a generated InfoSet version is a prerequisi
402. y BC SRV QUE Definition of Field Groups g The technology of retrieving predefined content has already been previously realized in the framework of InfoSet maintenance using the InfoSet generator for HR InfoSets logical databases PNP PCH and PAP The existing generation shows a generalization of this technology The InfoSet generator for HR InfoSets however still remains active meaning that if InfoSets are created using logical databases PNP PCH or PAP then this generator is used for retrieving the predefined content There are two different generators for InfoSets with this You can also use additional generators some can either be used generally for all InfoSets and others just for certain data sources You can find information on connecting additional generators in the section Application specific Enhancements Seite 264 For an InfoSet with a data retrieval program a field group is created with all fields of the data structure Creating a New Field Group To create a field group proceed as follows 1 Choose the symbol Create from the function toolbar or function Edit Field Group gt Create Field Group A window appears where you can define single or multiple new field groups 2 Enter an abbreviation and a long text for each field group The abbreviation for a field group can consist of any character that you want The abbreviation only serves a technical purpose within an InfoSet when fields are being assigned to
403. y values are used to determine the segment to which each data record should be allocated e Characteristics percentage The data records are divided into groups so that a specific percentage of the data records are allocated to each group For example if the following distribution is chosen A 50 B 30 and C 20 then the data records are allocated to segment A until 50 of the total number of data records have been allocated The data records will then be allocated to segment B until the partial sum of the key figures reaches 80 50 30 of the sum of all the key figures All other data records will be allocated to segment C e Characteristics absolute A specific number of data records are allocated to each group For example if the following distribution is chosen A 10 B 20 and C then the first 10 data records are allocated to segment A the next 20 to segment B and all remaining data records are allocated to segment C When the ABC Analysis function is called the column containing the key figures must be determined first This depends on whether the ABC analysis is called from the list display or from the table display display using the table view control e Calling from the list display Position the cursor on the column whose values are to be used as key figures If you have placed the cursor on a non numeric column then the next numeric column will be used J The ABC analysis cannot be carried out for additional fields

SAP Query (BC-SRV-QUE)

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents